260071 001A_PM_S828NEW PTX_PRM_S828_260071 001 PTX PRM S828

PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001 PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001

User Manual: PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 424

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Prog
gra
amme
er’s
s
Ma
Manu
ual

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Introduction
This publication provides information about the commands supported by your printer. The commands are
organized by function groups. Each command has both a brief and a detailed description.
Each command has the following structure:
Name and function description. Information about protocol (IBM® Proprinter XLIII, IBM Personal 2381+,
EPSON FX Series, ANSI 3.64, IPDS® ).
The hexadecimal and decimal codes for the command: n represents variable parameters of the command.
The functions of these parameters are explained in its corresponding command description.

Index of Contents
Chapters

Page

Contents
Introduction
Index of Contents
Index of Command Summary in Alphabetical Order
Common commands for the Printronix S828 model printers.
Commands for the Printronix S828 model printer with the IPDS feature present
Preface

1
1
1
9
9
13
15

Chapter 1. EPSON/IBM Mode Commands
Print and Line Feed Execution
Format Control
Print Mode
Character Set
Download Character
Bit Image
Data Input Control
Miscellaneous

17
17
18
29
42
44
48
49
51

Chapter 2. Native Emulation Commands
Format Control
Native Character Set
Bar Codes
Miscellaneous

57
57
58
60
66

Chapter 3. ANSI Emulation Commands
Character Set Control
Character Pitch and Print Modes
Horizontal Movements
Vertical Movements
Interface Control
Operating System Control
Paper Path Selection
Barcode Functions
Basic Program Sample
Basic Program Printed Output

71
71
74
76
78
82
83
85
86
88
89

Contents

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Chapters

Page

Chapter 4. IPDS Commands
Overview
Physical Medium
IPDS Coordinate Systems
Processing IPDS Commands
IPDS Command Format
Acknowledge Requests and Replies
IPDS Data
Mixing Rules
IPDS Operating States
Summary of IPDS States and Commands
A typical IPDS Command Sequence
Error Handling

91
91
91
92
95
96
97
100
101
102
104
107
113

Chapter 5. IPDS Programming Information
IPDS Initialization Defaults
Command Format
Supported IPDS Command Codes
Command Function Sets
Device Control Function Set Commands
Text Function Set Commands
Image Function Set Commands
Graphics Function Set Commands
Related Drawing Orders
Bar Code Function Set Commands
Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC)
Overlay Function Set Commands
Page Segment Function Set Commands
Loaded Font Function Set Commands

115
115
116
117
118
118
149
158
160
193
196
208
209
211
212

Chapter 6. IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

215
215
215
216
216
216
218
220
229

Command Reject - X'80'
Intervention Required - X'40'
Equipment Check - X'10'
Data Check - X'08'
Specification Check-Bar Code - X'04'
Specification Check-Graphics - X'03'
Specification Check-General - X'02'
Conditions Requiring Host Notification - X'01'

231
231
231
232
233
238

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example
Text Print Samples
Bar Codes
Graphics Patterns
Graphics Example
IPDS Coding Example

Contents

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Chapters

Page

Appendix A. Code Pages
EBCDIC Code Pages (IPDS)
ASCII Code Pages
Character Sets
Hexadecimal to Decimal Table
Epson FX-series Code Pages
ANSI National Variations

247
247
293
355
357
358
361

Appendix B‐ Interfaces

363
363
369
370
370

The Parallel Interface
The Serial Interface
LAN Interface Port
USB Interface Port

Appendix C– Network Interface Reference
Network Configuration Parameters
Managing a Single Printer Configuration Using the Internal Webpage
Managing Multiple Printers Using the Remote Printer
Network Interface Summary

371
371
373
373
373

Appendix D – Lan Interface MIB Support

377

Appendix E- The Remote Printer Management Utility
Operating System Compatibility
Software Installation and Documentation

383
383
383

Appendix F – Printer Driver Support

385

Appendix G‐ Application Paper Source in IPDS

387

Appendix H- Bar Code and OCR Printing Options

389

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

393

Appendix J Addendum (Bar Codes)

395

Notices

415

Customer Support

419

Contents

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figures

Page

Figure 1.Page Presentation
Figure 2.The Physical Medium
Figure 3. The Xm,Ym Medium Coordinate System
Figure 4. The Physical-Logical Page Relationship
Figure 5. The X and Y Coordinate System and the Logical Page
Figure 6. The I and B Coordinate System on the Logical Page
Figure 7. An Example of the IPDS Data Stream
Figure 8. A Sample Page Constructed on an IPDS Printer
Figure 9. The Relationship between Home State, Page State, and Block States
Figure 10. The Relationship between Home State, Overlay State, and Block State
Figure 11. The Complete IPDS State Diagram
Figure 12. Using the Load Page Descriptor Command to Specify the Logical Page
Figure 13. Using the Logical Page Position Command to Position
Figure 14. Using the Set Media Size Command to Specify the Physical Medium
Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 1 of 3)
Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 2 of 3)
Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 3 of 3)
Figure 16. The Graphics X and Y Coordinate System
Figure 17. The Graphic Medium Presentation Space and Its Limits
Figure 18. The Graphic Window within the Graphic Medium Presentation Space
Figure 19. The Graphic Block Area on the Physical Medium
Figure 20. Graphic Block Area Position Control and the Graphic Block Area
Figure 21. Graphic Output Control and the Graphic Block Area
Figure 22. Graphic Data Descriptor and the Graphic Medium Presentation Space
Figure 23. Scale-to-Fit Mapping
Figure 24. Center-and-Trim Mapping
Figure 25. Position-and-Trim Mapping
Figure 26. Specifying the Bar Code Block Using the Bar Code Area Position Field
Figure 27. Specifying the Bar Code Block Size Using the Bar Code Output Control
Figure 28. Specifying the Bar Code Medium Presentation Space Size
Using the Bar Code Data Descriptor
Figure 29 Shows an overlay nesting.
Figure 30. Bar Code Example in IPDS
Figure 31. Graphic Patterns Example in IPDS
Figure 32. Graphic Example in IPDS
Figure 33. Print Sample from an IPDS Application Program
Figure 34. CP00037
USA/Canada/Canadian Bilingual
Figure 35. CP00260
Canadian French
Figure 36. CP00273
Austrian/German
Figure 37. CP00274
Belgian Old
Figure 38. CP00275
Brazilian
Figure 39. CP00277
Danish/Norwegian
Figure 40. CP00278
Finnish/Swedish
Figure 41. CP00280
Italian
Figure 42. CP00281
Japanese English
Figure 43. CP00282
Portuguese
Figure 44. CP00284
Spanish/Spanish Speaking
Figure 45. CP00285
English (UK)/Ireland
Figure 46. CP00290
Japanese Katakana
Figure 47. CP00297
French/French Azerty

Contents

16
92
93
93
94
95
96
101
103
104
107
129
129
132
146
147
148
161
162
162
163
165
167
169
170
172
173
199
201
205
210
232
233
234
239
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figures

Page

Figure 48. CP00420
Arabic
Figure 49. CP00423
Greek (Old)
Figure 50. CP00424
Hebrew Bulletin
Figure 51. CP00500
International 5/Swiss/Belgian
Figure 52. CP00813
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7) + euro
Figure 53. CP00833
Korean
Figure 54. CP00838
Thai
Figure 55. CP00870
Latin 2/ROECE
Figure 56. CP00871
Icelandic
Figure 57. CP00875
Greek New + euro
Figure 58. CP00880
Cyrillic
Figure 59. CP00890
Yugoslav (Old)
Figure 60. CP00892
OCR-A
Figure 61. CP00893
OCR-B
Figure 62. CP00924
Latin 9 (ISO 8859) + euro
Figure 63. CP01025
Cyrillic Multilingual
Figure 64. CP01026
Latin-5 Turkey
Figure 65. CP01097
Farsi
Figure 66. CP01112
Baltic Multilingual
Figure 67. CP01122
Estonian
Figure 68. CP01140
USA/Canada + euro
Figure 69. CP01141
Austrian/German + euro
Figure 70. CP01142
Danish/Norwegian + euro
Figure 71. CP01143
Finnish/Swedish + euro
Figure 72. CP01144
Italian + euro
Figure 73. CP01145
Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro
Figure 74. CP01146
English/UK + euro
Figure 75. CP01147
French + euro
Figure 76. CP01148
International 5/Belgian New + euro
Figure 77. CP01149
Icelandic + euro
Figure 78. USA(CP437)
Figure 79. Greek(CP437-G)
Figure 80. Croatian(CP437-SLAVIC)
Figure 81. Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7)
Figure 82 .ISO8859/1(Latin1)
Figure 83.Multilingual(CP850)
Figure 84.Old Greek(CP851)
Figure 85.EasternEurope(CP852)
Figure 86.Turkish(CP853)
Figure 87.Cyrillic(CP855)
Figure 88.Turkish(CP857)
Figure 89.EuroPCMultilingual(CP858)
Figure 90.Portugal(CP860)
Figure 91.Hebrew(CP862)
Figure 92.Canada/France(CP863)
Figure 93.Arabic(CP864)
Figure 94.CP864E(Arabic)
Figure 95.Denmark/Norway(CP865)
Figure 96Russian(CP866)
Figure 97.Turkish2(CP867)

Contents

263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figures

Page

Figure 98.OCR-A(CP876)
Figure 99.OCR-B(CP877)
Figure 100.ISO8859/2(Latin2)
Figure 101.ISO8859/3(Latin3)
Figure 102.ISO8859/4(Latin4)
Figure 103.ISO8859/5(Latin/Cyrillic)
Figure 104.ISO8859/8 (Latin 8)
Figure 105.ISO8859/9(Latin5)
Figure 106.BalticWindows(CP921)
Figure 107.Estonian (CP922)
Figure 108.ISO8859/15(Latin9)
Figure 109.Urdu (CP01006)
Figure 110.Arabic Extended (CP1046)
Figure 111.ISO8859/6(Latin/Arabic)
Figure 112.Farsi(CP1098)
Figure 113.Estonian (CP1116)
Figure 114.Latvian (Personal Computer) (CP1117)
Figure 115.Lthuanian (Personal Computer) (CP1118)
Figure 116.CentralEurope(CP1250)
Figure 117.Cyrillic(CP1251)
Figure 118.Latin1AnsiWindows(CP1252)
Figure 119.GreekWindows(CP1253)
Figure 120.TurkishWindows(CP1254)
Figure 121.HebrewWindows(CP1255)
Figure 122.ArabicWindows(CP1256)
Figure 123.Batlic Windows (CP1257)
Figure 124.MAZOWIA(Polish)
Figure 125.GOST(Russian)
Figure 126.TASS(Cyrillic)
Figure 127.UKRANIAN(oldversion)
Figure 128.KOI8-U(newversion)
Figure 129. Farsi 1
Figure 130. Farsi 2
Figure 131.Kamenicky
Figure 132.CWI
Figure 133.Roman-8
Figure 134.IN2
Figure 135.Turkish
Figure 136. Bulgarian
Figure 137.96GREEK
Figure 138.CharacterSet1
Figure 139.CharacterSet2
Figure 140.Hexadecimal to Decimal Table
Figure 141. Epson Extended Graphics Character
Figure 142. Epson Italic Character
Figure 143. Epson Extended Character Variables
Figure 144. ANSI National Variations
Figure 145. Mode Centronics
Figure 146. Mode IEEE 1284
Figure 147. Hex Dump of Intelligent Mail Bar Code in IPDS Commands Example
Figure 148. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in Native Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)

Contents

315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
368
369
399
400

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 149. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in Epson/IBM Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)
Figure 150. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in ANSI Commands Example
Figure 151. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in MTPL Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)
Figure 152. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)
Figure 153. Hex Dump of example on figure 151
Figure 154. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)
Figure 155. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)
Figure 156. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)
Figure 157. Hex Dump of example on figures 154, 155, 156
Figure 158. Bar Code Examples with MTPL Commands (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)
Figure 159. Bar Code Examples with MTPL Commands (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)
Figure 160. Hex Dump of example on figures 158, 159
Figure 161. Bar Code Examples with SEIKOSHA Commands (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)
Figure 162. Hex Dump of example on figure 161

Contents

400
401
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
409
410
411
413
414

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Tables

Page

Table 1. 7-bit Substitution
Table 2. 8-bit Substitution
Table 3. Valid IPDS Command Codes for the Printronix S828 IPDS Printer
Table 4. IPDS Command Code Summary for the 828 IPDS Printer
Table 5. An Example of an IPDS Command Sequence
Table 6. IPDS Initialization Defaults
Table 7. Front and Rear with no linking
Table 8. Related Drawing Order
Table 9. Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC)
Table 10. Exception Reporting Group Codes
Table 11. IPDS Coding Example
Table 12. Network Interface Summary
Table 13 List of the MIB of the printer
Table 14. Bar Code Printing Options for Non-UPC Family Bar Codes
Table 15. Bar Code Printing Options for UPC Family Bar Codes
Table 16. OCR Symbol Subsets

Contents

72
73
97
105
108
115
131
193
208
215
239
373
377
389
391
392

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Index of Command Summary in Alphabetical Order
This section contains a summary of commands used on the Printronix S828 model printer. It is divided into 2
separate sections. “Common commands for the Printronix S828 model printers” lists all the commands
common to all models, the standard ASCII and the one with Intelligent Print Data Stream (IPDS) option
installed.
“Commands for the Printronix S828 model printer with the IPDS feature present commands that can only be
used when the IPDS option installed.

Common commands for the Printronix S828 model printers
Command

Description

Page

BEL
BEL
BS
BS
CAN
CAN
CR

Buzzer (IBM/EPSON).
Bell (ANSI).
Print and space back one position (IBM/EPSON).
Back space (ANSI).
Cancels line. (EPSON)
Cancels data. (IBM)
Prints all received data and the column counter is set to the left margin
IBM/EPSON)
Carriage return (ANSI).
Selects printer. (IBM)
Selects printer. (EPSON)
Selects printer (Data Control 1) (ANSI)
Sets 10 cpi printing. (IBM)
Cancels compressed printing. (EPSON)
Deselects printer. (EPSON)
Deselects printer (Data Control 3) (ANSI)
Cancels double width printing (IBM/EPSON)
Bar Code Selection
Prints bar code symbols.
Re-initializes the printer.
Sets vertical spacing n/180 inch.
Sets vertical spacing 12 lines/30 mm.
Sets vertical spacing to 3 lines/30 mm.
Sets vertical spacing 4 lines/30 mm.
Sets vertical spacing 6 lines/30 mm.
Sets vertical spacing 8 lines/30 mm.
Sets the horizontal spacing to 15, 17.1, 20 CPI.
Sends the operator panel messages to the serial I/F.
Selects LQ fonts.
Sets amplification factor.
Selects/loads or parks the fanfold from the Front 2 path.
Sets quality printing.
String rotation.
Digit rotation.
Selects character set ISO Character Sets or Code Pages.
Selects/loads or parks the fanfold from the Front1 path.
Selects the user macros.

51
83
51
76
49
49

CR
DC1
DC1
DC1
DC2
DC2
DC3
DC3
DC4
DC4 DC4 ESC !
DC4 DC4 ESC (GS
DC4 DC4 ESC @
DC4 DC4 ESC 1
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 1
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 3
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 4
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 6
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 8
DC4 DC4 ESC A
DC4 DC4 ESC D
DC4 DC4 ESC g
DC4 DC4 ESC J
DC4 DC4 ESC N
DC4 DC4 ESC p
DC4 DC4 ESC R
DC4 DC4 ESC r
DC4 DC4 ESC S
DC4 DC4 ESC T
DC4 DC4 ESC u

Contents

17
76
49
50
82
29
29
50
82
29
60
66
66
57
57
57
57
58
58
58
68
58
66
67
59
67
67
59
67
68

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Command

Description

Page

DC4 DC4 ESC Y
DC4 DC4 ESC Z
DEL
DEL
ENQ
ESC
ESC ESC [ p1 a
ESC [ p1; pn h
ESC [ p1 d
ESC [ p1 q
ESC p1; pn l
ESC [ p1; pn v

Selects emulation.
Makes AGA in column.
Deletes the last character. (EPSON)
Delete (ANSI).
Enquiry (ANSI).
Escape (ANSI).
Sets or cancels underlined printing (IBM/EPSON).
Horizontal position relative (HPR) (ANSI).
Sets mode (SM) (ANSI).
Vertical position absolute (VPA) (ANSI).
Select graphics mode/density (GRM) (ANSI).
Resets mode (RM) (ANSI)
Sets vertical tab stops at specified positions
(Multiple Vertical Tab Set -VTS) (ANSI)
Sets printing style. (EPSON)
Cancels MSB control. (EPSON)
Sets the absolute printing position. (EPSON)
Selects user-defined character set. (EPSON)
Defines the user-defined download characters. (EPSON)
Sets score line. (EPSON)
Sets dot graphics printing. (IBM , EPSON)
Selects the Vertical Format Unit (VFU) channel. (EPSON)
Sets 12 CPI. (IBM)
Copies characters from ROM to RAM. (EPSON)
Reassigns dot graphics mode. (EPSON)
Initializes the printer. (EPSON)
Selects the score line. (IBM 2381 + only)
Sets font and pitch of a character. (IBM 2381 + only)
Horizontal position absolute (HPA) (ANSI).
Vertical position backward (VPB) (ANSI).
Selects national character set (Select National Characters -SNC) (ANSI).
Horizontal and vertical position absolute (HVP) (ANSI).
Selects emulation (EMU) (ANSI).
Unidirectional printing (UDP) (ANSI).
Sets bar code parameters (BC) (ANSI).
Sets horizontal tab stops at specified positions multiple horizontal
tab set (HTS) (ANSI)
Selects the printing type style. (IBM 2381 + only)
Sets double high printing and double line feed. (IBM)
Sets vertical units. (IBM)
Set the print quality. (IBM 2381 + only)
Selects 8 or 24 needle dot graphics mode. (IBM)
Sets initial conditions. (IBM 2381 + only)
Vertical position relative (VPR) (ANSI).
Horizontal position backward (HPB) (ANSI).
Special print mode (Oversize/Expanded/Bar code Mode -SPM) (ANSI).
Sets the line/character spacing (ANSI).
Left/right margin set (SLR) (ANSI).
Graphic size modification (GSM) (ANSI).
Form definition (FD) (ANSI).

68
68
50
83
82
83
29
77
87
79
86
84

ESC !
ESC #
ESC $
ESC %
ESC &
ESC ( ESC *
ESC /
ESC :
ESC :
ESC ?
ESC @
ESC [ ESC [ I
ESC [ p1 '
ESC [ p1 k
ESC [ p1 x
ESC [ p1; p2 f
ESC [ p1; p2 SP~
ESC [ p1; pn {
ESC [ p1; pn }
ESC [ p1; pn u
ESC [ @
ESC [ @
ESC [ \
ESC [ d
ESC [ g
ESC [ K
ESC [ p1 e
ESC [ p1 j
ESC [ p1 t
ESC [ p1; p2 G
ESC [ p1; p2 s
ESC [ p1; p2 SP B
ESC [ p1; p2; p3 r

Contents

81
30
50
18
44
44
30
47
19
22
45
47
51
31
34
77
80
72
80
85
76
86
78
32
32
19
33
43
52
79
77
75
82
77
75
81

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Command

Description

Page

ESC [ p1; pn g
ESC [ p1; pn m
ESC [ T
ESC [ u n
ESC [ v nm
ESC \
ESC \
ESC \ or ST
ESC ]
ESC ^
ESC _
ESC +
ESC <
ESC =
ESC =
ESC >
ESC 0
ESC 1
ESC 2
ESC 2
ESC 3
ESC 3
ESC 4
ESC 4
ESC 5
ESC 5
ESC 6
ESC 7
ESC 7
ESC A
ESC A
ESC a
ESC B
ESC b

Tab clear (TBC) (ANSI).
Select graphics rendition (SGR) (ANSI).
Selects a Code page (IBM).
Bar Codes selection. (IBM -Epson)
Sets Barcode parameters. (IBM -Epson)
Sets the relative dot position. (EPSON)
Prints characters from all characters table. (IBM)
String terminator (ANSI).
Sets a reverse line feed. (IBM)
Prints a single character from the all characters table. (IBM)
Sets or cancels overscore printing. (IBM)
Sets n/360-inch line spacing. (IBM)
Prints characters for one line from left to right. (EPSON)
Defines downloaded characters. (IBM)
Sets MSB to 0. (EPSON)
Sets MSB to 1. (EPSON)
Sets vertical spacing to 1/8 inch (IBM/EPSON).
Sets vertical spacing to 7/72 inch. (IBM)
Sets the vertical spacing to 1/6 inch. (EPSON)
Enables the vertical spacing set by ESC A. (IBM)
Sets vertical spacing to n/180 inch. (IBM , EPSON)
Sets vertical spacing to n/216 inch. (IBM XLIII, 2381 +)
Sets the current position as top of form (first printable line). (IBM)
Sets italics printing mode. (EPSON)
Sets an automatic line feed after a carriage return. (IBM)
Cancels italics printing. (EPSON)
Selects the Character Set 2 (IBM).
Selects the Character Set 1 (IBM).
Cancel Printable Code Area Expansion (EPSON)
Sets variable vertical spacing to n/60 inch. (IBM , EPSON)
Sets variable vertical spacing to n/72 inch. (IBM XLIII, 2381 +)
Sets Letter Quality justification printing. (EPSON)
Sets vertical tab stops (IBM/EPSON).
Sets vertical tab stops in one of the 8 Vertical Format Unit channels
Available (EPSON)
NUL Resets vertical tab stops (IBM/EPSON).
Resets vertical tab stops in one of the 8 Vertical Format Unit channels
Available (EPSON)
Resets to initial state (RIS) (ANSI).
Sets form length to n inches (IBM/EPSON).
Sets form length to n lines (IBM/EPSON).
Sets horizontal tab stops (IBM/EPSON).
Spaces forwards relative dot position. (IBM)
Index (ANSI).
Spaces backward relative dot position. (IBM)
Sets emphasized printing (IBM/EPSON).
Next line (ANSI).
Cancels emphasized printing (IBM/EPSON).
Sets double strike printing (IBM/EPSON).
Sets 15 CPI. (EPSON)

80
74
42
54
54
19
42
83
17
43
35
11
31
45
50
51
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
35
17
35
43
43
34
21
21
35
22

ESC B
ESC b NUL
ESC c
ESC C 0 n
ESC C n
ESC D
ESC d
ESC D or IND
ESC e
ESC E
ESC E or NEL
ESC F
ESC G
ESC g

Contents

22
22
23
84
23
23
23
24
78
24
35
78
36
36
28

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Command

Description

Page

ESC H
ESC H or HTS
ESC I
ESC J
ESC j
ESC J or VTS
ESC k
ESC K
ESC k
ESC K or PLD
ESC I
ESC L
ESC L or PLU
ESC M
ESC M or RI
ESC N
ESC O
ESC P
ESC P
ESC p
ESC Q
ESC Q
ESC Q or PU1
ESC R
ESC R
ESC S
ESC s
ESC SP
ESC T
ESC t
ESC U
ESC W
ESC w
ESC X
ESC x
ESC Y

Cancels double strike printing (IBM/EPSON).
Horizontal tab setting (ANSI).
Selects printing type for resident and DLL characters. (IBM)
Advances paper n/216 inch (IBMXLIII and 2381)
Feed paper n/216 in reverse direction (EPSON)
Vertical tab setting (ANSI).
Selects the LQ fonts. (EPSON)
Normal density dot graphics printing (60 dpi) (IBM/EPSON).
Prints test character (PTC) (ANSI).
Partial line down (ANSI).
Sets left margin. (EPSON)
Double density dot graphics printing (120 dpi) (IBM/EPSON).
Partial line up (ANSI).
Selects 10.5 point. 12 CPI. (EPSON)
Reverse index (ANSI).
Sets the skip over perforation to n lines (IBM/EPSON).
Disables the skip over perforation (IBM/EPSON).
Selects 10.5 point, 10 cpi (EPSON)
Sets or cancels proportional printing. (IBM)
Sets or cancels proportional printing. (EPSON)
Sets the right margin. (EPSON)
Deselects Printer. (IBM)
Executes Self test (ANSI).
Sets horizontal and vertical tab stops to default values. (IBM)
Selects Nation character set. (EPSON)
Sets subscript or superscript printing (IBM/EPSON).
Sets and resets Quiet printing. (EPSON)
Sets inter character space. (EPSON)
Cancels subscript or superscript printing (IBM/EPSON).
Selects characters table. (EPSON)
Sets printing direction (IBM/Epson).
Sets or cancels double width printing (IBM/EPSON).
Sets or cancels double height printing. (EPSON)
Sets left and right margins. (IBM)
Selects Letter Quality or Draft. (EPSON)
Double density dot graphics printing at double-speed graphics
(120 virtual dpi) (IBM/EPSON)
Quadruple density dot graphics printing (240 virtual dpi) (IBM/EPSON)
Advances paper to the top of the next page (IBM/EPSON).
Form feed (ANSI).
Logically moves the print carriage to the next horizontal tab stop
(IBM/EPSON).
Horizontal tab (ANSI).
Line Feed (IBM/EPSON).
Line feed (ANSI).
Ignored (ANSI).
Sets compressed printing. (EPSON)
Shift in (ANSI).
Sets compressed printing (IBM/EPSON).

36
78
37
18
18
81
43
47
84
79
24
48
79
37
79
25
26
37
38
38
26
51
83
26
43
38
39
27
39
44
53
40
40
27
40

ESC Z
FF
FF
HT
HT
LF
LF
NUL
SI
SI
SI or ESC SI

Contents

48
49
28
81
28
77
18
78
82
41
74
38

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Command

Description

Page

SO
SO
SO or ESC SO
SP
VT

Sets double width printing (one line) (IBM/EPSON).
Shift out (ANSI).
Sets double width printing (one line) (IBM/EPSON).
Space (ANSI).
Advances paper to the next vertical tab stop of the selected
VFU channel (IBM/EPSON).
Vertical tab (ANSI)

41
75
39
76

28
80

Commands for the Printronix S828 model printer with the IPDS feature present
Command

EBCD

Description

Page

ACK
BP
BPS
BO
DF
DO
DPS
END
EP
IO
IPS
LE
LFE
LSS
LCC
LPD
LPP
NOP
SHS
STM
WBCC
WBC
WGC
WG
WIC
WI
WT
XOH
XOA

D6FF
D6AF
D65F
D6DF
D64F
D6EF
D66F
D65D
D6BF
D67D
D67F
D61D
D63F
D61E
D69F
D6CF
D66D
D603
D697
D6E4
D680
D681
D684
D685
D63D
D64D
D62D
D68F
D633

Acknowledge Reply
Begin Page
Begin Page Segment
Begin Overlay
Deactivate Font
Deactivate Overlay
Deactivate Page Segment
End
End Page
Include Overlay
Include Page Segment
Load Equivalence
Load Font Equivalence
Load Symbol Set
Load Copy Control
Logical Page Descriptor
Logical Page Position
No Operation
Set Home State
Sense Type and Model
Write Bar Code Control
Write Bar Code
Write Graphics Control
Write Graphics
Write Image Control
Write Image
Write Text
Execute Order Home State
Execute Order Any State

Contents

211
210
130
210
212
130
130
210
211
149
123
212
126
127
129
119
122
119
197
206
164
175
158
160
150
130
140

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This page is intentionally left blank

Contents

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Preface
Print Job Processing
There are no EPSON/IBM controls that explicity define print job boundaries. A print job for the Printronix
S828 is established by the host system and consists of any set of related print objects. A print job could be
as short as one character or could be many pages long.
As an aid to the printer operator, the printer provides a DATA indicator on the operator panel. When the
DATA indicator is flashing, it indicates that data is currently being received, processed, or printing, or that
data is buffered in the printer but cannot be immediately printed. If the DATA indicator is not lit, then all print
jobs have been completed.
Configuration parameter values can be changed at any time; however, to obtain predictable results,
changes to operator panel configuration parameter values should be made before the print job is sent to
the printer and after the previous print job has completed printing. Changing configuration parameter
values while a print job is in progress may cause unpredictable results.
Printronix Company recommends the following to ensure that your print jobs run correctly:
● Establish a known print environment, and end any previous print job. Start each print job with a Set
Initial Conditions control or an Initialize Printer control. This control resets the printer environment to the
default settings. You can then set additional controls depending on your print job environment.
● End each print job with a FORM FEED control. This control causes all data to be printed, and the
current position is set to the top-of-form position.
● If a print job is abnormally terminated, the job should be canceled. See “Cancel Print” in “Chapter 2.
Understanding the Operator Panel” in the Administrators Manual for your printer.

Page Printing Concept
The Printronix Printronix S828 processes print jobs in terms of pages, as well as in lines and columns. A
page is a logical entity
whose boundaries are defined by the width and the page length. These boundaries are established during
printer initialization using the printer defaults, and can be changed using the Configuration Menu or by
issuing the appropriate data stream controls.
As a job prints, the printer controller maintains both the logical position and the physical position on the
page. If a print job does not end with a proper job terminator (for example, FORM FEED), then:
● All data for the current page may not print
● The next print job may be misaligned on the form
● Residual data from a previous job could print with the new job.

Page Presentation
Many EPSON/IBM commands (tabs, margins, line spacing, for example) are described in terms of the
presentation surface. A presentation surface is a two-dimensional surface upon which the printer positions
symbols according to controls embedded in the incoming data stream. The presentation surface is defined
in absolute terms by the width and depth parameters of the page size control commands (Set Page
Length, Set Horizontal Margins, for example). The physical print position does not move outside the range
of these two parameters. The left margin (LM) and right margin (RM) are variable parameters within the
presentation surface. The logical print position does not move outside the range of the vertical margins nor
outside the horizontal margins + 1. The following figure shows the presentation surface and the

Preface

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

relationships of some of these parameters.

Figure 1
CPP
CPL
MPP
PMPP
LM
RM
MPL

Page Presentation

Current Print Position (LM = CPP = RM).
Current Print Line
Maximum Print Position (in characters at current CPI)
Physical Maximum Print Position. The largest number of characters that can be placed on one line
of the surface (the largest value that MPP can assume).
Left Margin
Right Margin
Maximum Page Length (in lines at current LPI)

Notes:
1. The host should set the limits of the presentation surface if the default or previous values are not
acceptable.
2. The operator should align the physical paper so that it matches the logical presentation surface.
Also created with this surface is a pair of numbers (CPL and CPP) which specify the line number and
column number where the next graphic will be printed. These internal values are the logical position on the
presentation surface.
The variable parameters have default values which are established when the printer is initialized. The
standard power-on defaults are:
MPP (width) Operator panel setting
MPL (depth) Operator panel setting
CPI
Operator panel setting
LPI
Operator panel setting
LM
0 inches (Column 1)
RM
Equal to MPP
HT
Horizontal tabs are set at each 8th column, starting with column 9 (9, 17, 25, 33, and so on.)
VT
Vertical tabs are all cleared

Preface

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Chapter 1. EPSON/IBM Commands
The following printer commands are supported by this printer according to the IBM Proprinter XLIII-XLIII
AGM, IBM 2381+ and EPSON FX Series.

Print and Line Feed Execution
CR
Prints all received data and the column counter is set to the left margin (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

CR
X'0D'
13

This code is a terminator code; when received, it causes any data in the buffer to be printed out. The print
head then moves logically to the left margin position. The column counter is set to the left margin value
and a line feed is inserted automatically after the carriage return (see the automatic carriage return
function in the printer setup). The code cancels the double width printing set by the SO or ESC SO
command.

ESC ]
Sets a reverse line feed. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC ]
X'1B' X'5D'
27 93

This is a terminator code; it therefore causes the current contents of the print buffer to be printed before
advancing the paper by one line at the current vertical spacing. If no data precedes the LF code, or if the
preceding data consists of spaces, the code only causes a line feed.
When the line counter reaches the last line of the form (defined by the software or the function menu), the
LF code causes a skip to the first line of the next form. This code cancels the double width printing set by
the SO code. In IBM mode, the column counter is set to the first column if the automatic carriage return is
selected. In EPSON mode, the column is always set to the first column.

ESC 5
Sets an automatic line feed after a carriage return. (IBM)
ASCII Code
ESC 5 n
Hexadecimal Value
X'1B' X'35' n
Decimal Value 27 53 n
If n is equal to 1, this command sets an automatic line feed on receiving of a CR code. If n is equal to 0,
this command cancels the automatic line feed.
n
0
1

Automatic line feed
Disabled
Enabled

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC J
Advances paper n/216 inch. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC J n
X'1B' X'4A' n
27 74 n
1 = n = 255

This is a terminator code; it causes the current contents of the print buffer to be printed before performing
a single line feed of n/216 of an inch. This command is cancelled after the line feed has been
performed. The printing restarts after a line feed from the column at which the command was sent.

ESC j
Feed paper n/216 in reverse direction (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC J n
X'1B' X'6A' n
27 106 n
1 = n = 255

This is a terminator code; it causes the current contents of the print buffer to be printed. Then the paper is
moved backward of n/216 of an inch. The printing restarts from the column at which the command was sent.

LF
Line Feed (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

LF
X'0A'
10

This is a terminator code; it causes the current contents of the print buffer to be printed before advancing
the paper by one line at the current vertical spacing. If no data precedes the LF code, or if the preceding
data consists of spaces, the code only causes a line feed.
When the line counter reaches the last line of the form (defined by software or function menu), the LF
code causes a skip to the first line of the next form. This code cancels the double width printing set by the
SO code. In IBM mode, the column counter is set to the first column if the automatic carriage return is
selected. In EPSON mode, the column is always set to the first column.

Format Control
ESC $
Sets the absolute printing position. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC & n1 n2
X'1B' X'24' n1 n2
27 36 n1 n2
0 = n1 n2 = 255

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This command specifies the distance from the left margin to where you want to print subsequent
characters. The distance is in number of dots and must be calculated using the following formula:
Margin distance = n1 +(n2 x 256) where n2 is the integer result of the number of dots divided by 256 and
n1 is the remainder. 1 dot = 1/60 inch. If the selected position is outside the current right margin, the
sequence is ignored.

ESC[ \
Sets vertical units. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC [ \ m1 m2 t1 ... t4
X'1B' X'5B' X'5C' m1 m2 t1 ... t4
27 91 92 m1 m2 t1 ... t4
m1 =4
m2 =0
0 = t1 = 255
0 = t2 = 255
t3 =0
t4 = 180 or 216

This command changes the base units for the graphics line spacing commands (ESC J, ESC 3). The
default is 1/216 or 1/180 inch.

ESC /
Selects the Vertical Format Unit (VFU) channel. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC / m
X'1B' X'2F' m
27 47 m
0=m=7

This sequence selects the VFU channel that you want to use. Eight different channels are available. The
m parameter represents the channel you want to select.

ESC \
Sets the relative dot position. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC \ n1 n2
X'1B' X'5C' n1 n2
27 92 n1 n2
0 = n1, n2 = 255

This command specifies the distance between the current print head position and the position where you
want to print subsequent characters (relative position). The distance is a number of dots and must be
calculated using the following formula:
Current position distance = n1 +(n2 x 256)
where n2 is the integer result of the number of dots divided by 256 and the n1 is the remainder. The unit of
dots is 1/120 inch for Draft or 1/180 inch for Letter Quality printing. If the distance is negative (Most
Significant Bit of m2 equal to 1), the print head is moved to the left of the current position by the number of
dots equal to the complement on two of n1 +(n2 x 256).

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC 0
Sets vertical spacing to 1/8 inch (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC 0
X'1B' X'30'
27 48

This code causes vertical spacing to be set to 1/8 inch.

ESC 1
Sets vertical spacing to 7/72 inch. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC 1
X'1B' X'31'
27 49

This command causes vertical spacing to be set to 7/72 inch.

ESC +
Sets n/360-inch line spacing. (IBM)
ASCII Code
ESC + n
Hexadecimal Value
X'1B' X'2B' n
Decimal Value
27 43 n
Range
0 = n = 255
This command sets the line spacing to n/360 inch. If the line spacing is changed, it does not affect
previous settings for vertical tabs or page length.

ESC 2
Sets the vertical spacing to 1/6 inch. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC 2
X'1B' X'32'
27 50

This command causes the vertical spacing to be set to 1/6 inch.

ESC 2
Enables the vertical spacing set by ESC A. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC 2
X'1B' X'32'
27 50

This command enables the vertical spacing sets by ESC A.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC 3
Sets vertical spacing to n/180 inch. (IBM , EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC 3 n
X'1B' X'33' n
27 51 n
1 = n = 255

This sequence sets the vertical spacing to n/180 inch. It is ignored if n is equal to 0.

ESC 3
Sets vertical spacing to n/216 inch. (IBM/EPSON)
ASCII Code
ESC 3 n
Hexadecimal Value
1B 33 n
Decimal Value
X'27' X'51' n
Range
0 = n = 255
This sequence sets the vertical spacing to n/216 inch.

ESC 4
Sets the current position as top of form (first printable line). (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC 4
X'1B' X'34'
27 52

This sequence sets the first line of the fanfold paper as the current paper position of the form.

ESC A
Sets variable vertical spacing to n/72 inch. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
ESC A n
Hexadecimal Value
X'1B' X'41' n
Decimal Value
27 65 n
This command changes the default vertical spacing to n/72 inch. The new vertical spacing value is
immediately activated.

ESC A
Sets variable vertical spacing to n/72 inch. (IBM)
ASCII Code
ESC A n
Hexadecimal Value
X'1B' X'41' n
Decimal Value
27 65 n
This command changes the default vertical spacing to n/72 inch. The vertical spacing value is stored and
activated only after the ESC 2 code is received.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC B
Sets vertical tab stops (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC B n1 ... nx 0
X'1B' X'42' n1 ... nx 0
27 66 n1 ... nx 0
1 = n = 255

In EPSON mode, it sets the vertical tab stops in the 0 Vertical Format Unit (VFU) channel. This code sets
up to 16 vertical tab stops at the line specified by n1, n2 and so on in the 0 VFU channel. The tab stops
are memorized as physical positions. In IBM mode, this code sets up to 64 vertical tab stops at the line
number specified by n1, n2 and so on in the 0 VFU channel. The tab stops are retained as logical
positions.

ESC B NUL
Resets vertical tab stops (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC B NUL
X'1B' X'42' 00
27 66 00

This command resets the vertical tab stops in the 0 Vertical Format Unit (VFU) channel.

ESC b
Sets vertical tab stops in one of the 8 Vertical Format Unit channels available. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC b mn1 ... nx 0
X'1B' X'62' mn1 ... nx 00
27 98 mn1 ... nx 0
0=m=7
1 = n1 ... nx = 255

This sequence sets vertical tabulations in the VFU channel specified by the parameter m.
The VFU channel can be imagined as a blank page where you can set up to 16 vertical tabulations in
order to format your page as you like. 8 channels are available and in each of them you can create a
sample page that you can recall later. n1 to n16 specify the lines at which vertical tabulations must be set.
The values of n must be in ascending order. If you change the vertical spacing, the vertical tabulations set
are not cancelled and they maintain their physical position on the page.
The vertical tabulations set in the channel specified by the m parameter are executed by the VT code
when the specific channel is selected by the ESC / command, this code is executed as a line feed.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC b NUL
Resets vertical tab stops in one of the 8 Vertical Format Unit channels available. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC b NUL
X'1B' X'62' X'00'
27 98 0

This command resets the vertical tab stops in one of the 8 Vertical Format Unit channels available.

ESC C 0 n
Sets form length to n inches (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC C 0 n
X'1B' X'43' X'00' n
27 67 0 n
1 = n = 24

This command sets the form length to the number of inches specified by n. The current position of the
paper is assumed as the top-of-form.

ESC C n
Sets form length to n lines (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC C n
X'1B' X'43' n
27 67 n
1 = n = 255

This command sets the form length to the number of lines specified by n at the current vertical spacing.
The current position of the paper is assumed as top-of-form.

ESC D
Sets horizontal tab stops (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC D n1 n2 ... nx 0
X'1B' X'44' n1 n2 ... nx 00
27 68 n1 n2 ... nx 0
1 = n = 255

This sequence sets up to 28 (IBM mode) or 32 (EPSON mode) horizontal tab stops after canceling the
current setting. The n1 to nx parameters specify the number of columns at which horizontal tab stops are
required and must be entered in the sequence in ascending numerical order. Any value outside this range
is ignored. In IBM mode, the tab stop position is retained as a logical position in the page so that it is
affected by changing the horizontal spacing. The columns are numbered 1 through 136. In EPSON mode,
the tab stop position set by ESC D is retained as the physical position on the page and therefore it is not
affected by changing the horizontal spacing. The physical position of the tab stop depends on the
horizontal spacing in operation when ESC D is used. The ESC D 0 cancels all active tab stops.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC d
Spaces forwards relative dot position. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC d n1 n2
X'1B' X'64' n1 n2
27 100 n1 n2
0 = n1 n2 = 255

This command moves the print carriage (n1 +(n2*256))/120 of an inch displacement on the right of its
current dot position. If the selected position is outside the current right margin, it is forced to the last
column.

ESC e
Spaces backward relative dot position. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC e n1 n2
X'1B' X'65' n1 n2
27 101 n1 n2
0 = n1 n2 = 255

This command moves the print carriage (n1 +(n2*256))/120 of an inch displacement on the left of its
current dot position. If the selected position is outside the current left margin, it is forced to the first
column.

ESC I
Sets left margin. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC I n
X'1B' X'6C' n
27 108 n
0 = n = 255

This code sets the left margin at the current horizontal spacing. It must be sent at the beginning of the
line. The n parameter specifies the number of columns. For each type of horizontal spacing there is a
different range of possible values, as shown in the following table:
Character Width
Double Width

Horizontal Spacing
5 cpi
6 cpi
7.5 cpi
8.5 cpi
10 cpi

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

Range of columns
0 = n = 67
0 = n = 80
0 = n = 100
0 = n = 114
0 = n = 134

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Character Width
Normal

PTX‐S828
Horizontal Spacing
10 cpi
12 cpi
15 cpi
17 cpi
20 cpi

Range of columns
0 = n = 134
0 = n = 160
0 = n = 201
0 = n = 229
0 = n = 255

Any value outside the accepted range is ignored and the previous setting remains in effect. The left margin
must be smaller than the right margin. The physical position set for the left margin does not change if the
horizontal spacing is modified. This command overrides the menu setting.

ESC N
Sets the skipover perforation to n lines (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC N n
X'1B' X'4E' n
27 78 n
1 = n = 127 (EPSON mode)
1 = n = 255 (IBM mode)

The skipover perforation is the sum of the top and bottom margin values at the selected vertical spacing.
The n parameter must be less than the current form length. The skipover is retained as the physical
position on the page. It is cancelled by ESC O or changing the form length.
The skipover value, when accepted, sets the top and bottom margins according to the operator panel
setting (see the Administrators Manual):
If the top margin set using the operator panel is greater than the skipover value, the following value of the
margins is set:
Top margin = skipover value
Bottom margin = 0
If the top margin set using the operator panel is less than or equal to the skipover value, then the following
value of the margins is set:
Top margin = operator panel value
Bottom margin = the difference between skipover value and top margin value
If the sum of the top and bottom margins values set using the operator panel is less than the skipover
value, the following values for the margins is set:
Top margin = operator panel value
Bottom margin = the difference between skipover value and top margin value
Changing the vertical spacing does not affect the skipover distance. This can be changed by another ESC
N command or can be reset by the ESC O command, which resets the skipover value to 0. The skipover
perforation is performed when the end of the page is reached with a LF, VT or FF code and not with the
ESC J or ESC C command. The skipover perforation is cancelled and must be reset.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC O
Disables the skipover perforation (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC O
X'1B' X'4F'
27 79

This sequence sets the number of lines of the skipover perforation to the value 0. Any skip perforation set
by ESC N is cancelled.

ESC Q
Sets the right margin. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC Q n
X'1B' X'51' n
27 81 n
1 = n = 225

This code sets the line length at the current horizontal spacing. It must be sent at the beginning of the line.
The n parameter specifies the number of columns and for each type of horizontal spacing there is a range
of values, as shown in the following table:
Character Width
Double Width

Normal

Horizontal Spacing
5 cpi
6 cpi
7.5 cpi
8.5 cpi
10 cpi
10 cpi
12 cpi
15 cpi
17 cpi
20 cpi

Range of columns
1 <= n <= 67
1 <= n <= 81
1 <= n <= 101
1 <= n <= 111
1 <= n <= 135
1 <= n <= 135
1 <= n <= 162
1 <= n <= 203
1 <= n <= 232
1 <= n <= 255

Any value outside the accepted range is ignored and the previous setting remains in effect. The right
margin must be greater than the left margin. The physical position set for the right margin does not change
if the horizontal spacing is modified.

ESC R
Sets horizontal and vertical tab stops to default values. (IBM)
ASCII Code ESC R
Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'52'
Decimal Value 27 82
This command sets horizontal tab stops every eight columns starting from column 9 and cancels all
vertical tab stops.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC SP
Sets intercharacter space. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC SP™ n
X'1B' X'20' n
27 32 n
0 = n = 225

This command sets the intercharacter space to n/120 inch in Draft printing and n/180 inch in Quality
printing.

ESC X
Sets left and right margins. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC X n1 n2
X'1B' X'58' n1 n2
27 88 n1 n2
0 = n = 134 (left margin)
2 = n = 136 (right margin)

This command sets the left and right margins at the same time. The n1 and n2 parameters indicate
respectively the number of columns for the left and right margins at the current spacing. These margins
are retained in terms of absolute displacement from the physical left edge of the page. Use a CR
immediately after ESC X n to establish the print head position relative to the new margin setting.
If n1 is equal to 0, the current left margin of the page is used. If n2 is equal to 1, the current right margin of
the page is used. The left margin value must be less than the right margin value. The right margin value
must not exceed the physical right edge of the paper; otherwise the maximum acceptable value for the
right margin will be set.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

FF
Advances paper to the top of the next page (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

FF
X'0C'
12

This code is a terminator code, when received, causes all data in the print buffer to be printed out. Then it
advances the paper to the first printable line of the next form. The line counter is set to the first line value
and the column counter is set to the left margin value. This code cancels the double width printing set by
SO code.

HT
Logically moves the print carriage to the next horizontal tab stop (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code HT
Hexadecimal Value X'09'
Decimal Value 9
This code logically moves the print carriage to the next horizontal tab stop as defined by ESC D. Up to 28
(IBM mode) or 32 (EPSON mode) horizontal tab stops can be set. The HT code is ignored if no tab stop is
set, the current print carriage position is moved past the last tab position, or the tab stop is on or beyond
the right margin. When the printer is powered on, the tab stops are set every eight columns (default).
In EPSON mode, the default tab stops are retained as logical positions in the page that are affected by
changing the horizontal spacing. The tab stop positions set by ESC D are retained as physical positions
on the page and are not affected by changing the horizontal spacing. When double width printing is
selected, the tab stop setting must take into account that each character occupies two columns. In IBM
mode, the tab stops, both the default and those set by ESC, are retained as logical positions in the page
that are affected by changing the horizontal spacing. The horizontal tab stops can be changed by the ESC
D command.

VT
Advances paper to the next vertical tab stop of the selected VFU channel (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

VT
X'0B'
11

This is a terminator code and when received causes the contents of the print buffer to be printed before
advancing the paper to the next vertical tab stop set by the ESC B or the ESC b commands.
This code is run normally if vertical tab stops follow the current print position. It runs like an FF code
(EPSON mode) or like a LF code (IBM mode), if the vertical tab stops follow the bottom of form position (
corresponding to the form length if the bottom of the form has not been set), or if the current position is
beyond the last vertical tab stop. It runs like an LF code if no vertical tab stops have been set by the ESC
B or ESC b commands.
In EPSON mode, the vertical tabulations are referred to the VHF channel selected by the ESC / m.Ifno
VFU channels have been selected, the printer assumes the default channel 0.
This command cancels the double width printing set by SO or ESC SO command.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Print Mode
DC2
Sets 10 cpi printing. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC2
X'12'
18

This is a terminator code. It causes all data present in the print buffer to be printed. This command is
accepted at any position within the line. The character that follows this command is printed at 10 cpi.

DC2
Cancels compressed printing. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC2
X'12'
18

DC4
Cancels double width printing (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
DC4
Hexadecimal Value
X'14'
Decimal Value
20
This code cancels the double width printing set by SO or ESC SO code. It has no effect if the ESC W or
ESC ! command is set to double width.

ESC Sets or cancels underlined printing (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC - n
X'1B' X'2D' n
27 45 n

Enables or disables underlined printing. See the following table:
n
1
0

Underlined Printing
enabled
disabled

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC !
Sets printing style. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC ! n
X'1B' X'21' n
27 33 n

This command is used to select any valid combination of printing attributes. Each printing attribute is
selected by the nparameter, as specified in the following page:
n
0
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128

Attribute
10 cpi
12 cpi
Proportional
Compressed
Emphasized
Double Strike
Double Width
Italics
Underline

To print the desired combination of printing attributes, calculate the nparameter by adding up the values of
each attribute.

ESC(Sets score line. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC ( - n1 n2 md1 d2
X'1B' X'28' X'2D' n1 n2 md1 d2
27 40 45 n1 n2 md1 d2
n1 =3
n2 =0
m=1
1 = d1 = 3
d2 =0,1,2,5,6

This command enables or disables scoring of all characters and spaces following the command according
to the following parameters:
d1
1
2
3

Line
Underline
Strikethrough
Overscore

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
d2
0
1
2
5
6

PTX‐S828

Line
Cancel score line
Single continuous line
Double continuous line
Single broken line
Single broken line

Any combination of scoring may be used at the same time and are independent of each other. Graphics
characters are not scored.

ESC[Selects the score line. (IBM 2381 + only)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC [ - n1 n2 loc type
X'1B' X'5B' X'2D' n1 n2 loc type
27 91 45 n1 n2 loc type
n1 =2
n2 =0

This command selects several forms of overscore, underscore, and strikethrough.
To select loc: To select type:
loc
1
2
3

Selection
Underscore
Strikethrough
Overscore

type
0
1
2
255

Selection
Cancles Line
Single Line
Double Line
Cancels all score selections

ESC :
Sets 12 CPI. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC :
X'1B' X'3A'
27 58

This is a terminator code. It causes all data present in the print buffer to be printed. Subsequent data is
printed at 12 cpi. This command is accepted at any position within the line. The setting of another
horizontal spacing resets this command.

ESC <
Prints characters for one line from left to right. (IBM XLIII, EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC <
X'1B' X'3C'
27 60

This command causes the printing of one line from left to right.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC[@
Selects the printing type style. (IBM 2381 + only)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ @ 40m1 0m3 m4
X'1B' X'5B' X'40' 04*00*m1 00*m3 m4
27 91 64 40m1 0m3 m4

(*) These values are constants.
This command is used to modify the type style of the character and the number of line spacing. Use this
command for:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Italic printing
Single-high character
Double-high character
Single-wide character
Double-wide character
Single Line Feed
Double Line Feed

These selections may be combined, for example, italic print with double height or doublewide character
and double line feed.
See the following tables for m1, m3 and m4 selections:
m1
0
1
2
4
8
16
32

Selection
No Change
Start Italic Printing
Stop Italic Printing
Start Outline
Stop Outline
Start Shadow
Stop Shadow

m3
0
1
2
4
8
16
32

Selection
No Change
Single-High Character
Double-High Character
Single Line Feed
Double Line Feed

m4
0
1
2
4
8

Selection
No Change
Single-Wide Character
Double-Wide Character
Single Line Feed
Double Line Feed

ESC[@
Sets double high printing and double line feed. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ @ lhm1 m2 m3 m4
X'1B' X'5B' X'40' lhm1 m2 m3 m4
27 91 64 lhm1 m2 m3 m4

l= normally 4, h= normally 0, m1 =0, m2 =0
This command sets height, width, and vertical spacing.
The land hparameters specify the number of mode bytes mx contained in the sequence.
The m3 and m4 parameters specify the printing characteristics.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

The m3 parameter controls both line spacing and character height. It has two parts: a high-order half-byte
of m3 controls the line spacing and the low-order half-byte controls the character height.
m3
0
1
2
16
17
18
32
33
34

Character Height
No Change
Standard character height
Double character height
Character height unchanged
Standard character height
Double character height
Character height unchanged
Standard character height
Double character height

Line Spacing
No Change
Line feeds unchanged
Line feeds unchanged
Normal line feeds
Normal line feeds
Normal line feeds
Double line feeds
Double line feeds
Double line feeds

The m4 parameter specifies the character width. Only the low-order half-byte is significant in this mode
byte. The high-order half-byte is ignored.
m4
0
1
2

Character Width
No change
Double width character
No change

Line Spacing
Standard width character
No change
No change

ESC[d
Set the print quality. (IBM 2381 + only)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ d 10n
X'1B' X'5B' X'64' 0100n
27 91 100 10n

This command sets the print quality to draft or LQ print.
n
0
From 64 to 127
From 128 to 254
255

Types
No Change
Draft
Letter Quality
Initialization on NVRAM values

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC[I
Sets font and pitch of a character. (IBM 2381 + only)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ I 2 0 m n
X'1B' X'5B' X'49' 02 00 m n
27 91 73 2 0 m n

This command allows you to modify the character's font and style of pitch type.
The values 2 and 0 are constants. If font and pitch locks are active, this command is ignored. To select the
values for the variables m and n, which identify the pitch and the font type style to use, refer to the table
below.
1. Identify the type style (pitch and font) to use in the left column (pitch).
2. For the hexadecimal values of m and n, look across the row to the second column (Hex mn)
3. For the decimal values for m and n, look across the row to the third column (Decimal mn).
4. Substitute these values for m and n in the printer command syntax.
Pitch

Courier
10
12
15
17
20
Pitch

Gothic
10
12
15
17
20

Hexadecimal
m
n

Decimal
m

X'00'
X'01'
X'01'
X'01'
X'01'

0
1
1
1
1

11
235
236
237
238

X'00B'
X'EB'
X'EC'
X'ED'
X'EE'

Hexadecimal
m
n

Decimal
m

X'00'
X'01'
X'01'
X'01'
X'01'

0
1
1
1
1

36
143
236
237
238

X'24'
X'8F'
X'8E'
X'8D'
X'8C'

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

Dec. Value
(m x 256 + n)

11
491
492
493
494
Dec. Value
(m x 256 + n)

36
399
398
397
396

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC _
Sets or cancels overscore printing. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC _ n
X'1B' X'5F' n
27 95 n

Enables or disables overscore printing. See the following table:
n
1
0

Overscore Printing
Enabled (all spaces and characters that follow are overscored)
Disabled

ESC 4
Sets italics printing mode. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC 4
X'1B' X'34'
27 52

Sets the style attribute of the font to italic. This command selects italic printing even if the italic character
table is not selected.

ESC 5
Cancels italics printing. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC 5
X'1B' X'35'
27 53

Sets the style attribute of the font to normal (cancels the italic style attribute previously selected with the
ESC 4 command).

ESC a
Sets Letter Quality justification printing. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC a n
X'1B' X'61' n
27 97 n
0=n=3

Selects from four types of justification, as follows:
n
0
1
2
3

Justification
Left
Centered
Right
Allows an uniform printing between the margins when the buffer is full.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC E
Sets emphasized printing (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC E
X'1B' X'45'
27 69

This command starts emphasized printing. The print head strikes each dot twice to produce a darker,
bolder character. The second strike is offset horizontally.

ESC F
Cancels emphasized printing (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

SC F
X'1B' X'46'
27 70

This command ends emphasized printing. This escape sequence cancels emphasized printing that was
started by ESC E.

ESC G
Sets double strike printing (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC G
X'1B' X'47'
27 71

This command starts double-strike printing. ESC G may be canceled by ESC H.

ESC g
Sets 15 CPI. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC g
X'1B' X'67'
27 103

Subsequent data is printed at 15 cpi. This command is accepted at any position within the line. If you
change the pitch during proportional mode (selected with the ESC p command), the change takes effect
when the printer exits proportional mode.

ESC H
Cancels double strike printing (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC H
X'1B' X'48'
27 72

This command cancels double-strike printing set with the ESC G command.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC I
Selects printing type for resident and DLL characters. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC I n
X'1B' X'49' n
27 73 n

This command selects the resident or the download font in Draft or LQ printing mode. It is ignored if you
select a font that has not been downloaded or has been overwritten. See the following table:
n
0
2
3
8
10
16
18

Resident font
Draft 10 cpi
LQ10cpi
Proportional
Draft 12 cpi
LQ 12 cpi
Draft 17 cpi
LQ 17 cpi

n
4
6
7
12
14
20
22

Download font
Draft 10 cpi
LQ10cpi
Proportional
Draft 12 cpi
LQ 12 cpi
Draft 17 cpi
LQ 17 cpi

ESC M
Selects 10.5 point, 12 CPI. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC M
X'1B' X'4D'
27 77

This is a terminator code. It causes all data present in the print buffer to be printed. Subsequent data is
printed at 12 cpi, if you previously set the compressed spacing by sending the SI or ESC SI command. If
you select proportional printing, this command is stored.

ESC P
Selects 10.5 point, 10 cpi. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC P n
X'1B' X'50' n
27 80 n

This command selects 10.5 point, 10 cpi character printing. If you change the pitch during proportional
mode (selected with the ESC p command) the change takes effect when the printer exits proportional
mode.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC P
Sets or cancels proportional printing. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC P n
X'1B' X'50' n
27 80 n
1 = n = 255

This code is a terminator code. It causes all data in the print buffer to be printed. Then if the n parameter
is equal to 1, the subsequent data is printed in proportional mode. If the n parameter is equal to 0,
proportional mode is reset. If the any horizontal spacing command is sent to the printer when the
proportional printing is set, the command is stored and activated as soon as the proportional printing is
reset.

ESC p
Sets or cancels proportional printing. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC p n
X'1B' X'70' n
27 112 n
1 = n = 255

This command selects the proportional or fixed spacing according to the following values:
n
0
1

Proportional Printing
Returns to current fixed character pitch
Selects proportional character spacing

ESC S
Sets subscript or superscript printing (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC S n
X'1B' X'53' n
27 83 n

Selects subscript or superscript printing. See the following table:
n
0
1

Selection
Subscript Print enabled
Superscript Print enabled

Proportional printing of subscript or superscript characters is performed at 2/3 of the proportional character
width. Use the ESC T command to cancel subscript or superscript printing.

ESC SI
Sets 17/20 cpi (IBM).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

SI or ESC SI
X'0F' or X'1B' X'0F'
15 or 27 15

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This command sets horizontal spacing to 17 or 20 cpi. DC2 code cancels this mode and returns spacing to
10 characters per inch.

ESC SI
Sets compressed printing (EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

SI or ESC SI
X'0F' or X'1B' X'0F'
15 or 27 15

This command is accepted at any position within the line. The setting of this command depends on the
horizontal spacing previously set:
10 CPI . 17 CPI
12 CPI . 20 CPI

The DC2 code cancels the compressed printing.

ESC SO
Sets double width printing (one line) (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

SO or ESC S0
X'0E' or X'1B' X'0E'
14 or 27 14

This code causes subsequent data in the same line to be printed as double width characters. It is
canceled by the CR, LF, VT, FF and DC4 codes or when the buffer is full.

ESC s
Sets and resets Quiet printing. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC s n
X'1B' X'73' n
27 115 n

This command controls print speed as follows:
n
0
1

Selection
Normal speed printing
Quiet speed printing

ESC T
Cancels subscript or superscript printing (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code ESC T
Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'54'
Decimal Value 27 84
This command cancels subscript or superscript printing started with the ESC S command.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC W
Sets or cancels double width printing (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC W n
X'1B' X'57' n
27 87 n
0=n=1

Enables or disables double width printing. See the following table:
n
0
1

Selection
Double Width Printing disabled
Double Width Printing enabled

ESC w
Sets or cancels double height printing. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC w n
X'1B' X'77' n
27 119 n
0 = n = 255

Enables or disables double-height printing of all characters. The first line of a page is not doubled if the
ESC w command is sent on the first line; all following lines are printed at double-height. Double-height
printing overrides superscript, subscript, and condensed. Superscript, subscript, and condensed print
resumes when double-height printing is canceled. See the following table:
n
0
1

Selection
Double Height Printing disabled
Double Height Printing enabled

ESC x
Selects Letter Quality or Draft. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC x n
X'1B' X'78' n
27 120 n

This command selects either LQ or Draft printing according to the following values:
n
0
1

Selection
Draft printing
Letter Quality printing

If you select proportional spacing with the ESC p command during Draft printing, the printer prints an LQ
font instead. When you cancel proportional spacing with the ESC p command, the printer returns to Draft
printing.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

SI
Sets compressed printing. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

SI
X'0F'
15

This command sets horizontal spacing to 17 or 20 cpi. DC2 code cancels this mode and returns spacing to
10 characters per inch.

SI
Sets compressed printing. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

SI
X'0F'
15

This command is accepted at any position within the line. DC2 code cancels compressed printing. The
setting of this command depends on the horizontal spacing previously set
10 CPI . 17 CPI
12 CPI . 20 CPI
DC2 code cancels compressed printing.

SO
Sets double width printing (one line) (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

SO
X'0E'
14

This code causes subsequent data in the same line to be printed as double width characters. It is
cancelled by the CR, LF, VT, FF and DC4 codes or when the buffer is full.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Character Set
ESC [ T
Selects a Code page (IBM).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ T 4000HcLc
X'1B' X'5B' X'54' 04000000HcLc
7 91 84 4000HcLc

This sequence allows you to change the current code page. If an unavailable code page is specified, this
command is ignored. The digits 04000000(hexadecimal) and 4000(decimal) are constant. To
calculate Hc Lc for a code page that is not shown: If your code page has an alphabetic character, such as
437G, add 10,000 to the code page number, then divide by 256.



Hc
1
3
33
33
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

The whole number result is the Hc value
The remainder is the Lc value.

Lc
181
122
129
82
83
84
85
87
89
90
92
94
95

CP437
CP437G
CP437 Slavic
CP850
CP851
CP852
CP853
CP855
CP857
CP858
CP860
CP862
CP863

Hc
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
33
33
33
33
33
33

Lc
96
97
98
99
108
109
74
123
124
125
126
128
138

CP864
CP865
CP866
CP867
CP876
CP877
CP1098
96 GREEK
GOST
TASS
MAZOWIA
UKRANIAN
KOI8-U

Hc
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
3
4
4
4

Lc
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
155
226
227
228

8859/1
8859/2
8859/3
8859/4
8859/5
8859/6
8859/7
8859/8
8859/9
8859/15
CP1250
CP1251
CP1252

Hc
4
4
4
4
4
33
33

Lc
229
230
231
232
233
130
131

CP1253
CP1254
CP1255
CP1256
CP1257
FARSI 1
FARSI 2

ESC \
Prints characters from all characters table. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC \ n1 n2
X'1B' X'5C' n1 n2
27 92 n1 n2
0 = n1 = 255
0 = n2 = 255

This command prints the next n1 + n2 x 256 characters from the table of all printable characters.
The total number of characters that will be printed from the table of all printable characters is equal to n1 +
(n2 x 256). For example, to print 300 characters from the table of all printable characters: n1 = 44, n2 =1.
The control codes are not recognized as long as this sequence is active. The space character is printed as
an unassigned character.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC ^
Prints a single character from the all characters table. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC ^ n
X'1B' X'5E' n
27 94 n
0 = n = 255

This command prints the next character from the all characters table. This sequence prints only one
character from the all character table.

ESC 6
Selects the Character Set 2 (EPSON, IBM).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC 6
X'1B' X'36'
27 54

This command selects the character set 2.

ESC 7
Selects the Character Set 1 (IBM).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC 7
X'1B' X'37'
27 55

This command selects the character set 1.

ESC k
Selects the NLQ fonts. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC k n
X'1B' X'6B' n
27 107 n

Selects one of the available fonts in Letter Quality. If Draft mode is selected when this command is sent,
the new LQ font is selected when the printer returns to LQ printing.
n
0
2

Types
Courier
Gothic

ESC R
Selects Nation character set. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC R n
X'1B' X'52' n
27 82 n
0 = n = 13

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This code causes the national character set to be selected according to the parameter n. See the following
table:
n
0
1
2
3
4

National Character Sets
USA
France
Germany
United Kingdom
Denmark-I

n
5
6
7
8
9

National Character Sets
Sweden
Italy
Spain-I
Japan
Norway

n
10
11
12

National Character Sets
Denmark-II
Spain-II
Latin America

ESC t
Selects characters table. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC t n
X'1B' X'74' n
27 116 n
0=n=3

Selects the upper half (from 128 to 255) from the character table.
n
0
1
2

Character Tables
Standard Italic Character Set
ASCII Character Set
Remaps DLL Character Set from position 0-127 to 128-255

Download Character
ESC %
Selects user-defined character set. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC & n
X'1B' X'25' n
27 37 n

This command switches between normal (resident) and user-defined (downloaded) characters:
n
1
0

Selection
Selects the use of downloaded character set in RAM
Selects the use of resident character set in ROM

ESC &
Defines user-defined characters. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC & NUL n m [ a d1 ... d11 ]
X'1B' X'26' 00 n m [a d1 ... d11 ]
27 38 00 nm a [ d1 ... d11 ]
0 <= n <= 255
0 <= m <= 255
n<= m
0 <=a <= 255
0 <=d <= 255

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

The data within brackets above is repeated for each character you define.
The parameters in the command have the following meaning:
n and m
a
d1 ...d11

The n and m parameters are two decimal numbers that define the first and the last
characters to be replaced in the character set in use.
It sets parameters for characters to be user-defined.
They are the character data that is printed.

The format of the attribute byte “a” is the following:
You can define characters 11-dots wide by 8-dots high. You must specify whether to define the upper or
lower 8 dots of the 9 dots available.
You can also specify the columns not printed on the left and right of the characters during proportional
spacing. Set both these parameters with the a parameter, as described in the following table:

Beginning Column
Column
Value
Number
0
0
1
16
2
32
3
48
4
64
5
80
6
96
7
128

Attribute byte table
Ending Column
Column
Value
Number
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11

Upper/Lower 8 pins
Pin group
Value
Upper 8 pins
Lower 8 pins

128
0

Add up the values for all three setting; the total will be the a value.

ESC :
Copies characters from ROM to RAM. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
ESC : NULn0
Hexadecimal Value
X'1B' X'3A' 00n00
Decimal Value 27 58 n0
This code copies the draft character generator in ROM into RAM area dedicated to the user-defined
characters. Also Courier or Gothic character generator font from ROM is copied to RAM memory according
to the following values of n parameter:
n
0
1

Selection
Courier
Gothic

ESC =
Defines downloaded characters. (IBM)
ASCII Code ESC = n m id p [a1 a2 d1 … d 11 ]
Hexadecimal Value 1B 3D n m id p [a1 a2 d1 … d 11 ]
Decimal Value 27 61 n m id p [a1 a2 d1 … d 11 ]

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This sequence allows to design and then down-line load special characters not present in the character set
in use. Whenever you would like to start the DLL setting procedure, it should be better to copy the character
generator in ROM into RAM by sending the ESC = {0} {0} sequence that causes the DLL to be reset. Up to
256 characters can be defined using the DLL function.
The parameters in the command line have the following meaning:
n and m

Indicate how many characters you should down-line load. n and m are calculated as follows:
{number of characters x 13}+2 = {total}
If {total} is less than {256}
{n} = {t}
{m} = {0}
If {total} is greater than {256}
{n} = {remainder of {t} divided by 256}
{m} = {integer result of {t} divided by 256}
id Indicates the printer model. In this case it is fixed to {20}.
Each DLL character is described using the following parameters:
p
a1

This is the decimal code of the first character of the character set in use that should be
replaced by the DLL character.
This is the first attribute byte and it has the following meaning:
Bit 7:
{0}
indicates that the character is not a true descender.
{1}
indicates that the character is a true descender.
This bit is ignored if bit 0 or bit 1 is set to 1.
Bit 6 to 2
Ignored
Bit 1, 0
Character description:
{00} no 12-high expansion. The bit 7 is valid.
{01} line drawing character. The dots in row 8 are extended
downward to rows 9, 10, 11 and 12. The bit 7 is ignored. It is
advisable to use this mode to create characters that should
replace 179 to 223 code characters.
{11} shading characters. The dots in row 1, 2, 3 and 4 are
repeated as rows 9, 10, 11 and 12. The Quality printing is
ignored. It is advisable to use this mode to create characters
that should replace 176 to 178 code characters.
This is the second attribute byte. It specifies the proportional printing information. If
you do not wish to define a proportional character, set the bit 6 – 0 to {0}. When you
use the proportional printing for a DLL character with bit 6 – 0 set to {0}, the databytes
of the character will be printed.
Bit 7:
Ignored
Bit 6, 5, 4
Interpreted as binary number. These bits specify the number
of leading bytes that should be ignored. This number is the
offset. Up to 7 bytes can be ignored. The counts begins with
byte 1.
Bit 3 to 0
Interpreted as binary number. These bits specify the number
of dots-columns that should be printed. Each character must
be followed by a blank byte that is not included in the count
of the character width. Character widths greater than 11 are
treated as 11.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Bit-Image
ESC *
Sets dot graphics printing. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC * m n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
X'1B' X'2A' m n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
27 42 m n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
m = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7;
0 < n1 < 255;
0 < n2 < 31

This command prints dot-graphics in 8-dot columns, depending on the following parameters: number of dot
columns = (n1 + (n2 x 256))
m
Specifies the dot density.
n1, n2 specify the total number of columns of graphics data according to the formula:
The following table shows the 8-dot graphics mode:
m
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

OPTION
Normal density
Dual density
Double speed, Double density
Quadruple-density
CTR Graphics I
Plotter Graphics
CTR Graphics II
Double Density Plotter Graphics

Horizontal Density (dpi)
60
120
120 (virtual)
240 (virtual)
80
72
90
144

Alternate Code
ESC K
ESC L
ESC Y
ESC Z

ESC ?
Reassigns dot graphics mode. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC ? nm
X'1B' X'3F' nm
27 63 nm

Reassigns one of the dot graphics mode (described in the command ESC *) to one of the following
commands: ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y and ESC Z. The nparameter specifies a character (K, L, Y, or Z)
which is reassigned to specific mode m= 0,1,2,3.
m
0
1

n
(K): ESC K graphic command
(L): ESC L graphic command

m
2
3

n
(Y): ESC Y graphic command
(Z): ESC Z graphic command

ESC K
Normal density dot graphics printing (60 dpi) (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC K n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
X'1B' X'4B' n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
27 75 n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
0 = n1 = 255

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828
0 = n2 = 31
0 = p= 255

Terminator code. This command prints dot graphics at 60 horizontal dots per inch (dpi) by 180 vertical dpi.
The parameter values are calculated as follows:
n1
n2
p1
p2
px

Remainder of the number of columns divided by 256.
Integer result of the previous division.
Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the first column of the
graphics pattern.
Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the second column of the
graphics pattern.
Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the last column of the
graphics pattern.

ESC L
Double density dot graphics printing (120 dpi) (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC L n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
X'1B' X'4C' n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
27 76 n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
0 = n1 = 255
0 = n2 = 31
0 = p = 255

Terminator code. This command prints dot graphics at 120 horizontal dpi by 180 vertical dpi.
The parameter values should be calculated as follows:
n1
n2
p1

Remainder of the number of columns divided by 256.
Integer result of the previous division.
Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the first column of the
graphics pattern.
p2
Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the second column of the
graphics pattern.
px
Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the last column of the
graphics pattern.

ESC Y
Double density dot graphics printing at double-speed graphics (120 virtual dpi) (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC Y n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
X'1B' X'59' n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
27 89 n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
0 = n1 = 255
0 = n2 = 31
0 = p = 255

Terminator code. This command prints dot graphics at 120 horizontal dpi by 180 vertical dpi.
The parameter values should be calculated as follows:
n1
n2
p1

Remainder of the number of columns divided by 256.
Integer result of the previous division.
Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the first column of the

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

p2
px

PTX‐S828

graphics pattern.
Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the second column of the
graphics pattern.
Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the last column of the
graphics pattern.

ESC Z
Quadruple density dot graphics printing (240 virtual dpi) (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

ESC Z n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
X'1B' X'5A' n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
27 90 n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px
0 = n1 = 255
0 = n2 = 31
0 = p = 255

Terminator code. This command prints dot graphics at 240 horizontal dot per inch by 180 vertical dpi.
The parameter values should be calculated as follows:
n1
n2
p1
p2

Data Input Control
CAN
Cancels line. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
CAN
Hexadecimal Value
X'18'
Decimal Value
24
This code clears all printable characters and bit-image graphics on the current line. This code moves the
print position to the left-margin position.

CAN
Cancels data. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

CAN
X'18'
24

This code clears all data stored in the preceding print buffer but does not change the current print position.

DC1
Selects printer. (IBM)
ASCII Code
DC1
Hexadecimal Value
X'11'
Decimal Value
17
This command causes the printer to be enabled after it has been disabled by the ESC Q command.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

DC1
Selects printer. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
DC1
Hexadecimal Value
X'11'
Decimal Value
17
This command causes the printer to be enabled after it has been disabled by the DC3 command.

DC3
Deselects printer. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC3
X'13'
19

This code deselects the printer. The printer remains deselected until it receives a DC1 command or power
is turned off then on again. The printer ignores the ESC @ command (initialize printer) when it is
deselected.

DEL
Deletes the last character. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DEL
X'7F'
127

This command causes the printer to delete the last printable character sent to the printer. Printer control
codes are not affected. The printer ignores this command if it follows a command that moves the
horizontal print position (ESC $, ESC \, or HT).

ESC #
Cancels MSB control. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC #
X'1B' X'23'
27 35

This command cancels any controls on the Most Significant Bit (MSB) (bit number 7) set by ESC = or
ESC > commands. The printer then accepts all MSB data as is.

ESC =
Sets MSB to 0. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC =
X'1B' X'3D'
27 61

This command sets the MSB (bit number 7) of all incoming data to 0. All data is affected, including
graphics data.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC >
Sets MSB to 1. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC >
X'1B' X'3E'
27 62

This command sets the MSB (bit number 7) of all incoming data to 1. All data is affected, including
graphics data.

ESC Q
Deselects Printer. (IBM)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC Q n
X'1B' X'51' n
27 81 n

This sequence tells the printer not to accept data from the host. The host must reset the printer or select
the printer by using DC1 (Select Printer) to accept data. To deselect the printer, use ESC Q35.

Miscellaneous
BEL
Buzzer (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

BEL
X'07'
7

This code sounds the printer buzzer.

BS
Print and space back one position (IBM/EPSON).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value 8

BS
X'08'

This code causes printing to be continued from one column to the left of the current carriage position. The
printer ignores this command if it would move the print position to the left of the left margin.

ESC @
Initializes the printer. (EPSON)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC @
X'1B' X'40'
27 64

This sequence causes the printer:

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual






PTX‐S828

To go back to the current printer setup settings
To cancel any selected print attributes
To reset the column counter
To set the horizontal tabulations every 8 columns
To clear all vertical tabulations

Only the selection of the Draft or Quality printing DLL, and the selected character generator are
maintained.

ESC[ K
Sets initial conditions. (IBM 2381 + only)
ASCII Code
ESC [ K n1 n2 init id
Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' X'4B' n1 n2 init id
Decimal Value
27 91 75 n1 n2 init id
This command causes the printer to reset to its initial status:
n1, n2

The n1 and n2 parameters specify the number of bytes in the escape sequence normally,
n1 = 2 and n2 = always 0.

init

The init parameter specifies which condition the printer should be initialized: normally init =
0,1,4,5,254,255.
init
0

254

Description
Initializes the printer to user-default settings. The download font remains unchanged.
If parameters are specified, they overwrite the default settings. If the emulation mode
is changed, the download font is initialized. This command only copies data from the
selected macro, adds parameter changes, if any, and stores it in working RAM. The
data stored in the macro's nonvolatile RAM is not affected.
Initializes the printer to user-default settings. The download font is initialized. If
parameters are specified, they overwrite the default settings. This command only
copies data from the selected macro, adds parameter changes, if any, and stores it
in working RAM. The data stored in the macro's nonvolatile RAM is not affected.
Initializes the printer to factory settings. The download font remains unchanged. If
parameters are specified, they overwrite the default settings. If the emulation mode
is changed, the download font is initialized. This command only copies the default
settings from ROM, adds parameter changes, if any, and stores it in working RAM.
The data stored in the macro's nonvolatile RAM is not affected.
Initializes the printer to factory settings. The download font is initialized. If
parameters are specified, they overwrite the default settings. This command only
copies the default settings from ROM, adds parameter changes, if any, and stores it
in working RAM. The data stored in the macro's nonvolatile RAM is not affected.
Initializes the printer to user-default settings. The download font is initialized. If
parameters are specified, they overwrite the default settings.
This command changes the data stored in the selected macro. It copies data from
the selected macro, adds parameter changes, if any, and stores it in working RAM
and in the selected macro. It also changes the default macro to the value of parm 3.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

255

Initializes the printer to default settings. The download font is initialized. If
parameters are specified, they overwrite the default settings. This command
changes the data stored in the macro's nonvolatile RAM. It copies default settings
from ROM, adds parameter changes, if any, and stores it in working RAM and all
macros. It also sets the default macro to
disable.
The id parameter specifies the printer for which the following parameter bytes are
intended. If the ID does not address your printer, the mode bytes that follow are ignored.
The ID values are Hex = X'B6', Dec = 182.

parm1

Specifies the following functions:

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
parm2

Bit
Discard byte
Reserved
Alarm
Automatic CR
Automatic LF
Page length
Slashed zero
Character set

Not set
Process this byte

Set
Ignore this byte

Alarm enabled
No CR on vertical movement
No LF after CR
11 inches
Zero without
CS1

Alarm disabled
CR on vertical movement
LF after CR
12 inches
slash Zero with slash
CS2

Specifies the following functions:

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Bit
Discard byte
Pass over from
CP437-CP850
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Line length
Reserved

Not set
Process this byte
CP437

Set
Ignore this byte
CP850

13.6 inch

8 inch

Only the selection of the Draft or Quality printing DLL, and the selected character generator are maintained.

ESC U
Sets printing direction (IBM/Epson).
ASCII Code
ESC U n
Hexadecimal Value
X'1B' X'55' n
Decimal Value
27 85 n
Selects bidirectional or unidirectional printing according to the parameters below:
n
0
1

Direction
Bidirectional printing
Unidirectional (left to right) printing

Unidirectional printing provides better alignment of vertical lines while bidirectional printing is faster.

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC[ u n
Bar Codes selection. (IBM -Epson)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ u n
X'1B' X'5B' X'75' n
27 91 117 n

This command is recognized only if the Bar Code menu option is set to “Alternate” mode.
n
0
1

Exit Bar Code mode
Enter Bar Code mode. Subsequent data are barcode data strings as set by ESC [ v n

ESC [ v n m
Sets Barcode parameters. (IBM -Epson)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ vnm
X'1B' X'5B' X'76' nm
27 91 118 nm

Set barcode parameters according to the table below. Parameter values that are not supported result in
the command being ignored.
n
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Parameter Description
Barcode style
Barcode height
Human readable line
Narrow bar width
Wide bar width
Narrow space width
Wide space width
Intercharacter space width
Rotation and HRC font

9
10
11
12

Horizontal print density
Check digit
HRC font for rotate barcode
Barcode height

m values
see below table
1-120 (1/12" increments)
0=disable 1=enable
2-225
2-225
2-225
2-225
2-225
0.1=no rotation and current font for HRC
2=90 3=180 4=270 and special HRC font
1=120 2=144 3=180 dpi
0=disable 1=enable
3=OCRA 4=OCRB
0-240 (1/24" increments)

m default
4
12
1
3
7
3
7
3
0
1
0
3
24

Supported Bar Code Styles
m
0
1
2
3

Style
Interleaved 2 of 5
Bidirectional 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
Industrial 2 of 5

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Supported Bar Code Styles
m
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
50

Style
Code 3 of 9 (default)
EAN-8
EAN-13
Code 11
Codabar (default start/stop = a/t)
Codabar (default start/stop = b/n)
Codabar (default start/stop = c/*)
Codabar (default start/stop = d/e)
UPC-A
UPS-E
Code 93
Code 128 (subset A, B, and C)
Code 128 (subset A, B, and C)
Code 128 (subset A, B, and C)
MSI
UPC 2 Supplemental
UPC 5 Supplemental
EAN 2 Supplemental
EAN 5 Supplemental
Postnet

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This page is intentionally left blank

Chapter 1 EPSON/IBM Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Chapter 2. Native Emulation Commands
The printer in the Native Mode supports the following printer commands.

Format Control
DC4 DC4 ESC 1
Sets vertical spacing n/180 inch.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

DC4 DC4 ESC 1 n
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'31' n
20 20 27 49 n
0 = n = 255

This command sets vertical spacing to n/180 inch for subsequent line feeds.

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 1
Sets vertical spacing 12 lines/30 mm.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 1
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'33' X'31'
20 20 27 51 49

This command sets vertical spacing to 12 lines per 30 mm.

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 3
Sets vertical spacing to 3 lines/30 mm.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 3
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'33' X'33'
20 20 27 51 51

This command sets vertical spacing to 3 lines per 30 mm.

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 4
Sets vertical spacing 4 lines/30 mm.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 4
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'33' X'34'
20 20 27 51 52

This command sets vertical spacing to 4 lines per 30 mm.

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 6
Sets vertical spacing 6 lines/30 mm.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 6
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'33' X'36'
20 20 27 51 54

This command sets vertical spacing to 6 lines per 30 mm.

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 8
Sets vertical spacing 8 lines/30 mm.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 8
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'33' X'38'
20 20 27 51 56

This command sets vertical spacing to 8 lines per 30 mm.

DC4 DC4 ESC A
Sets the horizontal spacing to 15, 17.1, 20 CPI.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC4 DC4 ESC A n
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'41' n
20 20 27 65 n

This is terminator code and causes the current contents of the print buffer to be printed. The subsequent
characters are printed at the horizontal spacing specified by the n parameter.
n
4
5
6

Spacing
15 cpi
17 cpi
20 cpi

Native Character Set
DC4 DC4 ESC g
Selects LQ fonts.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

DC4 DC4 ESC g n
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'67' n
20 20 27 103 n
0 = n = 255

If down-line loading is selected, the command is stored and activated as soon as the down-line loading is
canceled.
Boldface is available if the ESC p1 (proportional) is sent.

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
n
0
1
182

PTX‐S828

Types
Courier
Gothic
DLL

The OCR-A and OCR-B print styles are selected by the DC4 DC4 ESC S command.

DC4 DC4 ESC S
Selects character set ISO Character Sets or Code Pages.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
n
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136

DC4 DC4 ESC S n
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'53' n
20 20 27 83 n

Types
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
ISO 8859/3 Latin 3
ISO 8859/4 Latin 4
ISO 8859/5 Latin/Cyrillic
ISO 8859/6 Latin/Arabic
ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek
ISO 8859/8 Latin/Hebrew
ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
ISO 8859/15 Latin 9
CP 437 USA
CP 850 Multilingual
CP 860 Portugal
CP 863 Canada/France
CP 865 Denmark/Norway
CP 851 Greek
CP 862 Hebrew
CP 864 Arab
TASS Cyrillic

n
137
138
139
140
141
142
145
146
147
148
149
199
200
201
202
203

Types
CP 852 Eastern Europe
CP 876 OCR-A
CP 877 OCR-B
CP 855 Cyrillic
CP 866 Russian
GOST Cyrillic
CP 437G Greek
CP 853 Turkish
CP 857 Turkish
CP 867 Turkish
CP 858 Euro PC Multilingual
96 Greek
CP 1250
MAZOWIA
CP 1251
CP 1252

DC4 DC4 ESC p
Selects printing style type.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
n
0
1
2

DC4 DC4 ESC p n
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'70' n
20 20 27 112 n

Setting
HS Draft
Normal Draft
DP Text

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Bar Codes
DC4 DC4 ESC !
Bar Code Selection.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC4 DC4 ESC ! htfFroqbsBSiEM
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'21' ! htfFroqbsBSiEM
20 20 27 33 ! htfFroqbsBSiEM

This command is recognized only if the menu option “BAR CODE” is set to “NATIVE” mode.
h = Bar Code Height at n/6”, 1 < h < 30
t = Standard Bar Code to use
t
1
2
3
4
5
6
7, 8, 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Name
8-digits European Article Numbering
13-digits European Article Numbering
Universal Product Code Type A
Universal Product Code Type E
UPC/EAN 2 Digit Supplement
UPC/EAN 5 Digit Supplement
8-digits European Article Numbering
General Purpose Bar Code
Code 2 of 5 3-BAR (Data Logic)
Binary Coded Decimal
MSI-Plessey
AIM-USD-8 / Code-11
AIM-USD-7 / Code-93
Code 2 of 5 Bidirectional
Code 2 of 5 Interleaved
Code 2 of 5 Industrial
Code 2 of 5 Matrix
Code 3 of 9
8-digits European Article Numbering
Codabar (all types)
Code 128
USPS-PostNet

EAN-8
EAN-13
UPC-A
UPC-E
UPC-EAN 2
UPC-EAN 5
EAN-8
Code-GP
C25-3BAR
CODE BCD
MSI
Code 11
Code 93
C25-BID
C25-INT
C25-IND
C25-MTX
Code-39
EAN-8
CODABAR
CODE-128
POSTNET

f = Readable character printing
f = 1 printing enabled
f = 0 printing disabled
F = Font selection for the printable characters
F
0
1
1
3
4

Selection
Selected font by r value
Default font for text
Special font for OCR-A o OCR-B bar codes according to the t value
Special font for OCR-A bar codes
Special font for OCR-B bar codes

r = Bar code rotation
r Selection
0 No rotation

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
1
2
3
4

PTX‐S828

Rotation at 0°
Rotation at 90°
Rotation at 180°
Rotation at 270°

o = A check digit is inserted as the last character of the received string according to the bar code
q = The horizontal graphic density of the bar code
q Selection
0 1/120"
1 1/180"
b = Narrow bar width in n/180", 3 < b <18
s = Narrow space width in n/180", 3 < s <18
B = Wide bar width in n/180", 6 < B <72
S = Wide space width in n/180", 6 < S <72
i = Spacing between characters in n/180", 3 < i <72
EM = Check sequence terminator

Bar Code Description
EAN-8

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n1pEM
The EAN-8 bar code data field must only contain numeric data and must be eight bytes long
including the check digit. The EAN-8 character repertoire provides 0 to 9 ASCII numeric
figures. n indicates the bar code height in units of 1/6 inch and must be in the range 1 to 12.
pmust be NUL (hex. X'00') if no Human Readable Characters are to be printed, and 1 (hex.
X'01') if they are to be printed. The range of values for the nand pparameters can be
increased of 32 dec.

EAN-13

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n2pEM
The EAN-13 bar code data field must only contain numeric data and must be 13 bytes long
including the check digit. The EAN-13 character repertoire provides 0 to 9 ASCII numeric
figures. n indicates the bar code height in units of 1/6 inch and must be in the range 1 to 12.
If you want to print the Human Readable Characters, pmust have the value 1 (hex. X'01');
otherwise this value must be NUL (hex. X'00'). The range of values for the nand pparameters
can be increased of 32 dec.

UPC-A

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n3pEM
The UPC-A bar code data field allows 10 numeric characters plus one system number digit
and one check digit at the leftmost and rightmost positions, respectively. The UPC-A
character repertoire provides 0 to 9 ASCII numeric figures. nindicates the bar code height in
units of 1/6 inch and must be in the range 1 to 12. pmust be NUL (hex. X'00') if no Human
Readable Characters are to be printed, and 1 (hex. X'01') if they are to be printed. The range
of values for the nand pparameters can be increased of 32 dec.

UPC-E

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n4pEM
If 11-digit strings are received and the ocheck digit field is missing or takes values 0 or 2,
question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, when possible. If the ofield takes a
value of 1, the 12th digit is inserted by the printer as a result of the internally available
algorithm applied to the received string.

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

If 10-digit strings are received and the ocheck-digit is missing or takes NULL value, question
marks are printed in place of HRC string, if possible. If the ofield takes a value of 1, a default
0 System-Digit is automatically inserted by the printer and the 12th digit is also inserted as
result of he internally available algorithm applied to the final string.
If the final UPC-A string cannot be compressed to an 8-digits string, or the received SystemDigit is different than 0 or 1, question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, if
possible.
The LEFT and RIGHT delimiters, System-Digit, and the Check-Digit are printed as
descending bars to make a field to host a 6-digits HRC string. The System-Digit HRC to the
left of the LEFT delimiter (at about the middle of the symbol) when the ffield is missing or set
to 1. In this case, the Check-Digit shows in HRC to the right of the RIGHT delimiter (at about
the middle of the symbol), when ofield takes values 2 or 3. Otherwise it never shows on the
HRC string.
UPC-EAN 2

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n5pEM
The ADD ON-2 bar code data fields contain numeric data only. Otherwise question marks
are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible.
If 3-digit strings are received within a DC4 DC4 ESC (... EM control sequence and the o
check-digit option field is missing or takes NULL value, the symbol encodes the first 2 digits
and the 3rd received digit is used as the check digit, even though this may affect its
readability. If the o field takes a value of 1, the 3rd digit is matched as opposed to the
internally generated check-digit. Question marks are printed in place of HRC string when
mismatched, if possible.
If 2-digit strings are received and ocheck digit field is missing or takes NULL value, question
marks are printed in place of the HRC string, when possible. If the ofield takes a value of 1,
the check digit are computed applying the internally available algorithm to the received string
in order to properly encode the symbol.
If the ffield is missing or takes a value of 1, the 2-digit HRC string is printed above the
Bar/Spaces symbol and its height is part of the overall symbol's height. The check-digit never
shows on the HRC string. If the ffield takes a value of 0, the symbol's encoding prints at full
height.

UPC-EAN 5

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n6pEM
The ADD ON-5 bar code data field contains numeric data only. Otherwise question marks
are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible.
If 6-digit strings are received within a DC4 DC4 ESC (... EM control sequence and ocheckdigit option field is missing or takes NULL value, the symbol encodes the first 5 digits and the
6th received digit is used as a check digit, even though this may affect its readability. If the
ocheck digit option takes a value of 1, the 6th digit is matched as opposed to the internally
generated check digit. Question marks are printed in place of the HRC string when
mismatching, if possible.
If 5-digit strings are received and the ocheck digit field is missing or takes a NULL value,
question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible. If the ofield takes a value
of 1, the check digit is computed applying the internally available algorithm to the received
string in order to properly encode the symbol If the ffield is missing or takes a value of 1, the
5-digit HRC string is printed above the Bar/Spaces symbol and its height is part of the overall
symbol's height; the check-digit never shows on the HRC string. If the ffield takes a value of
0, the symbol’s encoding prints at full height.

CODE GP

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n10pEM
The CODE-GP bar code allows bar codes to be constructed from the two basic elements
(BAR and SPACE) by sending 0,1 digits: digit 0 produces a BAR and digit 1 produces a
SPACE.

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

These two elements may be combined in any sequence, giving the possibility of producing
bars and spaces of any width that is a multiple of the basic element width. The default
bar/spaces width is 1/60" (q= 0,1) but these values may be set by the user according to its
specific needs. Data fields do not have a defined format length and contain 0,1 data only.
Otherwise question marks are printed in place of HRC string, if possible.
No Human Readable Interpretation is possible No TEXT STRING below or above the
bar/space symbol can be printed. The fand ofields are ignored.
C25-3BAR

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n11pEM
The C25-3BAR bar code data fields do not have a defined format length and contain numeric
data only. Otherwise, question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible. If the
ocheck digit option field takes a value of 1, an internally generated check digit complying with
general 2/5 family algorithm is added to the encoded string. However, it will not show on the
required HRC string.

Code BCD

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n12pEM
The CODE-BCD bar code data fields do not have a defined format length and contain
numeric data only. Otherwise question marks will be printed in place of the HRC string, if
possible. No internal check digit algorithm is available for this standard. The ofield is
meaningless.

MSI Plessey

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n13pEM
The MSI bar code data fields do not have a defined format length and must contain numeric
data only. Otherwise question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible. To
releave the host from calculating the MSI check digits, internal algorithms are provided that
are accessible by the host application program, giving the proper supported value to the
ocheck-digit option field, according to the following options:
0
1

Print the bar code symbol with no
printer-generated check digits
Print the bar code symbol with IBM
Modulus-10 check digit -generated
by the printer and put at the end of
the numeric string. This is the 2nd
check digit. The 1st check digit is
IBM Modulus-10 also.
Print the bar code symbol with both
check digits generated by the printer
and put it at the end of the data. The
2nd check digit is IBM Modulus-10.
The 1st check digit is NCR Modulus11. If the modulus is 10, it is an error
and question marks are printed in
place of the HRC string, if possible.
Print the bar code symbol with both
check digits generated by the printer
and put it at the end of the data. The
2nd check digit is IBM Modulus-10.
The 1st check digit is the
complement to 11 of NCR Modulus11 algorithm applied to the received
string, If the modulus is 0 or 1, the
check digit is 0.

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

Print the bar code symbol with both
check digits generated by the printer and
put at the end of the data. The 2nd check
digit is IBM Modulus-10. The 1st check
digit is also IBM Modulus-10.

Print the bar code symbol with both
check digits generated by the printer and
put it at the end of the data. The 2nd
check digit is IBM Modulus-10. The 1st
check digit is IBM Modulus-11. If the
modulus is 10, it is an error and question
marks are printed in place of the HRC
string, if possible.
Print the bar code symbol with both
check digits generated by the printer and
put it at the end of the data. The 2nd
check digit is IBM Modulus-10. The 1st
check digit is the complement to 11 of
IBM Modulus-11 algorithm applied to the
received string. If the modulus is 0 or 1,
the check digit is 0.

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
7

PTX‐S828
Print the bar code symbol with both
check digits generated by the printer
and put at the end of the data. The
2nd check digit is IBM Modulus-10.
The 1st check digit is the
complement to 11 of NCR Modulus11 algorithm applied to the received
string. If the modulus is 0 or 1, it is
an error and question marks are
printed in place of the HRC string, if
possible.

Print the bar code symbol with both
check digits generated by the printer and
put at the end of the data. The 2nd check
digit is IBM Modulus-10. The 1st check
digit is the complement to 11 of IBM
Modulus-11 algorithm applied to the
received string. If the modulus is 0 or 1,
it is an error and question marks are
printed in place of the HRC string, if
possible.

The printer-generated second check digit does not show on the required HRC string.
Code 11

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n14pEM
The CODE-11 bar code fields do not have a defined format length and contain data
belonging to the character set listed below:
0123456789
Otherwise question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible.
This barcode type defines a variable WIDE/NARROW ratio. The bar code is printed at 1/180"
horizontal and vertical graphical printing resolution to ensure high readability rate. Each digit
encoding is separated from the next by a 1/90"—1/60" wide default Intercharacter Gap.
CODE-11 has unique a START/STOP character. The printer generates the couple related to
each symbol. It is visually interpreted by an OPEN TRIANGLE and will always appear on the
HRC string because its size is usually varied to signify the number of check digits being used
in the particular symbol:



SMALL open triangle means ONE check-digit
LARGE open triangle means TWO check-digit

The ffield is meaningless and always defaults to the HRC string print.
Code 93

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n15pEM
The CODE-93 bar code fields do not have a defined format length and contain data
belonging to the standard ASCII character set, including control codes.
Since the GS and EM control codes are used, the DC4 DC4 ESC (... EM “Print bar-code”
control sequence is part of the supported character set. The host application must SET THE
HIGHER-ORDER BIT of the above control codes to allow the printer to distinguish between
encodable data and string terminators.
The complete ASCII standard character set is encoded using 47 combinations of 9
bar/space narrow elements arranged into 3 variable width bars with their adjacent variable
width spaces. Each of the bars in the supported combinations can be 1, 2, or 3 modules
wide. The START/STOP character has a 4-module wide bar. CODE-93 directly implements
the basic subset as shown below:
0123456789 A BCDEFGHIJKL MNOP QRS T UVWX Y Z-.SPACES$/+%
($) (%) (/) (+) (as special control characters)
# (as unique START/STOP character)
The other STANDARD-ASCII codes not presented above are represented by means of a
combination of one control character in the above set followed by a symbol in the
alphabetical set. The HRC string is printed BELOW the symbol when ffield is set to 1 without

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

check digits. Non-printable ASCII characters are represented in the “control code” format (for
example, CR is ^M, where “control” is represented as DARK-SQUARE symbol).
2of5

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n16pEM
Bidirectional The BID-25 bar code data fields do not have a defined format length and
contain numeric data only. Otherwise, question marks are printed in place of the HRC string,
if possible. If the ocheck digit option field takes a value of 1, an internally generated check
digit is added to the encoded string that will not show on the required HRC string.

2of5

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n17pEM
Interleaved The 2/5-INTERLEAVED bar code does not have a defined format length.
However, the total sum of the characters must be even. nindicates the bar code height and
must be in the range 1 to 12. p must be NUL (hex. X'00') if no Human Readable Characters
are to be printed, and 1 (hex. X'01') if they are to be printed.

2of5

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n18pEM
Industrial The 2/5 INDUSTRIAL bar code. Data format length is variable and the supported
character set only provides ASCII numeric figures 0 to 9. nindicates the bar code height in
units of 1/6 inch and must be in the range 1 to 12. pmust be NUL (hex. X'00') if no Human
Readable Characters are to be printed, and 1 (hex. X'01') if they are to be printed.

2of5

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n19pEM
The 2/5 MATRIX bar code. Data format length is variable and the supported character set
only provides ASCII numeric figures 0 to 9. nindicates the bar code height in units of 1/6 inch
and must be in the range 1 to 12. pmust be NUL (hex. X'00') if no Human Readable
Characters are to be printed, and 1 (hex. X'01') if they are to be printed.

Code 39

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n20pEM
The CODE 39 bar code. Data format length is variable and must always start and end with
an asterisk. It can contain the alphanumeric character listed below:
0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKL MNOP QRS T UVWX Y Z -. SPACE$/+%*(as start / stop character)
The parameter indicates the bar code height in units of 1/6 inch and must be in the range 1
to 12. The pparameter must be NUL (hex. X'00') if no Human Readable Characters are to be
printed, and 1 (hex. X'01') if they are to be printed.

CODABAR

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n22pEM
The Codabar bar code data fields do not have a defined format length and contain data
belonging to the character set listed hereafter:
0123456789-$:/.+
ABCDEN T *abcdent (only as START/STOP characters)
The printer allows any combination of START/STOP characters. If the first and last
characters of the received string do not belong to the START/STOP characters subset,
question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible

CODE 128

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n23pEM
The CODE-128 bar code data fields do not have a defined format length and contain data
belonging to the standard ASCII character set, including control codes. Since the GS and
EM control codes used within the DC4 DC4 ESC (...EM “Print Bar Code” control sequence
are part of the supported character set, the host application must SET THE HIGHER-

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ORDER BIT of the above control codes to allow the printer to distinguish between encodable
data and string terminators.
POSTNET

DC4 DC4 ESC ! n24pEM
The POSTNET bar code data fields contain only numeric data and do not have a defined
format length. POSTNET bar codes have no printed HRC string. The LOW/TALL bars that
encode the symbol comply with the U.S.P.S standard regardless of the p field value.

DC4 DC4 ESC (GS
Prints bar code symbols.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range

DC4 DC4 ESC (GS n1 data GS n2 data ... EM
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'28' X'1D' n1 data ... 19
20 20 27 40 29 n1 data ... 25
1 = n = 12
0=p=1

This sequence prints the bar code symbol according to the previous selection. If you want to print more
than one bar code symbol of the same type and height, GS n defines the distance from the beginning of
the line or between two bar code symbols in multiples of 1/60 or 1/90 of an inch, depending upon the
selected barcode density (120 or 180 dpi). At the end of the line EM must close this command.

Miscellaneous
DC4 DC4 ESC @
Re-initializes the printer.
ASCII Code
DC4 DC4 ESC @
Hexadecimal Value
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'40'
Decimal Value 20 20 27 64
This command resets the printer mode and clears the buffer of printable data.

DC4 DC4 ESC J
Sets amplification factor.
ASCII Code
DC4 DC4 ESC J hv
Hexadecimal Value
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'4A' hv
Decimal Value
20 20 27 74 hv
This command sets the required amplification factor to be applied to the current font.
h
It is the horizontal amplification factor; the value range is 1 to 4. It is applied to the basic symbols.
It
is the vertical amplification factor; the value range is 1 to 4.
0 values for either the hand vparameters keep the related current amplification factor unchanged.
The internally available symbol's amplification algorithms support the following character attributes that
may be selected by means of the available control sequences within the currently active emulation: double
width, double-height, emphasized, double strike, subscript, superscript, italics, proportional, and
compressed.
Doublewide and double-high attributes must be lower than 2.

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

DC4 DC4 ESC N
Selects/loads or parks the fanfold from the Front 2 path.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value
Range
n
0

DC4 DC4 ESC N n
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'4E' n
20 20 27 78 n
0 = n= 1

Selection
Selects and loads the fanfold from the Front2 path. If the paper is present, the printer automatically
parks the fanfold that is not requested before loading the new one (after having pressed the PARK
key in response to the TEAR IF NECESS/PARK PAPER message).
Parks the fanfold loaded from the Front2 path to allow the tear off function (after having pressed the
PARK key in response to the TEAR IF NECESS/PARK PAPER message).

DC4 DC4 ESC R
String rotation.
ASCII Code
DC4 DC4 ESC R n string EM
Hexadecimal Value
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'52' n string EM
Decimal Value 20 20 27 82 n string EM
n
0
1
2
3
4

Selection
No rotation.
Rotation at 0°
Rotation at 90°
Rotation at 180°
Rotation at 270°

DC4 DC4 ESC r
Digit rotation.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC4 DC4 ESC r
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'72'
20 20 27 144

This command is used to set the required character rotation to be applied to the selected font.
n
0
1
2
3
4

Selection
No rotation.
Rotation at 0°
Rotation at 90°
Rotation at 180°
Rotation at 270°

DC4 DC4 ESC T
Selects/loads or parks the fanfold from the Front1 path.
ASCII Code
DC4 DC4 ESC T n
Hexadecimal Value
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'54' n
Decimal Value
20 20 27 84 n
Range 0 = n = 1

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
n
0

PTX‐S828

Selection
Selects and loads the fanfold from the Front1 path. If the paper is present (cut sheet/fanfold), the
printer automatically parks this fanfold that is not requested before loading the new one (after having
pressed the PARK key in response to the TEAR IF NECESS/PARK PAPER message).
Parks the fanfold loaded from the Front1 path to allow the tear off function (after having pressed the
PARK key in response to the TEAR IF NECESS/PARK PAPER message).

DC4 DC4 ESC Y
Selects emulation.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC4 DC4 ESC Y n
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'59' n
20 20 27 89 n

Selects the printer emulation type according to the n parameter value:
n
0
1
2
5

Emulation
Default printer emulation
EPSON FX Series
IBM Proprinter XL III
IBM 2381+

DC4 DC4 ESC Z
Makes AGA in column.
ASCII Code
DC4 DC4 ESC Z n
Hexadecimal Value
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'5A' n
Decimal Value 20 20 27 90 n
The n parameter is the column number at 10 cpi where the AGA (Automatic Gap Adjustment) is made.

DC4 DC4 ESC u
Selects the user macros.
ASCII Code
DC4 DC4 ESC u n
Hexadecimal Value
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'75' n
Decimal Value 20 20 27 117 n
Range
0=n=4
n
1
2
4
5

Selection
Selects User Macro 1
Selects User Macro 2
Selects User Macro 3
Selects User Macro 4

DC4 DC4 ESC D
Sends the operator panel messages to the serial I/F.
ASCII Code
DC4 DC4 ESC D n
Hexadecimal Value
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'44' n
Decimal Value 20 20 27 68 n

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This command enables or disables sending operator panel messages to the serial I/F. The string to send
is the following: STX “message (16 ASCII byte-characters)”EXT.
n
0
1

Selection
enabled
disabled

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This page is intentionally left blank

Chapter 2 Native Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Chapter 3. ANSI Emulation Commands
The following printer commands are supported by this printer according to the ANSI X3.64 emulation.
Most dimensional parameters in ANSI protocol are expressed in “decipoints”. For example:
1 decipoint
72 decipoints
120 decipoints
720 decipoints
2880 decipoints

= 1/720 inch
= 1/10 inch
= 1/6 inch
= 1 inch
= 4 inches

All parameter values must be expressed as ASCII numeric rather than binary values.
Parameters, within commands with multiple parameters, must be separated by a semicolon “;”.
See “Basic Program Sample” at the end of this chapter and result printed by the printer.

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Character Set Control
ESC [ p1 x
Selects national character set (Select National Characters -SNC).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1 x
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'78'
27 91 p1 120

This command selects the national character set table according to the p1 parameter value. See the
following tables:
Table 1. 7-bit Substitution
p1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

NATION
USA
Germany
French A
French B
French Canadian
Netherlands
Italian
United Kingdom
Spanish
Danish/Norwegian A
Danish/Norwegian B
Danish/Norwegian C
Danish/Norwegian D

p1
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
25

NATION
Swedish/Finnish A
Swedish/Finnish B
Swedish/Finnish C
Swedish/Finnish D
Switzerland
USA (ISO)
Yugoslavia
United Kingdom A
Turkey
Greece
Cyrillic

See the tables in “ANSI National Variations”.

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 2. 8-bit Substitution
p1
437
850
851
852
853
855
858
860
863
864
865
866
867
1250
5915
8570 to 8575
8576
8577
8578

CHARACTER SETS
Code Page 437
Code Page 850
Code Page 851
Code Page 852
Code Page 853
Code Page 855
Code Page 858
(Euro symbol included)
Code Page 860
Code Page 863
Code Page 864
Code Page 865
Code Page 866
Code Page 867
Code Page 1250
ISO 8859-15
(Euro symbol included)
Reserved
Mazowia
Turkish
Greek

p1
CHARACTER SETS
8579
Kamenicky
8580
CWI
8581
Roman-8
8582
IN2
8583
Code Page 864E
8584
Reserved
8585
Bulgarian
8586 to 8590 Reserved
8591
ISO 8859-1 Western Europe
8592
SO 8859-2 Eastern Europe
8593
ISO 8859-3 Southern Europe
8594
ISO 8859-4 Northern Europe
8595
ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic
8596
ISO 8859-6 Arabic
8597
ISO 8859-7 Greek
8598
ISO 8859-8 Hebrew
8599
ISO 8859-9 Southern Europe 2
8600 to 8700 Reserved for other ISO Tables

See the tables in “Character Sets”.

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Character Pitch and Print Modes
ESC [ p1; ... pn m
Select graphics rendition (SGR).
ASCII Code
ESC [ p1; ... pn m
Hexadecimal Value
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' ... pn X'6D'
Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 ... pn 109
This command selects fonts, pitch, print modes, and character styles according to the parameter settings:
p

DEFINITION

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8, 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Normal Print Mode
Bold Print Mode
Subscript Mode
Superscript Mode
Underline Mode
Expanded Mode
Proportional
Italic Mode
Reserved
Draft Font
Draft Font
LQ Gothic
Draft Font
LQ Courier
Draft Italic
LQ Gothic Italic
Draft Italic
LQ Courier Italic
Draft
Reserved

21
22
23
24
25
26

Double Underline Mode
Cancel Bold Mode
Reserved
Cancel Underline Mode (Single & Double)
Cancel Expanded Mode
Cancel Proportional Mode

Subscript and Superscript modes are enabled through the System Menu (ANSI OPTIONS-S/SCRIPT YES).
Refer to the Administrators Manual.

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC [ p1; p2 SP B
Graphic size modification (GSM).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; p2 SP B
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' p2 X'20' X'42'
27 91 p1 59 p2 32 66

This command sets the height and/or width of expanded and oversized characters.
The p1 and p2 parameters are the percentages by which the height and width will be multiplied,
respectively. The default values of p1 and p2 are 100%.
The maximum expansion factor is18700 for oversize mode and 800 for expanded mode, respectively.

ESC [ p1 t
Special print mode (Oversize/Expanded/Bar code Mode -SPM).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1 t
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'74'
27 91 p1 116

This sequence selects or deselects oversize expanded or bar code mode according to the p1 parameter
value. See the following table:
p1
0
1
2
3

FUNCTION
Cancel special mode
Select oversize mode
Select expanded mode
Select bar code mode

It can select just one special print mode at a time.

SO
Shift out.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

SO
X'0E'
14

This code enables Expanded/Oversize mode as determined by the last received ESC [ p1 t command.

SI
Shift in.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

SI
X'0F'
15

This code disables Expanded/Oversize mode as determined by the last received ESC [ p1 t command.

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC [ p1; pn {
Unidirectional printing (UDP).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; pn {
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'7B'
27 91 p1 59 pn 123

This command selects the unidirectional or bidirectional printing according to the p parameter values. See
the following table:
p
0
1
2

FUNCTION
Cancel unidirectional printing
Print unidirectional LQ and DP
Print unidirectional Dot Graphics

Horizontal Movements
BS
Back space.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

BS
X'08'
8

The BS code moves the print head one character to the left at the current cpi.

CR
Carriage return.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

CR
X'0D'
13

This code causes the print head to be moved to the left margin on the current line.

SP
Space.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

SP
X'20'
32

This code positions one character space to the right of the print position.

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC [ p1 '
Horizontal position absolute (HPA).
ASCII Code
ESC [ p1 '
Hexadecimal Value
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'60'
Decimal Value 27 91 p1 96
This command causes the print position to be moved to the decipoint location specified by p1. This
sequence can be used to print within the left, top, and bottom margins.

ESC [ p1 a
Horizontal position relative (HPR).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1 a
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'61'
27 91 p1 97

This command moves the print position to the right, relative to the current position. The p1 parameter
specifies the number of decipoints. This command cannot be used to move beyond the right margin.

ESC [ p1; p2 s
Left/right margin set (SLR).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; p2 s
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' p2 X'73'
27 91 p1 59 p2 115

This command sets the left and right margin values. The p1 parameter specifies the decipoint value of the
left margin. The p2 parameter specifies the decipoint value of the right margin value. The default value for
the left margin is 0. The value for the right margin is the maximum width supported by the printer
configuration (that is 13.6*720=9792).

ESC [ p1 j
Horizontal position backward (HPB).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1 j
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'6A'
27 91 p1 106

This command causes the current horizontal position to be moved backwards as specified by the p1
parameter (decipoints).

HT
Horizontal tab.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

HT
X'09'
9

This code causes the print head to be moved to the next tab stop.

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC H or HTS
Horizontal tab setting.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC H or HTS
X'1B' X'48' (7-bit) or X'88' (8-bit)
27 72 (7-bit) or 136 (8-bit)

This command causes a horizontal tab stop to be set to the decipoint value of the current print position.

ESC [ p1; pn u
Sets horizontal tab stops at specified positions multiple horizontal tab set (HTS).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; pn u
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'75'
27 91 p1 59 pn 117

This command sets up to 22 horizontal tab stops at each decipoint position specified by p parameters.
When specifying more than one position, enter the parameters in ascending order.

Vertical Movements
LF
Line feed.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value 10

LF
X'0A'

This code positions the paper one line space as indicated by the current line spacing value.

ESC D or IND
Index.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC D or IND
X'1B' X'44' (7-bit) or X'84' (8-bit)
27 68 (7-bit) or 132 (8-bit)

This command causes the paper to be positioned down one line space as indicated by the current line
spacing value.

ESC E or NEL
Next line.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC E or NEL
X'1B' X'45' (7-bit) or X'85' (8-bit)
27 69 (7-bit) or 133 (8-bit)

This command causes the paper to be positioned down one line space as indicated by the current line
spacing value. The column counter is reset to the left margin value.

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC K or PLD
Partial line down.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC K or PLD
X'1B' X'4B' (7-bit) or X'8B' (8-bit)
27 75 (7-bit) or 139 (8-bit)

This command causes the paper to be positioned down one half line space at the current line spacing
value. This can create an appearance of subscripting. This sequence is also used after an ESC L (partial
line up sequence) to recover the original active vertical position.

ESC L or PLU
Partial line up.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC L or PLU
X'1B' X'4C' (7-bit) or X'8C' (8-bit)
27 76 (7-bit) or 140 (8-bit)

This command causes the paper to be positioned up one half line space at the current line spacing value.
This can create an appearance of superscripting. This sequence is also used after an ESC K (partial line
down sequence) to recover the original active vertical position.

ESC M or RI
Reverse index.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC M or RI
X'1B' X'4D' (7-bit) or X'8D' (8-bit)
27 77 (7-bit) or 141 (8-bit)

This command causes the paper to be positioned up one line space at the current line spacing value.

ESC [ p1 d
Vertical position absolute (VPA).
ASCII Code
ESC [ p1 d
Hexadecimal Value
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'64'
Decimal Value 27 91 p1 100
This command causes the current vertical position to be set to the decipoint value specified by the p1
parameter relative to the top most line of the current form length. This sequence can be used to print
within the top and the bottom margins.

ESC [ p1 e
Vertical position relative (VPR).
ASCII Code

ESC [ p1 e

Hexadecimal Value
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'65'
Decimal Value 27 91 p1 101
This command causes the current vertical position to be advanced to the position specified by the p1
parameter (in decipoints) relative to the current print line position.

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC [ p1; p2 f
Horizontal and vertical position absolute (HVP).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; p2 f
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' p2 X'66'
27 91 p1 59 p2 102

This command causes the current print position to be moved to the vertical (p1) and horizontal (p2)
decipoint locations specified relative to the top left corner of the page.
This sequence can be used to print within the right, left, top and bottom margins.

ESC [ p1 k
Vertical position backward (VPB).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1 k
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'6B'
27 91 p1 107

This command causes the current vertical position to be moved backwards as specified by the p1
parameter (decipoints) relative to the current print line position.

ESC [ p1; pn g
Tab clear (TBC).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; pn g
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'67'
27 91 p1 59 pn 103

This command clears horizontal and vertical tab stops. If no parameter is present, the horizontal tab stop
at the current position is cleared (default).
p
0 (default)
1
2
3

DESCRIPTION
Clear horizontal tab at current position
Clear vertical tab at current position
Clear all horizontal tab stops
Clear all vertical tab stops

VT
Vertical tab.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

VT
X'0B'
11

This code causes printing to be moved to the left margin at the next vertical tab stop.

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC J or VTS
Vertical tab setting.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC J or VTS
X'1B' X'4A' (7-bit) or X'8A' (8-bit)
27 74 (7-bit) or 138 (8-bit)

This command causes a vertical tab stop to be set to the decipoint value of the current vertical position.

ESC [ p1; pn v
Sets vertical tab stops at specified positions (Multiple Vertical Tab Set -VTS).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; pn v
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'76'
27 91 p1 59 pn 118

This command sets up to 12 vertical tab stops at each decipoint position specified by p parameters. The
tab stops are measured from the top of the page. When specifying more than one position, enter the
parameters in ascending order.

FF
Form feed.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

FF
X'0C'
12

This code causes the data in the print buffer to be printed out and then advances the paper to the top of
the next form.

ESC [ p1; p2; p3 r
Form definition (FD).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; p2; p3 r
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' p2 X'3B' p3 X'72'
27 91 p1 59 p2 59 p3 114

This command sets the page length, top and bottom margins.
The p1, p2 and p3 parameters specify the decipoint values.
pn
p1
p2
p3

FUNCTION
Page Length
Top Margin Position From the Beginning of the Page
Bottom Margin Position From the End of the Page

The maximum page length value is 15840 decipoints (22 inches).

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC [ p1; p2 G
Sets the line/character spacing.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; p2 G
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' p2 X'20' X'47'
27 91 p1 59 p2 32 71

This command sets the spacing between lines (p1 parameter) and the horizontal character pitch (p2
parameter) in decipoints.
If the vertical spacing value exceeds the current form length, this setting is ignored.

Interface Control
NUL
Ignored.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

NUL
X’00’ or NUL
00

This code is ignored.

ENQ
Enquiry.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ENQ
X'05'
5

This code is used to request the message string defined by the OSC command when parameter p1=8 is
transmitted to the host.

DC1
Selects printer (Data Control 1).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC1
X'11'
17

In parallel interface, this code reselects the printer after the printer has been deselected by a DC3 code.
In serial interface, this code is sent from the printer to the host to indicate that the printer is ready to
receive data.

DC3
Deselects printer (Data Control 3).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DC3
X'13'
19

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

In parallel interface, this code causes the printer to enter the standby condition until a DC1 code is
received.
In serial interface, this code is sent from the printer to the host to indicate that it is not ready to receive
data.

Operating System Control
BEL
Bell.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

BEL
X'07'
7

This code causes the buzzer to sound for about 0.5 second.

DEL
Delete.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

DEL
X'7F'
127

In parallel interface, this code causes the last received character to be deleted.

ESC
Escape.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC
X'1B'
27

This code is used as an escape sequence introducer.

ESC\ or ST
String terminator.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC \ or ST
X'1B' X'5C' (7-bit) or X'9C' (8-bit)
27 92 (7-bit) or 156 (8-bit)

This command closes the other escape sequences including the operating system and dot graphics
commands.

ESC Q or PU1
Executes Selftest.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC Q or PU1
X'1B' X'51' (7-bit) or X'91' (8-bit)
27 81 (7-bit) or 145 (8-bit)

In serial interface, upon receipt of this command the printer transmits 1B 50 30 1B 5C.

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC c
Resets to initial state (RIS).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC c
X'1B' X'63'
27 99

This command writes the printer parameters from the stored format assigned to the current path into the
current format.

ESC k
Prints test character (PTC).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC k
X'1B' X'6B'
27 107

This sequence causes one line of the print head test character to be printed.

ESC [ p1; ... pn h
Sets mode (SM).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; ... pn h
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' ... pn X'68'
27 91 p1 59 ... pn 104

This command sets a specific print mode according to the parameter value. If the first parameter (p1)is
preceded by a “>” symbol then all parameters are interpreted as proprietary defined parameters. If the “>”
character is not specified, all parameters are interpreted as ANSI defined parameters.
The proprietary defined parameter values are:
p
1
2
3
4

MNEMONIC
PRM0
CSI
BLD
CS2

MODE FUNCTION
Proportional Print Mode
Single Character CSI Mode
Bold Mode
Character Set 2 Mode

The ANSI defined parameter values are:
p
0
20

MNEMONIC MODE FUNCTION
Ignored
LNM Auto CR on LF

ESC p1; pn l
Resets mode (RM).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC p1; pn l
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'6C'
27 91 p1 59 pn 108

This sequence resets the print mode(s) indicated by the p1/pn parameter(s).

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ESC [ p1; p2 SP~
Selects emulation (EMU).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; p2 SP~
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' p2 X'20' X'7E'
27 91 p1 59 p2 32 126

This sequence selects the emulation according to p values. The p1 parameter is an emulation identifier
value while p2 is a reset control value.
The proprietary defined parameter values are:
p1
0
1 -20
21
22

FUNCTION
ANSI
Reserved
IBM Proprinter XL 24/24E
EPSON LQ 1050

Hold values (default). The current settings remain valid after changing the printer
emulation.
Full reset. The status of such parameters reverts to defaults dependent on the
selected emulation.

To select ANSI mode from the Proprinter XL 24 mode and maintain the parameters, the sequence would
be: [0; 0~ Leading zeros and defaulting parameters are not guaranteed to be parsed and
therefore should not be used by the application. Parameter p1 & p2 will be expressed as ASCII, not binary,
values. In the example above, “0” is “30H”, not “00H”.

Paper Path Selection
ESC [ p1; pn p
Assign source for forms.
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; p2 p
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'70'
27 91 p1 59 pn 32 112

This command controls the modes of paths for parking, loading paper. The p parameter is an ASCII value.
See the following table:
P
0-7
8
9
10
11
13
14

PAPER PATH CONTROL
Reserved
Park paper in the current path. Fanfold can be moved backwards for two form lengths. This creates a
“Paper Out” fault condition that exists until paper is loaded from the control panel.
Load Paper from the selected paper path.
Select and load paper from the Front2 (is the optional Front 2 push tractor assembly is installed).
The current paper will be parked or ejected.
Select and load paper from the Front 1. The current paper will be parked.
Select and load paper from the Front 2. (is the optional Front 2 push tractor assembly is installed).
The current paper will be parked or ejected.
Reserved

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Barcode Functions
ESC [ p1; pn }
Sets bar code parameters (BC).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; pn }
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'7D'
27 91 p1 59 pn 125

This command allows selection of the bar code characteristics such as style height, symbol rotation and so
on. The command ESC [3 t enables the bar code mode while ESC [0 t disables the mode.
p1: Bar code style
p1
FUNCTION
0
Interleaved 2 of 5
1
Bidirectional 2 of 5
2
Matrix 2 of 5
3
Industrial 2 of 5
4
Code 3 of 9 (default)
5
EAN-8
6
EAN-13
7
Code 11
9
Codabar (default start/stop = a/t)
10
Codabar (default start/stop = b/n)
11
Codabar (default start/stop = c/*)
12
Codabar (default start/stop = d/e)
13
UPC-A
14
UPC-E
15
Code 93
16
Code 128 (subset A, B and C)
17
Code 128 (subset A, B and C)
18
Code 128 (subset A, B and C)
19
MSI
20
UPC 2 Supplemental
21
UPC 5 Supplemental
22
EAN 2 Supplemental
23
EAN 5 Supplemental
50
Postnet
p2:
Barcode Height
p2
FUNCTION
1
Minimum bar code height (1/12 inch)
120
Maximum bar code height (10 inches)
12
Default bar code height (1 inch)
p3:
Human Readable Input (HRI)
p3
FUNCTION
0
Disables printing of the HRI
1
Enables printing of the HRI (default)
p4:
Narrow Bar
Default width value: 2 (120, 144 and 180 dpi)
p5:
Wide Bar Width
Default width value: 3 (120, 144 dpi), 4 (180 dpi)
p6: Narrow Space Width
Default width value: 6 (120, 144 and 180 dpi)

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

p7: Wide Space Width
Default width value: 7 (120, 144 dpi), 8 (180 dpi)
p8: Intercharacter Space Width
Default width value: 3 (120, 144 dpi), 4 (180 dpi)
p9:
Rotation
p9
FUNCTION
0
0 degrees using current font
1
0 degrees using special HRI font
2
90 degrees using special HRI font
3
180 degrees using special HRI font
4
270 degrees using special HRI font
p10: Horizontal Print Density for Bar Codes Printed
p10
FUNCTION
1
120 dpi horizontal density
2
144 dpi horizontal density (Reserved)
3
180 dpi horizontal density
p11: Check Digit
p11
FUNCTION
0
No check digit requested (default)
1
Check digit requested
p12: Human Readable Font -Reserved
p13: Bar Code Height (in 1/24th-inch increments) -Reserved

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Basic Program Sample
100 DEFSTR
110 WIDTH
120 LPRINT
121 LPRINT
130 LPRINT
140 LPRINT
150 LPRINT
160 LPRINT
170 LPRINT
180 LPRINT
190 LPRINT
200 LPRINT
210 LPRINT
220 LPRINT
230 LPRINT
240 LPRINT
250 LPRINT
260 LPRINT
270 LPRINT
280 LPRINT
290 LPRINT
300 LPRINT
310 LPRINT
320 LPRINT
340 LPRINT
350 LPRINT
260 LPRINT
370 LPRINT
371 LPRINT
380 LPRINT
381 LPRINT
390 LPRINT
400 LPRINT
410 REM
420 LPRINT
430 REM
440 LPRINT
441 LPRINT
450 LPRINT
460 REM
470 LPRINT
471 LPRINT
480 LPRINT
490 LPRINT
500 LPRINT
510 LPRINT
520 FOR
530 LPRINT
540 NEXT
550 LPRINT
560 LPRINT
570 FOR
580 LPRINT
590 NEXT
600 LPRINT
610 LPRINT
620 END

DEFSTR
WIDTH
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT
REM
LPRINT
REM
LPRINT
LPRINT
LPRINT

E:ESC=CHRS(27) ’Define Escape character
.LPT1:*,255
.FOLLOWING ARE SOME OF THIS PRINTER’S .;
.FEATURES USING THE ANSI EMULATION.
ESC;.[;72 C.;.10 CPI (PICA).
ESC;.[;60 G.;.12 CPI (ELITE).
ESC;.[;48 G.;.15 CPI.
ESC;.[;72 C.;.10 CPI.
ESC;.[6m.;.PROPOERTIONAL MODE.
ESC;.[0m.;.BACK TDO NORMAL.
ESC;.5m.;.DOUBLE-WIDE MODE.
LPRINT ESC;.0m’:.BACK TO NORMAL.
LPRINT ESC;.[1m.;.BOLD PRINTING.
LPRINT ESC;.[0m.;.BACK TO NORMAL.
LPRINT ESC;.[1m.;.BOLD PRINTING.
LPRINT ESC;.[0m.;.BACK TO NORMAL.
ESC;.L.;.PARTIAL LINE UP .;
ESC;.K.;./ .;
ESC;.L.;.BACK TO NORMAL.
ESC;.[4m.;.UNDERLINE MODE.
ESC;.[0m.;.BACK TO NORMAL.
.
123.;
’456.
.1234567890123456789012345678901234567890.;
.12345678901234567890.
ESC;.[10m.;.DRAFT PRINT MODE.
ESC;.[720;2880s.
.LEFT MARGIN NOW BEGINS AT 1 INCH AND .;
.RIGHT MARGIN NOW ENDS AT 4 INCHES.
ESC;.[0;9792S.
.LEFT MARGIN NOW BEGINS AT 0 INCH AND .;
.RIGHT MARGIN NOW ENDS AT 13.6 INCHES.
ESC;.[62m.;.LQ PRINT MODE .
ESC;.[120; G.;
[=1 TO 3
.1/6 INCH LINE FEED.
I
ESC;.[90; G.;
J=1 TO 3
.1/8 INCH LINE FEED.
J
ESC;.[120; G.;.NOW 1/6 INCH LINE FEED.
.A FORMFEED FOLLOWS THIS LINE.;CHR$(12)

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Basic Program Printed Output

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This page is intentionally left blank

Chapter 3 ANSI Emulation Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Chapter 4. Intelligent Printer Commands
This chapter explains the concepts of the Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS). IPDS is an orderable
feature for your printer. The intent of this chapter is to provide a basic overview of how IPDS works. The
Intelligent Printer Data Stream Reference provides detailed information about IPDS programming in general
while Chapter 5, “IPDS Programming Information,” provides a detailed description of the IPDS commands
that the Printronix Model S828 printer uses. If the programming information in the Intelligent Printer Data
Stream Reference is different from the programming information in this manual, use this manual to program
the Printronix Model S828 printer.

Overview
The Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS) is a structured-field data stream for managing and controlling
printer processes. IPDS uses all points addressability that allows users to position text, images, graphic
pictures, bar codes, and overlays at any defined point on a printed page. Later pages in this chapter
explain each of these data types and their uses.
IPDS offers the flexibility of creating data and commands independent of the type of attachment protocol
used by the printer or its system. Using the same data stream, printers can attach to control units or any
type of network link that does not restrict the transmission of data to the printer.
IPDS commands within the data stream enable the host processor to control and manage the downloading
of symbol sets and stored objects, such as overlays and page segments. The printer can later use these
stored objects to construct a printed page.
The IPDS command structure also provides the means for returning error information to the host, for
returning query information, and for performing error recovery actions.

Physical Medium
The S828 IPDS defines the physical medium as an area with boundaries of width and depth that define
the limits of this page. The maximum print position (MPP) defines the width of the current page in
characters.
MPP x 1/CPI = width in inches (CPI is the number of characters per inch).
The maximum page length (MPL) defines the depth of the current page in lines.
MPL x 1/LPI = depth in inches (LPI is the number of lines per inch).
The top margin on this page is the top-of-form position, as selected by pressing SET TOP OF FORM on
the operator panel. Figure 2 shows the physical medium layout.

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 2. The Physical Medium
The physical medium defined above is assumed to coincide with the actual physical medium (form) as that
terminology is used in the following discussion.

IPDS Coordinate Systems
IPDS uses coordinate systems to define any point on a page. All IPDS commands containing location
parameters use these coordinate systems to define distance measurements. The coordinate systems
specify these distances in logical units called units.
Many IPDS commands contain parameters that specify values for position or size in units. For example,
one unit may equal approximately 0.018 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]). Before using these values, the S828
Printer truncates the specified values to multiples of 0.18 mm (0.0007 in. [1/1440 in.]) for all unit parameters
except those associated with DP, and DP Text baseline positioning. The S828 Printer truncates DP, and
DP Text baseline positioning parameters to multiples of 0.36 mm (0.014 in. [1/72 in.]). The unit parameters
are identified in Chapter 5, “IPDS Programming Information,”.

X and Y Medium Coordinate System
The Xm and Ym coordinates, known as the medium coordinate system, relate directly to the physical
medium. The Xm, Ym coordinate system is fixed for each medium or form size. IPDS commands cannot
change the origin and the orientation of these coordinates. The origin (Xm=0, Ym=0) is always at the top
left hand corner of the physical medium. Positive Xm values begin at the origin and increase along the top
of the sheet, from left to right. Positive Ym values begin at the origin and increase along the left side of the
sheet moving downward toward the bottom of the sheet. Figure 3 shows the Xm, Ym coordinate system:

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 3. The Xm,Ym Medium Coordinate System

Logical Page Layout
IPDS describes the printed output in terms of logical pages. The logical page does not have to be
contained completely on the physical medium. However, printing can only occur where the two areas
overlap. Figure 4 shows the physical-logical page relationship.

Figure 4. The Physical-Logical Page Relationship
The logical page reference corner is the corner of the logical page that is at the smallest Xp, Yp position.
This corner does not necessarily have to coincide with the physical medium origin (Xm=0, Ym=0). The
logical page size in the X dimension is the 'X-Extent', and the logical page size in the Y dimension is the
'Y-Extent'. IPDS commands specify the logical page size and location. Figure 5 shows the relationship

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

between the X and Y coordinates and the logical and physical medium.

Figure 5. The X and Y Coordinate System and the Logical Page

I and B Coordinate System
In addition to the X,Y coordinate system, IPDS uses another coordinate system, the I-B coordinate system.
These coordinates describe the placement and orientation of text or images on the logical page. The
printer places characters along the I-axis for a line of text. The B-axis is the direction in which the printer
places lines of text on the logical page. IPDS commands can change both the origin and the orientation of
the I and B axes (see Figure 5).
Direction: As the printer places text characters on the page, the inline coordinate increases. The direction
of this increase is the positive inline direction or +I. The baseline coordinate also increases as the printer
places text lines on the page. The direction of this increase is the positive baseline direction or +B.
Location parameters within the IPDS commands specify the I and B directions. Chapter 5, “IPDS
Programming Information,” contains specific information about these commands.
Distance: The inline coordinate increases a predetermined distance as the printer places the text
characters on the page. This distance is the character increment. The baseline coordinate also increases a
predetermined distance as the printer places lines of text on the page. This distance is the baseline
increment. Location parameters within the IPDS commands specify the I and B distances. Chapter 5,
“IPDS Programming Information,” contains specific information about these commands.
Initial coordinates: The coordinates of the first print position on the logical page are the initial
coordinates. The initial inline print coordinate is Ii. The initial baseline print coordinate is Bi.
Current coordinates: The coordinates of the current print position on the logical page are the current
coordinates. The current inline print coordinate is Ic. The current baseline print coordinate is Bc. Figure 6
shows the various I and B coordinates on the logical page:

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 6. The I and B Coordinate System on the Logical Page
Notes:
1. The S828 IPDS Printer text character box is 180 units high by 144 units wide at 10 CPI when the XpYp
units equal 1,440 per inch. The left edge of the character box is at the specified inline position and the
bottom edge of the character box is 20 units below the specified baseline position.
2. If the bottom edge of the character box falls below the printable area on the physical medium, the
character will not print. In this situation, a baseline move (Relative Move Baseline or Absolute Move
Baseline) text command can place the character box totally within the printable area.

Processing IPDS Commands
The structured field format of IPDS allows one or more commands to be sent to the printer in a continuous
stream. Each command is self-describing; the command length, type, optional parameters, and data are all
part of each specific command. The printer processes each command in the order it is received. Every
IPDS command contains a flag byte. Setting the Acknowledgment Required bit on in this flag byte
indicates to the printer the end of a command stream sequence. The printer then sends an Acknowledge
Reply to the host. Figure 7 shows an example of an IPDS data stream:

Figure 7. An Example of the IPDS Data Stream

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

IPDS Command Format
All of the printer commands use the following format:
Length

Command

Flag

Correlation ID

Data

Note: Bit numbering follows the EBCDIC convention with bit zero being the most significant bit. A
description of each field follows.
Length
Length is a two-byte field that specifies the length of this command. This count includes the two-byte
length field, the command field, the flag byte, and the optional fields (Correlation ID and Data Fields). The
Length field can be any value from 5 to 32,767 (X'7FFF').
Command
Command is a two-byte field that specifies the IPDS command code. See next table for a list of valid
command codes.
Flag
Flag is a one-byte field that contains the IPDS command stream flags.
Bit 0 of this byte is the Acknowledgment Required (ARQ) flag. If this bit is on, the host requests the printer
to send an Acknowledge Reply.
Bit 1 of this byte is the Correlation ID flag. If this bit is B’1’, a two-byte correlation number follows this flag
byte. If this bit is B'0', the optional correlation number is not present and the following byte or bytes contain
the data field.
Bit 2 of this byte is the acknowledgement continuation flag. If this bit is B'1', the host is requesting
continuation of the current Acknowledge Reply. If this bit is B'0', the host is not requesting continuation.
Bits 3-7 of the flag byte are reserved and must be zero.
Correlation ID
Correlation ID is a two-byte value that specifies an identifier for this command. The Correlation ID is an
optional field and is only present if bit 1 of the flag byte is B'1'. The printer can use any value between
0000 and FFFF for this ID. If an error occurs on a command prior to acceptance for processing, the printer
sends a negative acknowledgement (NACK) to the host. If the printer recognizes the command that
caused the error, the Correlation ID field in the NACK will contain the ID of the command responsible for
the NACK. Correlation ID is also returned in response to commands that request information and
commands that request an acknowledgement.
Data

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Data is an optional field and is not present for all commands. This field contains specific subcommands,
parameters, and data appropriate for the given command. The length of the data field can range from 0 to
32760 (X'7FF8') if the correlation ID is present. If the correlation ID is not present, the length of the data
field can range from 0 to 32762 (X'7FFA').

Table 3. Valid IPDS Command Codes for the Printronix S828 IPDS Printer
Command
SHS
STM
NOP
LSS
XOH
XOA
BP
EP
LCC
LPD
LPP
WBCC
WBC
WGC
WG
WIC
WI
WT
BO
DO
IO
BPS
DPS
IPS
LE
LFE
DF
END

Hex Code
D697
D6E4
D603
D61E
D68F
D633
D6AF
D6BF
D69F
D6CF
D66D
D680
D681
D684
D685
D63D
D64D
D62D
D6DF
D6EF
D67D
D65F
D66F
D67F
D61D
D63F
D64F
D65D

Description
Set Home State
Sense Type and Model
No Operation
Load Symbol Set
Execute Order Home State
Execute Order Any State
Begin Page
End Page
Load Copy Control
Logical Page Descriptor
Logical Page Position
Write Bar Code Control
Write Bar Code
Write Graphics Control
Write Graphics
Write Image Control
Write Image
Write Text
Begin Overlay
Deactivate Overlay
Include Overlay
Begin Page Segment
Deactivate Page Segment
Include Page Segment
Load Equivalence
Load Font Equivalence
Deactivate Font
End

Acknowledge Requests and Replies
The following sections explain:
● Acknowledge Reply (ACK)
● Host Acknowledgment Requests
● Printer Acknowledgement Replies

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Acknowledge Reply (ACK)
The printer uses the Acknowledge Reply to return device status, sense information, and any additionally
requested information to the host application program.
The application program uses the Acknowledge data to maintain control of the printing application and to
initiate error recovery actions when necessary.
The format for the Acknowledge Reply is:
Length

D6FF

Flag

Correlation ID

Data

D6FF

Flag

Correlation ID

Data

or
Length

The printer sends an acknowledgment:
● Whenever the acknowledgment required bit in the flag byte is on
● Whenever the printer detects a command stream error or device error and a negative response must be
sent.
A negative reply (NACK), if required, has priority over a positive reply (ACK).
Length
Length is the total length of the ACK reply, including this field. The maximum length of this command is
255 bytes. If there is a five-byte command header (no correlation ID present), the data field can be up to
250 bytes long. If a correlation ID is present in the header, the maximum data field length is 248 bytes.
D6FF
D6FF in the command ID field indicates this is an Acknowledge Reply from the printer to the host.
Flag
Flag is a one-byte field that specifies the flags for this command. Bits 1, 2, and 7 are the only bits used in
this byte. All other bits are reserved and must be zeros. If bit 1 is BX'1', a Correlation ID is present in this
command. If bit 1 is BX'0', no Correlation ID is present. If bit 2 is B'1', the response can be continued in a
later Acknowledge Reply. If bit 2 is B'0', the response is complete in this Acknowledge Reply.
Correlation ID
Correlation ID is a two-byte field that contains the identifier from a previously received command, such as
Sense Type and Model. If the printer receives a command that requires an Acknowledgment Reply, and if
that command contains a correlation ID, the printer also includes the same correlation ID in its
corresponding field. Also, if an error occurs and the printer can recognize the command that caused the
error, the printer includes the correlation ID of that command in the NACK.
Data
Acknowledgement Type

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

Page/Copy Counters

Special Data (SD)

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

DATA is the field that follows the correlation ID field or the flag byte if no correlation ID is present. The
length of this field can be 0-250 (X'00'-X'FA') if no correlation ID is present, and 0-248 (X'00'-X'F8') if the
correlation ID is present.
The first byte of the data field is the acknowledgment type. Values of 00, 01, 04, and 06 for this byte
indicate a positive acknowledgment (ACK). A value of X'80' for this byte indicates a negative
acknowledgment (NACK). Any other values for this byte are invalid.
The next 4 bytes of the data field are the page/copy counters. The first two page/copy counter bytes
(most significant bytes) are a stacked page counter. This counter identifies how many pages have
successfully stacked and printed. The last two page/copy counter bytes (least significant bytes) are
reserved and must be zero.
Following the page/copy counter bytes is the Special Data (SD) area. Depending on the acknowledgment
type, this field can be omitted, can contain requested printer information, or can contain sense information.
The following chart summarizes the acknowledgments and the special data areas:
Type
X'00'
X'01'
X'04'
X'06'
X'80'

Meaning
ACK
ACK
ACK
ACK
NACK

Special Data Area Contents
None
Type and Model
Resource List
Printer Information
Sense Bytes

For a detailed explanation of the Special Data (SD) area contents, see Chapter 5, “IPDS Programming
Information”.

Host Acknowledgment Requests
The host requests an acknowledgment from the printer by setting the Acknowledgment Required (ARQ)
flag bit on in the IPDS command (see “IPDS Command Format”). This request occurs in two
instances:
1. In any command of a command sequence when the host wants a positive acknowledgment (ACK) that
the printer has received and accepted the command sequence for processing.
2. In commands sent by the host to request the return of printer information.
If the printer receives a command that is normally used to request the return of printer data but the ARQ
flag is not on, the printer ignores this command.
A positive acknowledgment (ACK) at the end of a command stream is equivalent to an ACK on each and
every command preceding the command that has the ACK. An ACK is an indication from the printer that
all commands since the last acknowledgment are accepted for processing.

Printer Acknowledgment Replies
The printer sends an Acknowledge Reply to the host to:
● Indicate that a received command or command sequence requesting acknowledgment has been
accepted for processing
● Return requested printer information
● Report errors

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

The printer sends a Negative Acknowledge Reply (NACK) to the host to indicate that an error has
occurred.
The printer can send an ACK or a NACK in response to an ARQ. If an error occurs, the printer can send a
NACK without receiving an ARQ.
The following general rules apply to the printer replies:
● If the printer receives a command requesting acknowledgment and this command also requests specific
printer information, then:
1. The printer sends a positive acknowledgment to the host, and
2. The printer sends the requested information in the data field portion of the Acknowledge Reply.
● If the printer receives a command requesting acknowledgment and this command does not request
specific printer information, then:
1. The printer sends a positive acknowledgment to the host, and
2. The printer does not include any information in the data field portion of the Acknowledge Reply.
● If the printer generates the Acknowledge Reply as a result of detecting an error, then the printer sends a
Negative Acknowledgment (NACK) to the host. Under this condition, the printer also sends to the host
information concerning the error. This error information is in the data field portion of the Acknowledge
Reply.
● The Exception Handling Control command instructs the printer on error processing. For more
information about the Exception Handling Control, see Chapter 5, “IPDS Programming Information,”.
● The printer can only return one error per NACK.
● If the printer receives a command requesting an acknowledgment, the printer expects the host to wait
for the acknowledgment before sending further commands. If the printer receives additional commands
from the host within the same transmission after the acknowledgment, the commands are ignored.

IPDS Data
There are various forms of data that the printer uses for creating the output page. These include text,
graphics, bar codes, and images. The printed page can include any combination of this data.
Text data contains lines of character information which the printer places in sequence on the page.
Graphics data contains lines, arcs, markers, and other elements which present a printed picture.
Bar code data is a data type that supports applications requiring precision printing of encoded information
in a form that is recognizable by scanning devices.
Image data contains rectangular arrays of information. The array consists of a sequence of scan lines.
Each scan line consists of picture elements (pels). The image data contains one (dot position) bit per pel.
The text, graphics, bar code, and image data types each have their own unique commands. Chapter 5,
“IPDS Programming Information,” contains a detailed description of these commands.
Blocks of graphics, image, or bar code data are presented as a single unit to the printer. The printer
enters the appropriate Block State (graphics block, image block, or bar code block) to create the entire
data group for that block of data.
Page segments and overlays are any combinations of text, graphics, bar codes, and images. The printer
can store these segments and overlays for later use as the page is created. For information about segments,
see “Include Page Segment (IPS)”. For information about overlays, see “Begin Overlay (BO)”. Figure 8
shows various data types on a page.

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

100

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 8. A Sample Page Constructed on an IPDS Printer
Notes:
1. Overlays and page segments can be merged on this page.
2. Text and data blocks can be positioned at different places on this page.
3. A logical page can be positioned anywhere with respect to the physical medium.

Mixing Rules
IPDS allows the same physical pel to be overwritten an unlimited number of times. Overwriting can occur
both within a block and across blocks. For example, within text blocks, overwriting can be caused by using
the Overstrike control. Within a graphics block, overwriting occurs whenever one graphics area or figure
overlays another. Across block overwriting can occur whenever one IPDS block physically overlays any
portion of another IPDS block.
Within each block, the S828 IPDS Printer further defines background pels and foreground pels. Foreground
pels are:
● The pels of a character

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

101

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

● The pels of a rule
● The pels of an image
● The pels of a graphic line or arc
● The pels of a filled area
● The pels of a bar code.
Background pels are all other pels.
Text data, because it prints at a different physical resolution than the data in the other blocks, does not
logically mix with any other data type. The only mixing that takes place between text data and any other
data type is the (possible) physical mixing of ink on forms.
For the S828 IPDS Printer, the mixing rule for overwritten data within a given block of image, graphics, or bar
code data is quite simple: background pels are transparent; foreground pels are opaque. Thus,
background pels always show through what is underneath (what was received earlier), while foreground
pels cover it up. In other words, a pel prints in the color of its last overwriting.
Note: Color of medium is a valid color for image, graphics, and bar code data. Thus, foreground pels in
this color cover up pels of any other color that are underneath.
For the S828 IPDS Printer, the mixing rule for overwritten data across blocks is the same as it is within
blocks except for text. Thus, across image and graphics, or bar code blocks, background pels are
transparent, while foreground pels are opaque.

IPDS Operating States
There are various operating states using the IPDS commands. The following states define the operating
environment for this printer:
● Home state
● Page state
● Overlay state
● Page segment state
● Block state.
While in the page, overlay, or page segment state, the printer can enter a block state. The block state
causes the printer to process a block of data. There are image blocks, graphics blocks, and bar code
blocks. Thus, the printer can enter any of the data block states from any of the operating states.

Home State
Home state is the initial IPDS operating state. The printer returns to home state at the end of each page,
page segment, or overlay. In addition, the printer can enter the home state by receiving a Set Home State
command. The S828 IPDS Printer also goes to home state when a NACK is returned.
While in the home state, the printer receives control and initialization commands to prepare for a print
operation. In this state, the printer can also receive commands that request the return of printer information
to the host application program.

Page State
Page state is the operating state for printing a logical page. The printer enters the page state from the
home state as a result of receiving a Begin Page command.
In the page state, the printer can receive commands that merge previously defined and loaded overlay and
page segments with the current page information. The printer can also receive Write Text commands that
position text on the logical page. The presence of Write Image (block) Control, Write Graphics (block)

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

102

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Control, or Write Bar Code (block) Control commands in the data stream indicates that the printed page
contains individual blocks of image, graphics, or bar code data for positioning on the page. These
commands cause a state transition to occur to an appropriate page block state. In the block state, the
printer establishes the initial conditions and processes the block of data onto the page. Receiving an End
command in a page block state terminates that state and returns processing back to the page state.
Figure 9 shows the relationship between the home state, page state, and block states.

Figure 9. The Relationship between Home State, Page State, and Block States

Overlay State
Overlay state is the operating state that stores data in the printer. The printer enters the overlay state from
the home state as a result of receiving a Begin Overlay command.
A parameter in the Begin Overlay command provides an identifier for later references to this overlay. The
printer saves the currently active Logical Page Descriptor value, the Load Font Equivalence value, and the
Load Equivalence value as part of the stored overlay definition.
The same commands that the printer uses in the page state are also valid while in the overlay state.
Figure 10 shows the relationship between the home state, overlay state, and block states.

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

103

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 10. The Relationship between Home State, Overlay State, and Block State

Page Segment State
The printer enters the page segment state from the home state as a result of receiving a Begin Page
Segment command. A parameter in the Begin Page Segment command provides an identifier for later
references to this segment.
Page segments assume the environment (Logical Page Descriptor, Load Font Equivalence, and Load
Equivalence) that is active at the time the segment is presented.
While in a page segment state, the printer can only receive commands to write text, image, bar code, and
graphics blocks.
Figure 11 shows the relationship between the home state, page segment state, and block
states.

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

104

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 11. The Relationship between Home State, Page Segment State, and Block States

Summary of the IPDS States and Commands
Next table shows all the valid IPDS commands for the S828 IPDS Printer and the initial and ending states for
each command. The printer must be in the initial state shown for each command for that command to be
valid. The ending state is the resulting state the printer enters after a valid command processes.
Table 4. IPDS Command Code Summary for the S828 IPDS Printer
Cmd
SHS
STM
NOP
LSS
XOH
XOA
BP
EP

Hex Code
D697
D6E4
D603
D61E
D68F
D633
D6AF
D6BF

Description
Set Home State
Sense Type and Model
No Operation
Load Symbol Set
Execute Order Home State
Execute Order Any State
Begin Page
End Page

LCC
LPD
LPP

D69F
D6CF
D66D

Load Copy Control
Logical Page Descriptor
Logical Page Position

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

Initial State
Any
Any
Any
Home
Home
Any
Home
Page, Page Segment,
or Overlay
Home
Home
Home

105

Ending State
Home
No Change
No Change
Home
Home
No Change (See Note 1)
Page
Home
Home
Home
Home

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 4. IPDS Command Code Summary for 828 IPDS Printer (continued)
Cmd Hex Code
WBCC D680

Description
Write Bar Code Control

Initial State
Page, Page Segment,
or Overlay

Ending State
Page Bar Code Block, Page
Segment Bar Code Block, or
Overlay Bar Code Block

WBC

D681

Write Bar Code Page

Page Bar Code Block,
Page Segment Bar Code
Block, or Overlay Bar
Code Block

No Change

WGC

D684

Write Graphics Control

Page, Page Segment,
or Overlay

Page Graphics Block, Page
Segment Graphics Block,
or Overlay Graphics Block

D685

Write Graphics

Page Graphics Block,
Page Segment Graphics
Block, or Overlay
Graphics Block

No Change

WIC

D63D

Write Image Control

Page, Page Segment,
or Overlay

Page Image Block, Page
Segment Image Block,
or Overlay Image Block

D64D

Write Image

Page Image Block, Page
Segment Image Block,
or Overlay Image Block

No Change

D62D

Write Text

Page, Page Segment,
or Overlay

No Change

D6DF

Begin Overlay

Home

Overlay

D6EF

Deactivate Overlay

Home

D67D

Include Overlay

Page or Overlay

No Change

BPS

D65F

Begin Page Segment

Home

Page Segment

DPS

D66F

Deactivate Page Segment

Home

IPS

D67F

Include Page Segment

Page or Overlay

No Change

D61D

Load Equivalence

Home

LFE

D63F

Load Font Equivalence

Home, Page, Page
Segment, or Overlay

No Change

D64F

Deactivate Font

Home

END

D65D

End

See Note 2

Notes:
1. The Discard Buffered Data subcommand in the Execute Order Any State command causes the printer to
enter the home state.
2. The End command is valid in any page block, overlay block, or page segment block state and causes the
printer to return to the corresponding page, overlay, or page segment state.
Figure 11 shows all of the IPDS states and their commands. Notice that some commands can only occur in a
specific state, some commands can occur in more than one state, and some commands can occur in any
state. Also note that the printer can only enter the page state, the page segment state, and the overlay state
from the home state.

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

106

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 11. The Complete IPDS State Diagram

A Typical IPDS Command Sequence
The following chart shows an example of a typical IPDS command sequence. This sequence contains five
basic categories:
1. Initialization
2. Preparation
3. Page Segment
4. Overlay
5. Page

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

107

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Each category starts with a command from the host to the printer and ends with an acknowledgment from
the printer to the host. An analysis of each category follows this example.
Note: . indicates a command from the host to the printer. . indicates a reply from the printer to the host.
Table 5. An Example of an IPDS Command Sequence
Printer
State
Initialization
Sequence

Command
Direction

Preparatory
Sequence

Page
Segment
Sequence
Block
State

End Block
State

Overlay
Sequence

Block
State
End Block
State

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

CMD

Command Name

Description

STM

Sense Type and Model

Request Device Information

ACK
SHS
LPD
LPP
LCC
LFE
ACK
BPS
WT
WT
WT
WIC

Acknowledgement Response
Set Home State
Logical Page Descriptor
Logical Page Position Locate
Load Copy Control
Load Font Equivalence Load
Acknowledgement Response
Begin Page Segment
Write Text
Write Text
Write Text
Write Image Control

WI
WI
END
WT
WT
EP
ACK
BO
WT
WT
WT
IO
WGC
WG
WG
END
WT
WT
IO
IPS
EP
ACK

Write Image
Write Image
End
Write Text
Write Text
End Page
Acknowledgement Response
Begin Overlay
Write Text
Write Text
Write Text
Include Overlay
Write Graphics Control
Write Graphics
Write Graphics
End
Write Text
Write Text
Include Overlay
Include Page Segment
End Page
Acknowledgement Response

Return Type/Model Information
Set Printer Home State
Define Logical Page
Logical Page
Load Page Copy Information
Font Mapping
Acknowledge Successful Operation
Set Printer to Page Segment State
Store Text Data in Page Segment
Store Text Data in Page Segment
Store Text Data in Page Segment
Start Page Segment Image Block
State
Store Image Data in Page Segment
Store Image Data in Page Segment
End Image Block State
Store Text Data in Page Segment
Store Text Data in Page Segment
Return to Home State
Acknowledge Successful Operation
Enter Overlay State
Store Text Data in Overlay
Store Text Data in Overlay
Store Text Data in Overlay
Include Another Overlay
Enter Overlay Graphics Block State
Store Graphics Data in Overlay
Store Graphics Data in Overlay
End Overlay Graphics Block State
Store Text in Overlay
Store Text in Overlay
Include Another Overlay
Include Page Segment in Overlay
Return to Home State
Acknowledge Successful Operation

108

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 3. An Example of an IPDS Command Sequence (continued)
Printer
State

Command
Direction

Page
Sequence

Block
State

End Block
State

CMD

Command Name

Description

BP
WT
IO
IPS
WIC

Begin Page
Write Text
Include Overlay
Include Page Segment
Write Image Content

WI
WI
END
WT
WT
IO
IPS
EP

Write Image
Write Image
End
Write Text
Write Text
Include Overlay
Include Pate Segment
End Page

ACK

Acknowledgement Response

Enter Page State
Send Text Data to Printer
Print Overlay
Print Page Segment
Start Page Segment Image Block
State
Send Image Data to Printer
Send Image Data to Printer
End Image Block State
Send Text Data to Printer
Send Text Data to Printer
Print Overlay
Print Page Segment
Complete All Printing and Return to
Home State
Acknowledge Successful Operation

Printer Initialization and Preparation Sequence
Before any printing begins, it is necessary to specify certain parameters and conditions for the printer. The
following sample command sequence accomplishes this task:
● STM (Sense Type and Model)
● ACK (Acknowledgment Reply)
● SHS (Set Home State)
● LPD (Logical Page Descriptor)
● LPP (Logical Page Position)
● LCC (Load Copy Control)
● LFE (Load Font Equivalence)
● ACK (Acknowledgment Reply).
Note: This sequence is only a typical example. It is not mandatory for the host to send all of these
commands.
STM (Sense Type and Model): The host sends the STM command to sense the printer characteristics.
ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with
type and model information to the host. This information includes printer number (S828), model, and the
various function set vector information.
SHS (Set Home State): The host sends the SHS command to make sure the printer is in the home state
before the start of a print job.
LPD (Logical Page Descriptor): The LPD command sets print characteristics for the logical page. These
parameters include:
● Page size
● Initial coordinates
● Initial left margin
● Intercharacter increment
● Baseline increment
● Font ID

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

109

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

● Text color.
LPP (Logical Page Position): The LPP command positions the upper-left corner of the logical page (as
defined by the LPD command) with respect to the top-of-form setting. This command locates the logical
page on the physical medium.
LCC (Load Copy Control): The LCC command specifies which overlays to include on each subsequent
page and which suppressions to activate for each page. Suppression allows selective suppression of data
while printing.
LFE (Load Font Equivalence): The LFE command maps a local font identifier (from within the text,
graphics, or bar code data) to a global ID used for resource management. This command also specifies
for each font attributes, such as bold, double-strike, double-wide, and italics.
ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with
the ACK reply to inform the host of successful execution of all the previous commands. This command
indicates to the host that the printer is now ready to accept data for print operations. This is the end of the
initialization and preparation sequence.

Page Segment Sequence
The page segment sequence creates one or more page segments for later printing. The following
command sequence illustrates the loading of a sample page segment:
● BPS (Begin Page Segment)
● WT (Write Text)
● WIC (Write Image Control)
● WI (Write Image)
● END (End)
● WT (Write Text)
● EP (End Page)
● ACK (Acknowledgment Reply).
Note: This sequence is only an example. A page segment can contain any combination of text, image,
graphics, or bar code data.
BPS (Begin Page Segment): The host sends the BPS command to the printer, causing the printer to
leave the home state and enter the page segment state. The page segment state creates a segment of
page data to save within the printer for later printing. The BPS command contains an identifier (ID) for
later use in selecting this segment. This segment can contain combinations of text, images, bar codes, and
graphics.
WT (Write Text): The WT command sends text data to the printer. Because the printer is currently in a
page segment state, this text information does not print at this time. Instead, the data becomes part of the
page segment. The host can send multiple WT commands to the printer while in the page segment state.
WIC (Write Image Control): The WIC command causes the printer to enter the image block state.
Parameters in this command define the image size, scale, initial coordinates, and color of the image.
WI (Write Image): The WI command sends a block of image data to the printer. One or more of these
commands create the actual image for later printing.
END (End): The END command terminates the image block state. The printer remains in the page
segment state with the image stored for later use.

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

110

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

WT (Write Text): This command is repeated at this point in the sequence to illustrate that additional text
data can be added to the page segment. In addition to zero or more of the WT commands, this segment
could also include additional graphics data, image data, or bar code data.
EP (End Page): The EP command causes the printer to leave the page segment state and return to the
home state Printronix recommends that this command contain an acknowledgment request to let you know
of successful execution of the page segment.
ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with
the ACK command to inform the host of successful execution of all the previous commands. This
command indicates to the host that the printer has accepted all the segment data and stored this
information for later printing.

Overlay Sequence
The overlay sequence creates one or more overlays for later printing. The following command sequence
illustrates the loading of a typical overlay:
● BO (Begin Overlay)
● WT (Write Text)
● IO (Include Overlay)
● WGC (Write Graphics Control)
● WG (Write Graphics)
● END (End)
● WT (Write Text)
● IO (Include Overlay)
● IPS (Include Page Segment)
● EP (End Page)
● ACK (Acknowledgment Reply).
Note: This sequence is only an example. An overlay can contain any combination of text, image blocks,
graphics blocks, bar code blocks, page segments, or overlays.
BO (Begin Overlay): The host sends the BO command to the printer causing the printer to leave the
home state and enter the overlay state. The overlay state creates an overlay of data to save within the
printer for later printing. The BO command contains an identifier (ID) for later use in selecting this overlay.
WT (Write Text): The WT command sends text data to the printer. Because the printer is currently in an
overlay state, this information does not print at this time. Instead, the data becomes part of the overlay.
The host can send multiple WT commands to the printer while in the overlay state.
IO (Include Overlay): The IO command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current
overlay. This command contains an ID field that selects the desired overlay.
WGC (Write Graphics Control): The WGC command causes the printer to enter the graphics block state.
Parameters in this command specify the placement, size, and orientation of the graphics block.
WG (Write Graphics): The WG command sends graphics data to the printer. The graphics data
(contained in drawing orders) specifies the various elements of the graphic. These include color, size, line
type, line width, and other parameters. One or more WG commands present the graphics picture.
END (End): The END command terminates the graphics block state. The printer remains in the overlay
state with the graphics block as part of the overlay.
WT (Write Text): This command is repeated at this point in the sequence to illustrate that additional text
data can be added to the overlay. In addition to zero or more of the WT commands, image data, bar code
data, or additional graphics data could also be included in the overlay.

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

111

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

IO (Include Overlay): The IO command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current
overlay.
IPS (Include Page Segment): The IPS command causes a previously stored page segment to merge
onto the current overlay. An ID in this command specifies the selected page segment.
EP (End Page): The EP command causes the printer to leave the overlay state and return to the home
state. Printronix recommends that this command contain an acknowledgment request to verify successful
transmission of the overlay.
ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with
the ACK reply, to inform the host of successful execution of all the previous commands. This reply
indicates to the host that the printer has accepted all the overlay data and stored this information for later
printing.

Page Sequence
The page sequence causes data to print on the current page. This data can include previously stored
overlays or page segments, as well as text data. The following commands illustrate a typical page
sequence:
● BP (Begin Page)
● WT (Write Text)
● IO (Include Overlay)
● IPS (Include Page Segment)
● WIC (Write Image Control)
● WI (Write Image)
● END (End)
● WT (Write Text)
● IO (Include Overlay)
● IPS (Include Page Segment)
● EP (End Page)
● ACK (Acknowledgment Reply).
Note: This sequence is only an example. A page can contain any combination of text, image blocks,
graphics blocks, bar code blocks, page segments, or overlays.
BP (Begin Page): The host sends the BP command to the printer, causing the printer to leave the home
state and enter the page state.
WT (Write Text): The WT command sends text data to the printer. Because the printer is currently in a
page state, this text information prints at this time. The host can send multiple WT commands to the
printer while in the page state.
IO (Include Overlay): The IO command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current
page. This command contains an ID field, which selects the desired overlay.
IPS (Include Page Segment): The IPS command causes a previously stored page segment to merge
onto the current page. An ID in this command specifies the selected page segment. The selected page
segment now prints on the current page.
WIC (Write Image Control): The WIC command causes the printer to enter the image block state.
Parameters in this command define the image size, scale, initial coordinates, and color of the image.
WI (Write Image): The WI command sends a block of bit image data to the printer. One or more of these
commands create the actual image for printing. Because the printer is now in the page state, the image
prints as it is received by the printer.

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

112

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

END (End): The END command terminates the image block state. The printer remains in the page state.
WT (Write Text): This command is repeated at this point in the sequence to illustrate that additional text
data can be added to the page. In addition to zero or more of the WT commands, graphics data, bar code
data, or additional image data could also be included on the page.
IO (Include Overlay): The IO command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current
page. This overlay now prints on the current page.
IPS (Include Page Segment): The IPS command causes a previously stored page segment to merge
onto the current page. An ID in this command specifies the selected page segment. The selected page
segment now prints on the current page.
EP (End Page): The EP command causes the printer to leave the page state and return to the home
state. Printronix that this command contain an acknowledgment request to verify successful execution of the
page data.
ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with
the ACK reply to inform the host of successful execution of all the previous commands. This reply
indicates to the host that the printer has accepted all the page data, and all selected segments, images, or
overlays have successfully printed.
Chapter 5, “IPDS Programming Information,” contains a more detailed description of all the IPDS commands.

Error Handling
An exception (error) occurs when the printer detects an invalid or unsupported command, control, or
parameter value in the data stream received from the host. The IPDS error handling structure assigns a
unique exception code to each type of error. The printer sends these codes to the host, as sense bytes, in
the NACK (negative acknowledgment reply). See Chapter 6, “IPDS Exception Reporting Codes,” for a
description of the exception codes.
The host can control how the printer responds to the exceptions. The Exception Handling Control
(see“Exception Handling Control (EHC)”) order permits independent control over three exception
handling functions:
● The exceptions to report with a NACK reply
● The implementation of Alternate Exception Actions (AEA) when a valid parameter value is received but
not supported by the printer
● The termination or continuation procedure to follow if the alternate error action is not taken or if there is
no alternate error action associated with this error.
The host application program can use the Exception Handling Control order to accomplish many specific
control capabilities necessary in data printing environments. For example, through the proper selection of
settings, it is possible to:
● Enforce control over printing of page information
● Enable automatic skipping of data types not supported by the printer
● Suppress the return of meaningless or redundant exception reports when alternate actions are
acceptable to the user.
The host can issue the Exception Handling Control order in any printer state. This allows the host to
manage exception processing at any level desired by the host application.

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

113

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This page is intentionally left blank

Chapter 4 IPDS Commands

114

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Chapter 5. IPDS Programming Information
This chapter contains programming information for the Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS) commands.
The information is for the experienced programmer. A knowledge of data stream requirements, hexadecimal
numbering systems, and data processing terminology and concepts is assumed.
In addition to the information in this chapter, Chapter 4, “Intelligent Printer Commands,” contains introductory
information about the IPDS.

IPDS Initialization Defaults
When the printer power switch is initially turned On (|), various IPDS data stream parameters are set to
their initialization default values. These values remain in effect until overridden by specific data stream
commands from the host application program.
Table 6 contains the initialization defaults for this printer:
Table 6. IPDS Initialization Defaults
Default Description
Units Base Value
Input Media Source
Width of the Physical Medium
Length of the Physical Medium
Width of the Logical Page in Units (X-Extent)
Length of the Logical Page in Units (Y-Extent)
Ordered Data Flags
X-Axis Orientation
Y-Axis Orientation
Current I Text Position
Current B Text Position
X-Displacement
Y-Displacement
Initial Inline Margin in Units
Intercharacter Adjustment
Baseline Increment
Local Font ID FF
Text Color
Code Page ID
Font Quality
Font Type
Exception Handling Control

Hex Value
00 (10 in.)
Determined by Operator Panel Paper Source setting
MPP Value, Operator Panel Selection
MPL Value, Operator Panel Selection
4A40 (Decimal 13.2 in. Width, 1440 Units Per In.)
3DE0 (Decimal 11 in. Length, 1440 Units Per In.)
00 (Unordered Page, Block, and Text Flags)
0000 (0 Degrees)
2D00 (90 Degrees)
0000
00A0 The Default Font Type Baseline (see Note 1)
0000 Logical Page X-Displacement from Physical Medium Origin
0000 Logical Page Y-Displacement from Physical Medium Origin
0000
0000
LPI value, Operator Panel Selection
(see Note 3)
Black
Language value, Operator Panel selection
Print Quality value, Operator Panel selection
Determined by Print Quality and CPI value Operator Panel
selection (see Note 2)
Report Undefined Characters, Position Checks, and All
Other Exceptions. Do Not Take Alternate Exception Action.
Terminate, Print Page, and Go to Home State.

Notes:
1. Text printing on the first line requires an initial Y-displacement value of 00A0.
2. The printer default font is Gothic for DP and fast draft print quality and Courier for DP Text and NLQ
print quality. To determine the current values for CPI, language and quality, refer to the Administrators
Manual for your printer.
3. When Local Font ID equals FF is used, the latest inline sequence established in “Logical Page
Descriptor (LPD)” determines whether to print in a left-to-right or right-to-left sequence. The default
when the printer is powered on is the left-to-right sequence.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

115

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Parameter Values
The Printronix S828 Printer allows flexibility in selecting various options to perform a wide range of functions.
Parameter values are initially set at the factory. The printer uses these values to format the page and to
control forms movement. The parameter values also allow the operator to select the printer address,
language, and print mode and compatibility options, and to turn the alarm on or off.
The printer can use the initial factory set values, or the operator can change these values. Any new value
selection made at the operator panel becomes the new parameter value immediately upon selection. If this
configuration is saved by the operator into the power-on custom set, this value remains as the new
parameter value, even after the printer power switch is turned Off (O).
The operator can select the following parameter values at the operator panel and change them:
● Characters per inch (CPI)
● Lines per inch (LPI)
● Maximum print position (MPP)
● Maximum page length (MPL) (See Note)
● Language
● Print quality
● Alarm (Enabled/Disabled)
● Graphics and Bar Code mode
● Left margin
● Emulation mode
Note: An MPL setting that results in a page length less than 762 mm (3 in.) causes a throughput
reduction. A maximum reduction of about 50 percent occurs at an MPL setting of one line per page.
The application program can override any of the parameter values, except for turning the alarm on or off
changing the address selection, changing the emulation determines what parameter value the printer uses:
1. The printer uses the program specified value.
2. If no program command has specified the value, the printer uses the current parameter value.

Command Format
All the printer commands use the following format:
Length

Command

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

The following chart shows the purpose of each field:
Byte
0-1
2-3

Field
Length
Command

Description
Total Command Length, Including the Length Bytes
Command Type

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

116

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Byte
4

5-6
7-n

PTX‐S828

Field
Flag

Description
Bit 0
0 = Acknowledge Response Not Required
1 = Acknowledge Response Required
Bit 1
0 = Correlation ID Not Included
1 = Correlation ID Included
Bit 2
0 = Acknowledge Reply Response is Complete
1 = Second Buffer of XOH - OPC Reply Required
Bit 3 - 6
Reserved (Always Zero)
Bit 7
0 = Persistent NACK is inactive
1 = Persistent NACK
Correlation ID Identifier Name (Valid Only if Byte 4, Bit 1 Is On)
Data
Specific Subcommands, Operands, Parameters, and Data Fields as Appropriate for
the Given Command

Notes:
1. Bit numbering follows the EBCDIC convention with bit zero being the most significant bit.
2. If the Correlation ID field is not present (byte 4, bit 1 is zero), the data field starts at byte 5 instead of
byte 7.
3. Both positive or negative values fitting in the data fields are allowable. Negative values are in
twos-complement form.
4. Some bits or bytes in the data fields are Reserved. The printer does not always check the contents of
these fields. However, Printronix recommends that such fields equal the specified value (if one exists) or
zero.
5. The printer will not detect a condition where the specified command length (bytes 0 through 1)
exceeds the actual number of bytes received. If this occurs, the printer will not process the command
until the printer receives the specified number of bytes.
6. If the host wants to request the second buffer, the request must be the next command following the
request for the first buffer of an acknowledgment. However, it is not required that the host request the
second buffer of an acknowledgment.

Supported IPDS Command Codes
Command
SHS
STM
NOP
LSS
XOH
XOA
BP
EP
LCC
LPD

Hex Code
D697
D6E4
D603
D61E
D68F
D633
D6AF
D6BF
D69F
D6CF

Description
Set Home State
Sense Type and Model
No Operation
Load Symbol Set
Execute Order Home State
Execute Order Any State
Begin Page
End Page
Load Copy Control
Logical Page Descriptor

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

117

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Command
LPP
WBCC
WBC
WGC
WG
WIC
WI
WT
BO
DO
IO
BPS
DPS
IPS
LE
LFE
DF
END

Hex Code
D66D
D680
D681
D684
D685
D63D
D64D
D62D
D6DF
D6EF
D67D
D65F
D66F
D67F
D61D
D63F
D64F
D65D

PTX‐S828
Description
Logical Page Position
Write Bar Code Control
Write Bar Code
Write Graphics Control
Write Graphics
Write Image Control
Write Image
Write Text
Begin Overlay
Deactivate Overlay
Include Overlay
Begin Page Segment
Deactivate Page Segment
Include Page Segment
Load Equivalence
Load Font Equivalence
Deactivate Font
End

Command Function Sets
Function sets divide the printer commands into various categories. Each function set provides all the
necessary controls for its functional area. These function sets are:
● Device Control function set
● Text function set
● Image function set
● Graphics function set
● Bar Code function set
● Overlay function set
● Page Segment function set
● Loaded Font function set.

Device Control Function Set Commands
The Device Control function set contains the commands the printer uses to set up the page, communicate
device controls, and manage the Acknowledge protocol. The following commands are the device control
function set:
Command
NOP
STM
SHS
ACK
LFE
LCC

Hex
D603
D6E4
D697
D6FF
D63F
D69F

Code Description
No Operation
Sense Type and Model
Set Home State
Acknowledge Reply
Load Font Equivalence
Load Copy Control

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

118

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Command
LPP
LPD
BP
DF
EP
END
XOH
XOA

PTX‐S828

Hex Code
D66D
D6CF
D6AF
D64F
D6BF
D65D
D68F
D633

Description
Logical Page Position
Logical Page Descriptor
Begin Page
Deactivate Font
End Page
End
Execute Order Home State
Execute Order Any State

The following pages describe the device control function set commands in detail.

No Operation (NOP)
Length

D603

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

An NOP command is valid in any printer state. The printer does not perform any operation as a result of
receiving this command. The printer ignores any data in this command.

Sense Type and Model (STM)
Length

D6E4

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

This command is valid in any state. The Sense Type and Model command requests the printer to respond
with device dependent information, which identifies the printer and the function it supports. The printer
returns this information to the host application program in the Special Data (SD) portion of the
Acknowledge Reply to the STM command.

Acknowledge Reply for Sense Type and Model
Length

D6FF

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

The format of the data field returned with the Acknowledge Reply is: acknowledgment type, page/copy
counters, and 6 bytes of general information, followed by a sequence of function set vectors identifying the
functions supported by this printer. The following chart shows the Data field:
Decimal
0
1-4
5
6-7
8
9-10
11-40
41-54
55-66

Hex
0
1-4
5
6-7
8
9-A
B-28
29-36
37-42

Description
01 (Acknowledgment Type)
Page/Copy Counters
FF (System/370™ Convention)
Printer Product Number 4247 (or 4230 or 4224 if printer is in emulation mode)
Printer Model Number (see note)
0000 (Reserved)
Device Control Function Set Vector
Text Function Set Vector
Image Function Set Vector

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

119

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
67-78
79-84
85-92
93-98
99-110

Hex
43-4E
4F-54
55-5C
5D-62
63-6E

PTX‐S828
Description
Graphics Function Set Vector
Page Segment Function Set Vector
Overlay Function Set Vector
Loaded Font Function Set Vector
Bar Code Function Set Vector

Note: The format for byte 8, the printer model number, is “03 - Ethernet Host Interface”
The function set vectors contain information relating to each specific command function set. The format of
each function set vector group follows:

Device Control Function Set Vector
Decimal
11-12
13-14
15-16
17-18
19-20
21-22
23-24
25-26
27-28
29-30
31-32
33-34
35-36
37-38
39-40

Hex
B-C
D-E
F-10
11-12
13-14
15-16
17-18
19-1A
1B-1C
1D-1E
1F-20
21-22
23-24
25-26
27-28

Value
001E
C4C3
FF10
8010
80F2
80F4
80F6
80F8
9005
9007
900D
9015
9017
F001
FF02

Description
Device Control Function Set Identifier
DC/1 Level Identifier
XOA, Activate Printer Alarm
XOA, Discard Buffered Data
XOA, Request Resource List
XOA, Exception Handling
XOA, Print Quality Control
XOH, Erase Print Data
XOH, Erase Font Data
XOH, Stack Received Pages
XOH, Select Input Media Source
XOH, Set Media Size
XOH, DSC Mode Persistent NACK Handling Supported
Three Byte Sense Data Supported

Text Function Set Vector
Decimal
41-42
43-44
45-46
47-48
49-50

Hex
29-2A
2B-2C
2D-2E
2F-30
31-32

51-52
53-54

33-34
35-36

Value
000E
D7E3
FF20
1001
4020
(see note 1)
4000
(see note 2)
5041
1000

Description
Vector Length
Composed Text Function Set Identifier
PT/2 Level Identifier
Unordered Text Supported
Limited Simulated Color Supported (see note 3)

Text Orientation (2 for NLS)
Optimum Performance if Text Data in Ordered Page

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

120

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Notes:
1. 4247 native mode.
2. 4224 and 4230 emulation mode.
3. For Limited Simulated Color support, all valid but unsupported color values for text data are accepted
and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of unsupported color exceptions. In
the S828 Printer, simulation of Color of Medium is done by printing in Color of Medium, except where
not possible because of different resolutions when text overlays graphics, image, or bar code. For
actual colors, all valid colors not listed in the above table are simulated in the S828 Printer by printing
in black.

Image Function Set Vector
Decimal Hex Value Description
55-56 37-38 000C Vector Length
57-58 39-3A C9D4 Image Function Set Identifier
59-60 3B-3C FF10 IM/1 Level Identifier
61-62 3D-3E 1001 Unordered Image Blocks Supported
63-64 3F-40 4022 Limited Simulated Color and Color of Medium Supported
65-66 41-42 1000 Optimum Performance if Image Blocks in Ordered Page

Graphics Function Set Vector
Decimal Hex Value Description
67-68 43-44 000C Vector Length
69-70 45-46 E5C7 Graphics Function Set Identifier
71-72 47-48 FF20 GR/2 Level Identifier
73-74 49-4A 1001 Unordered Graphics Blocks Supported
75-76 4B-4C 4022 Limited Simulated Color and Color of Medium Supported
77-78 4D-4E A080 Zero Degree (°) Orientation Supported

Page Segment Function Set Vector
Decimal Hex Value Description
79-80 4F-50 0006 Vector Length
81-82 51-52 D7E2 Page Segment Function Set Identifier
83-84 53-54 FF10 Page Segment Function Set Level Identifier

Overlay Function Set Vector
Decimal Hex Value Description
85-86 55-56 0008 Vector Length
87-88 57-58 D6D3 Overlay Function Set Identifier
89-90 59-5A FF10 OL/1 Level Identifier
91-92 5B-5C 1505 5 Levels of Nested Overlays in Overlay State

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

121

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Loaded Font Function Set Vector
Decimal
93-94
95-96
97-98

Hex
5D-5E
5F-60
61-62

Value
0006
C3C6
FF20

Description
Vector Length
Loaded Font Function Set Identifier
Symbol Sets

Bar Code Function Set Vector
Decimal
99-100
101-102
103-104
105-106
107-108

Hex
63-64
65-66
67-68
69-6A
6B-6C

109-110

6D-6E

Value
000C
C2C3
FF10
1001
4022
(see note 1)
4002
(see note 2)
A0C0

Description
Vector Length
Bar Code Function Set Identifier
BC/1 Level Identifier
Unordered Bar Code Blocks Supported
Limited Simulated Color and Color of Medium Supported (see
note 3)

0°, 90° Orientation Supported

Set Home State (SHS)
Length

D697

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

This command is valid in any state. When the printer receives the Set Home State command, the current
page ends, all buffered data prints, and the printer returns to the home state. If the printer receives this
command while already in the home state, the printer treats this command as a No Operation command.

Acknowledge Reply (ACK)
Length

D6FF

Data

D6FF

Correlation ID (Optional)

or
Length

Data

The printer uses the Acknowledge Reply to return device status, sense information, and any additionally
requested information back to the host application program. The application program uses the
Acknowledge data to maintain control of the printing application and to begin error recovery actions when
necessary. The printer sends an acknowledgment:

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

122

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

● Whenever the acknowledgment required bit in the flag byte is on
● Whenever the printer detects a command stream error or device error and a negative response
must be sent.
A negative response has priority over a positive response.
If the printer can identify the command and the command has a correlation ID, the Acknowledge Reply
contains a correlation ID that matches the command.
The maximum length of this command is 255 bytes. If there is a five-byte command header (no correlation
ID present), the data field can be up to 250 bytes long. If a correlation ID is present in the header, the
maximum data field length is 248 bytes. The Acknowledge Reply data field contains the acknowledgment
type, page/copy counters, and a Special Data (SD) area. The printer loads the Special Data area with the
appropriate data when one of the following occurs:
1. The printer receives one of the following information request commands:
● Sense Type and Model
● Obtain Printer Characteristics
● Request Resource List.
2. An error occurs. Under this condition, the printer loads the special data area with the sense bytes and
sends a negative acknowledgment (NACK) to the host.
The format of the Acknowledge Reply data field follows:
Decimal
0

1-4
5-n

Hex
0

Value
00
01
04
06
80
XX...XX
XX...XX

1-4
5-n

Description
Acknowledgement Type
Positive - No Special Data (SD)
Positive - Sense Type/Model (STM) Data in SD
Positive - Request Resource List (RRL) in SD
Positive - Obtain Printer Characteristics (OPC) in SD
Negative - Sense Bytes in SD

Load Font Equivalence (LFE)
Length

D63F

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

The Load Font Equivalence command maps font identifiers. The fonts do not have to exist in the printer
when the printer receives this command.
In the home state, this command creates a new font equivalence record that completely replaces the
current LFE record. In the page state:
● The font equivalence entries in this command add to the current LFE entries, or
● If identical local font identifiers (byte 1) exist, this command overlays the current LFE entries.
In the page segment or overlay state, a received LFE is stored as part of the page segment or overlay,
and it does not process until the Include Page Segment or Include Overlay command is received.
The font equivalences for a given page are those that are in effect when the Begin Page command
processes plus those added in the page state. There is a maximum of 20 different loaded font ID/print

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

123

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

quality combinations defined in home or page state. Page segments use the font equivalence tables active
at the time the Include Page Segment command processes. In addition, the LFEs that were stored as part
of the page segment add to the font equivalence tables during the include page segment process up to a
maximum of 20 loaded font ID/print quality combinations.
Each Begin Overlay command starts the overlay with the loaded font IDs currently defined and will add its
LFE entries during the overlay’s definition up to a maximum of 20 loaded font ID/print quality combinations
total. On a logical page, the sum of each included overlay’s number of loaded font ID/print quality
combinations (whether included through Include Overlay or through Load Copy Control commands) added
to the number of loaded font ID/print quality combinations on the logical page cannot exceed 58.
Each font equivalence entry is 16 bytes, in the following format:
Decimal
0

Hex
0

1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8

9-10

9-A

11-12
13
14

B-C
D
E

Value
00-FE
FF
0001 - 7EFF
0000
XXXX
FFFF
XXXX
FFFF
0000
00
Bit 0
Bit 1-2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
00

Description
Local Font ID
Reserved (4248 mode) (See Note 4)
Font Host Assigned ID (See Note 3)
Font Inline Sequence (Ignored)
Reserved
Code Page ID (See Code Page ID Chart)
Use the Printer Defined Default Code Page ID
Font (Style) ID (See Font ID Chart)
Use the Printer Defined Default Font
Reserved
Reserved
Font Attributes
Font Is Present in Printer (See Notes 1 and 2)
Reserved
Double High (See Notes 5 and 6)
Italicized Print (See Note 6)
Double Strike
Bold
Double Wide
Reserved (See Note 2)

Notes:
1. If the Font Present in Printer bit is on, this indicates to the printer that the font has previously been
downloaded or is permanently resident. If this bit is off, this indicates to the printer that the font is not
present in the printer and will, presumably, be downloaded (by an LSS command) prior to selection for
printing.
2. Additional font equivalence entries, each 16 bytes long, can follow this entry, using the same format.
No more than 20 different loaded font ID/print quality combinations can be active at a given time.
3. Use the same Loaded Font ID when using the same Font ID and Code Page ID for several Local IDs.
This saves storage space and font allocation time in the printer.
4. Local ID byte 0 may use any value 1 to FE. A value of FF is supported if the printer is in 4224
Emulation Mode for compatibility, but is not recommended. See “Set Character Set” , “Logical Page
Descriptor (LPD)”, and “Printer Initialization and Preparation Sequence” for more information regarding Local
IDs equal to FF.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

124

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

5. A double high font can be printed only on a page that is unordered. See “Logical Page Descriptor (LPD)”
for more information.
6. A font cannot be both double high and italicized.

Code Page ID Values
Hex Value
0025
0100
0104
0111
0112
0113
0115
0116
0118
0119
011A
011C
011D
011E
011F
0120
0121
0122
0125
0129
0136
0462
1149

Code Page
USA/Canada
International Set 1
Canadian French
Austria/Germany
Belgium
Brazil
Denmark/Norway
Finland/Sweden
Italy
Japan (English)
Portugal
Spain/Latin America
United Kingdom
Austria/Germany (Alternate)
Denmark/Norway (Alternate)
Finland/Sweden (Alternate)
Spain (Alternate)
Japan/Katakana
APL (4224 Compatibility)
France
APL
Estonian
euro 924

Hex Value
01A4
01A7
01A8
01B5
01F4
0323
033F
0341
0346
0366
0367
036B
0373
037A
037C
037D
03EA
0401
0402
0449
0458
0154

Code Page
Arabic
Greek
Hebrew
PC Character Sets 1 and 2
International Set 1
Hebrew (old)
Portugal (Alternate)
Korean
Thai
Latin 2/ROECE
Icelandic
Greek (Old)
Cyrillic (Old)
Yugoslav
OCR-A (NLQ Only)
OCR-B NLQ Only)
DCF Compatibility
Cyrillic Multilingual
Turkish
Farsi
Baltic Multilingual
OCR (4224 Compatibility) NLQ only

Font ID Values
Hex Value
001A

Font ID
10 CPI, Gothic (Fast Draft and DP Quality)

Hex Value
00A0

000B

10 CPI, Courier (DP Text and NLQ)

00DE

0013

10 CPI, OCR-A (NLQ)

00DF

0003

10 CPI, OCR-B (NLQ)

0190

0055

12 CPI, Courier (DP Text and NLQ)

0057

Font ID
Proportional spacing, Gothic
(DP Text and NLQ)
15 CPI, Gothic (Fast Draft
and DP Quality)
15 CPI Courier (DP Text
and NLQ)
16.7 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft
and DP Quality)
12 CPI, Gothic (Fast Draft
and DP Quality)

Notes:
1. The Graphic Character Set Global (GCSGID) portion of the Global Font ID is ignored by the printer.
2. All combinations of CPGID and FGID are valid with the following exceptions:
● OCR-A Code Page and FGID 0013 are only valid in combination together.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

125

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

● OCR-B Code Page and FGID 0003 are only valid in combination together.
● The following Code Pages are not available with FGID X'00A0' (PSM)
– Code Page 290 Katakana
– Code Page 293 APL (4224)
– Code Page 310 APL
– Code Page 420 Arabic
– Code Page 833 Korean
– Code Page 838 Thai
– Code Page 880 Cyrillic (Old)
– Code Page 1002 DCF Compatibility
– Code Page 1025 Cyrillic Multilingual
– Code Page 1097 Farsi

Load Copy Control (LCC)
Length

D69F

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

The Load Copy Control command controls the production of output from subsequently received input
logical pages. The LCC command is only valid while the printer is in the home state. This command
remains in effect until the printer receives the next LCC.
The format of the data field (DATA) for this command is:
Decimal
0
1
2-n

Hex
0
1
2-n

Value
02-24
01
XXXX

Description
Copy Subgroup Count (See Note 1)
Number of Copies
Copy Modification (See Description)
C100 = Simplex
D101 - D1FF = Suppression ID
E101 - E1FE = Overlay ID

Notes:
1. Group Count is the number of bytes in this group definition entry. Valid ranges are from 2 to 36 (X'02'
to X'24') in units of 2.
2. Subsequent LCC commands nullify previous Overlay IDs or Suppression IDs from previous LCC
commands.
Copy Modification is an optional modification keyword list made up of two byte controls:
● The first byte is the keyword.
● The second byte is the associated parameter for this keyword.
Valid values for copy modification are:
● C100 - Simplex Printing
● D101 to D1FF - Suppression ID
● E101 to E1FE - Overlay ID.
Simplex Printing is printing on only one side of the document. This is the only type of printing the S828
Printer can perform.
Suppression ID allows the later suppression of text data. The first byte of the keyword, D1, specifies this
keyword as suppression. The second byte of the keyword specifies a suppression identifier. Valid
suppression ID values are 01 to FF. Print suppression occurs as follows:

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

126

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

1. The LCC command specifies one or more suppression ID values. (Each ID must begin with the
keyword - D1.)
2. The printer receives a Begin Suppression control (inside a Write Text command) with a suppression ID
that matches a value in the LCC command.
3. All subsequent text data does not print (text suppression), until the printer receives an End
Suppression control (inside a Write Text command) with the same ID.
4. All text data received after the End Suppression control prints normally.
Overlay ID allows later processing of specified overlays. The first byte of the keyword, E1, specifies this
keyword as overlay. The second byte of the keyword specifies an overlay identifier. Valid overlay ID values
are 01 to FE. An overlay processes as follows:
1. The LCC command specifies one or more overlay ID values. (Each ID must begin with the keyword E1.)
2. The previously stored overlay with this specified identifier merges onto the following page at its
reference corner.

Logical Page Descriptor (LPD)
Length

D6CF

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

This command establishes the print characteristics for the logical page. The Logical Page Descriptor
command is only valid in the home state. See “Set Media Size (SMS)” for physical medium size information.
The format of the data field (DATA) for this command is:
Decimal
0
1
2-3
4-5
6
7-9

Hex
0
1
2-3
4-5
6
7-9

10
11-13

A
B-D

14
15

E
F
Bit 0

Bit 0

Bits 1-7
16-17
18-21
22-23

Bits 1-7
10-11
12-15
16-17

Value
Description
00
Units Base Value Equals 10 in.
00
Reserved
05AD-7FFF X Units Per Unit Base Value
05A0-7FFF Y Units Per Unit Base Value
00
Reserved
000001 – Width of Page in Units
007FFF
(See Note 1)
00
Reserved
000001 Length of Page in Units
007FFF
(See Note 1)
00
Reserved
Ordered
Page Flag (See Note 2)
0
Unordered Page
1
Ordered Page
Reserved
0000
Reserved
00000000 Reserved
0000
Reserved

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

127

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
24-25

Hex
18-19

26-27

1A-1B

29-29
30-31
32-33

1C-1D
1E-1F
20-21

34-35

22-23

36-37
38-39

24-25
26-27

41-42

29-2A

PTX‐S828
Value
0000
5A00
FFFF
2D00
FFFF
0000-FFFF
0000-FFFF
0000-FFFF
FFFF
0000
0000-7FFF
0000
0000-7FFF
FFFF
00-FE
FF
0000
0008
FF00
FF07
FFFF

Description
I-Axis Orientation of 0 Degrees
I-Axis Orientation of 180 Degrees (See Note 5)
Printer Default (0 Degrees) (See Note 3)
B-Axis Orientation of 90 Degrees
Printer Default (90 Degrees)
Initial I Displacement in Units (See Note 4)
Initial B Displacement in Units
Initial Inline Margin in Units
Printer Default (Use Initialization Value) (See Note 4)
Intercharacter Increment
Printer Default (Use Initialization Value)
Reserved
Baseline Increment
Printer Default (Use Initialization Value)
Local Font ID
Printer Default (Use Initialization Value)
Printer Default (Black)
Black
Printer Default (Black)
Printer Default (Black)
Printer Default (Black)

Notes:
1. The LPD command accepts logical page values from 0001 to 7FFF for this parameter. However,
attempts to print outside the intersection of the physical medium (as defined by the Set Media Size
command) and the logical page result in an error.
2. If the Ordered Page Flag is on, this indicates to the printer that subsequent data is in order and can
print as it is received. If page data is unordered, printing is deferred (buffered), because the printer
must place the received data in the proper sequence.
3. The high-order 9 bits of the two byte fields 18-19 and 1A-1B are interpreted as a 9-bit binary value that
describes the orientation of the X and Y axes.
4. If bytes 1C-1D and bytes 20-21 are all 0, each line begins at the leftmost print position for 0, 90
orientation and rightmost print position for 180, 90 orientation.
5. The S828 Printer can print right-to-left by selecting a 180, 90 degree orientation within the Load Page
Descriptor command or within the Set Text Orientation control sequence. The S828 Printer forces an
inline sequence of 180 degrees for the default font to maintain upright printing when right-to-left
printing is selected.
Figure 12 shows how the Logical Page Descriptor command defines the logical page.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

128

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 12. Using the Load Page Descriptor Command to Specify the Logical Page

Logical Page Position (LPP)
Length

D66D

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

This command positions the upper left corner of the logical page (defined by the Logical Page Descriptor
control) with respect to the physical medium. The Logical Page Position command is only valid in the
home state.
Figure 13 shows the LPP command positioning the logical page on the physical medium.

Figure 13. Using the Logical Page Position Command to Position
The physical medium dimensions do not change. The X and Y coordinates of the LPP command specify
the location of the Logical Page Reference Corner relative to the corresponding corner of the physical
medium. These coordinates are expressed in terms of the units in effect at the time the LPP command is
received.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

129

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Only positive values are valid for the data field. The format of the data field (DATA) for this command is:
Decimal
0
1-3
4
5-7
8-9

Hex
0
1-3
4
5-7
8-9

Value
00
000000-007FFF
00
000000-007FFF
0000

Description
Reserved
X Displacement
Reserved
Y Displacement
Reserved

Deactivate Font (DF)
Length

D64F

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

The Deactivate Font command provides a means for the control unit to delete one or more fonts from the
printer.

End Page (EP)
Length

D6BF

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

This command causes the printer to return to the home state from the page, page segment, or overlay
state. If the printer is in the page state, the printer completes any deferred printing for the current page
and advances the forms to the top of the next page. Zero or more bytes of data may be transmitted with
this command but are ignored.

End (END)
Length

D65D

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

The End command is the ending control for a graphics block, image block, or bar code block state. This
command completes a series of write image, write graphics, or write bar code commands. This command
does not transmit any data. At the completion of this command, the printer leaves the block state and
returns to the page, overlay, or page segment state.

Execute Order Home State (XOH)
Length

D68D

Subcommand

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

Subcommand Data

The Execute Order Home State command identifies a set of subcommands (orders) for formatting physical
mediums of data, printing groups of physical mediums, and managing the fonts, page segments, and
overlays. This command is only valid while the printer is in the home state.
The data field contains a two byte order, called the subcommand, and a subcommand data field. There is
only one subcommand for a single XOH command. The subcommand data field contains parameters for
that order.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

130

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

The valid orders for the XOH command for the S828 Printer are:
Order
0100
0500
0700
0D00
1500
1700
F300

Description
Print Buffered Data (PBD)
Erase Residual Print Data (ERPD)
Erase Residual Font Data (ERFD)
Stack Received Pages (SRP)
Select Input Media Source (SIMS)
Set Media Size (SMS)
Obtain Printer Characteristics (OPC)

Print Buffered Data (PBD)
This subcommand causes the printer to print all buffered data pages prior to sending the Acknowledgment
Reply, if requested. The print buffer clears at the completion of this command.

Erase Residual Print Data (ERPD)
This is a data security and privacy order. This order causes the printer to first complete a Print Buffered
Data order, then delete all page segments, overlays, and buffered page data (text, image, graphics, and
bar codes) from the printer storage.

Erase Residual Font Data (ERFD)
This is a data security and privacy order. This order causes the printer to first complete a Print Buffered
Data order, then delete all font information from the printer storage.

Stack Received Pages (SRP)
This command is a synchronizing command. It is accepted by the S828 Printer, but it is functionally a
no-op because of the simple paper path.

Select Input Media Source (SIMS)
The Select Input Media Source (SIMS) subcommand selects an input media source ID and indirectly
selects the input for subsequent sheets. This subcommand applies to the sheet that the next received
page is printed on.
The size of the input media can be specified explicitly by the Set Media Size command or implicitly by the
assumptions the printer makes about the size of the media in the input media source selected by this
subcommand.
The set of valid Media Source ID values depend on what paper sources are currently installed. The
following tables give the valid values for the configurations described in each table.
If the printer is in 4247 mode or an emulation mode with one or two tractors installed, valid values are:
Table 7. Front and Rear with no linking
Bytes 0-1
Byte 2

X'1500'
X'00'
X'01'
X'FF'

Select Input Media Source Order Code
Front Paper Source
Rear Paper Source (if configured)
Printer Default Bin

Set Media Size (SMS)
The Set Media Size subcommand specifies the size of the physical medium.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

131

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Refer to your printer's Administrators Manual for information on setting operator media size input.

Figure 14. Using the Set Media Size Command to Specify the Physical Medium
The data field for the Set Media Size subcommand has the following format:
Decimal
0

Hex
0

1-2

3-4

5-6

Value
00
01
5A0-7FFF
1626-7FFF
000A-4A40
FFF
000A-7FFF
FFFF

Description
Unit Base (10 in.)
Unit Base (10 cm.)
Units per Base Value (per 10 in.)
Units per Base Value (per 10 cm)
X-Extent of the Physical Medium in Units
Use Current MPP
Y-Extent of the Physical Medium in Units
Use Current MPL

Obtain Printer Characteristics (OPC)
This subcommand is a host request for information about the current printer environment characteristics.
The printer responds by placing the requested information in the Special Data (SD)area of a subsequent
Acknowledge Reply. The printer reply is a series of self-defining fields describing the printer
characteristics. The OPC data is returned in more than one response buffer. The self-defining fields
contain specific information about the printer characteristics. If the ARQ flag was not set on for the XOH
command containing this order, then this order is equivalent to a No Operation.

Acknowledge Reply for Obtain Printer Characteristics:
Length

D6FF

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

132

Data

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

The following charts describe the self-defining data fields.

Acknowledge Type and Counters:
Decimal
0
1-4

Hex
0
1-4

Value
06
XXXXXXXX

Description
Acknowledgement Type (4 byte)
Page/Copy Counters

Printable Area Self-Defining Field: The page extents are set at initialization time to reflect
the operator panel settings. The Set Media Size command can change the page extents. For 4247 mode
and all emulation modes with one or two tractors installed:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4

5
6
7
8-9
10-11
12-13
14-15
16-17
18-19
20-21
22-23

Hex
0-1
2-3
4

5
6
7
8-9
A-B
C-D
E-F
10-11
12-13
14-15
16-17

Value
0018
0001
00
01
00
00
00
3840
XXXX
XXXX
0000
0000
XXXX
XXXX
XX00
Bit 0
Bit 1,2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7

Description
Length of this Field
Printable Area ID
Media Source ID (See notes)
Front Continuous Forms
Rear Continuous Form
Reserved
00 Unit Base (10 in.)
Reserved
Units per Base Value (Decimal 14400 per 10 in.)
Current Forms X-Extent
Current Forms Y-Extent
Printable Area X-Offset
Printable Area Y-Offset
Printable Area X-Extent (from Page Extent)
Printable Area Y-Extent from Page Extent
Input Media Source Characteristics
0 =No Duplex
01=Continuous Forms
1 =Media Source Available
0 =Reserved (Always 0)
0 =Reserved (Always 0)
0 =Reserved (Always 0)
0 =Reserved (Always 0)

Note: The Printable Area Self-Defining Field is returned once for each installed media source; that is, front
and rear tractor.

Symbol-Set Support Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
0-1
2-3

Hex
0-1
2-3

Value
0046
0002

Description
Length of this field
Symbol Set Support ID

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

133

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
4
5
6
7
8
9
10-11
12-13
14-15
16-17
18-19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26-27
28-29
30-31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38-39
40-41
42-43
44-45
46
47
48
49
50-51
52
53
54
55
56-57
58

Hex
4
5
6
7
8
9
A-B
C-D
E-F
10-11
12-13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A-1B
1C-1D
1E-1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26-27
28-29
2A-2B
2C-2D
2E
2F
30
31
32-33
34
35
36
37
38-39
3A

PTX‐S828
Value
10
01
14
12
00
02
000B
0055
00DF
0013
0003
0C
01
14
09
00
02
000B
0055
00DF
0E
01
A0
09
00
02
001A
0057
00DE
0190
0C
02
00
00
0960
FF
12
00
02
00A0
0C

Description
Length of Self-Defining Parameter
Fixed Box Size Support (Fixed Pitch NLQ)
X-Box Size in Pels (20)
Y-Box Size in Pels (18)
Reserved
Repeating Group Length
10 CPI Courier (NLQ)
12 CPI Courier (NLQ)
15 CPI Courier (NLQ)
10 CPI OCR-A (NLQ)
10 CPI OCR-B (NLQ)
Length of Self Defining Parameter
Fixed Box Size Support (Fixed Pitch DP Text)
X-Box Size in Pels (20)
Y-Box Size in Pels (9)
Reserved
Repeating Group Length
10 CPI Courier (DP Text)
12 CPI Courier (DP Text)
15 CPI Courier (DP Text)
Length of Self Defining Parameter
Fixed Box Size Support (Fixed Pitch DP Text)
X-Box Size in Pels (20)
Y-Box Size in Pels (9)
Reserved
Repeating Group Length
10 CPI Gothic (DP)
12 CPI Gothic (DP)
15 CPI Gothic (DP)
16.7 CPI Gothic (DP)
Length of Self Defining Parameter
Variable Box Size Support (PSM NLQ)
Unit Base (10 in.)
Reserved
Units per Unit Base (2400)
Maximum X-Box Size in Pels (255)
Y-Box Size in Pels (18)
Reserved
Repeating Group Length
PSM Essay (NLQ)
Length of Self-Defining Parameter

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

134

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
59
60
61
62-63
64
65
66
67
67-68

Hex
3B
3C
3D
3E-3F
40
41
42
43
44-45

PTX‐S828
Value
02
00
00
0960
FF
09
00
02
00A0

Description
Variable Box Size Support (PSM DP Text)
Unit Base (10 in.)
Reserved
Units per Unit Base (2400)
Maximum X-Box Size in Pels (255)
Y-Box Size in Pels (9)
Reserved
Repeating Group Length
PSM Essay (DP Text)

Image/Coded-Font Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4
5
6-7
8-9

Hex
0-1
2-3
4
5
6-7
8-9

Value
000A
0003
00
00
05A0
05A0

Description
Length of this field
Image/Coded-Font Resolution ID
Unit Base (10 in.)
Reserved
X Pels per Base Value (Decimal 1440 per 10 in.)
Y Pels per Base Value (Decimal 1440 per 10 in.)

Storage Pools Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4
5
6
7-10
11-14

Hex
0-1
2-3
4
5
6
7-A
B-E

Value
000F
0004
0B
01
00
0006D000
00000000

Description
Length of this field
Storage Pools ID
Length of Self-Defining Parameter
Triplet ID
Storage Pool ID
Size of Storage Pool when empty
Reserved

Foreground Color Support Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4-5

Hex
0-1
2-3
4-5

Value
0006
0005
0008

Description
Length of this field
Foreground Color
Black Ribbon

Installed Features Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4-5

Hex
0-1
2-3
4-5

alue
0006
0006
0B00

Description
Length of this field
Installed Features ID
Continuous Forms Output

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

135

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Available Features Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4-5

Hex
0-1
2-3
4-5

Value
0006
0007
0B00

Description
Length of this field
Available Features
Continuous Forms Output

Resident-Symbol Set Support Self-Defining Field: For Ethernet interfaces:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4
5
6
7
8-9
10-11
12-13
14-15
16-17
18-19
20-21
22-23
24-25
26-27
28-29
30-31
32-33
34-35
36-37
38-39
40-41
42-43
44-45
46-47
48-49
50-51
52-53
54-55

Hex
0-1
2-3
4
5
6
7
8-9
A-B
C-D
E-F
10-11
12-13
14-15
16-17
18-19
1A-1B
1C-1D
1E-1F
20-21
22-23
24-25
26-27
28-29
2A-2B
2C-2D
2E-2F
30-31
32-33
34-35
36-37

Value
00B6
0008
6A
01
56
02
01A7
01A8
01B5
0323
0366
0367
036B
0402
0100
01F4
0025
0104
0111
0112
0113
0115
0116
0118
0119
011A
011C
011D
0129
011E

Description
Length of this field
Resident Symbol Set Support
Length of this field
Code Page Support
Length of Code Page List
Length of CP Repeating Group Entry
CP423 Greek (Old)
CP424 Hebrew (New)
CP437 PC Extended
CP089 Hebrew (Old)
CP870 Latin 2/ROECE
CP871 Icelandic
CP875 Greek (New)
CP1026 Turkish
CP256 International #1
CP500 International #2
CP037 USA/Canada
CP260 Canadian French
CP273 Austrian/German
CP274 Belgian
CP275 Brazilian
CP277 Danish/Norwegian
CP278 Finnish/Swedish
CP280 Italian
CP281 Japanese English
CP282 Portuguese
CP284 Spanish and Spanish-Speaking
CP285 English (UK)
CP297 French (Alternate)
CP286 Austrian/German (Alternate)

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

136

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
56-57
58-59
60-61
62-63
64-65
66-67
68-69
70-71
72-73
74-75
76-77
78-79
80-81
82-83
84-85
86-87
88-89
90-91
92
93
94-95
96-97
98-99
100-101
102-103
104-105
106-107
108-109
110
111
112
113
114-115
116-117
118-119
120-121
122-123
124-125
126-127
128-129
130-131

Hex
38-39
3A-3B
3C-3D
3E-3F
40-41
42-43
44-45
46-47
48-49
4A-4B
4C-4D
4E-4F
50-51
52-53
54-55
56-57
58-59
5A-5B
5C
5D
5E-5F
60-61
62-63
64-65
66-67
68-69
6A-6B
6C-6D
6E
6F
70
71
72-73
74-75
76-77
78-79
7A-7B
7C-7D
7E-7F
80-81
82-83

PTX‐S828
Value
0121
0120
011F
033F
037A
0458
0462
0474
0475
0476
0477
0478
0479
047A
047B
047C
047D
039C
12
02
000B
0055
00DF
001A
0057
00DE
0190
00A0
28
01
16
02
0122
01A4
0346
0370
0401
03EA
0125
0136
0341

Description
CP289 Spanish (Alternate)
CP288 Finnish/Swedish (Alternate)
CP287 Danish/Norwegian (Alternate)
CP831 Portuguese (Alternate)
CP890 Yugoslav
CP1112 Baltic Multilingual
CP1122 Estonian
CP1140 USA/Canada + euro
CP1141 Austrian/German + euro
CP1142 Danish/Norwegian +euro
CP1143 Finnish/Swedish + euro
CP1144 Italian + euro
CP1145 Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro
CP1146 English UK + euro
CP1147 French + euro
CP1148 International 5 / Beligian New + euro
CP1149 Icelandic + euro
CP924 Latin 9 ISO 8859 +euro
Length of Font ID List
Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry
10 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
12 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
15 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
10 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
12 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
15 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
16.7 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
PSM ESSAY (DP Text and NLQ)
Total Length of CP List
CP Support
Length of CP List
Length of CP Repeating Group Entry
CP290 Japanese Katakana
CP420 Arabic
CP838 Thai
CP880 Cyrillic (Old)
CP1025 Cyrillic Multinational
CP1002 DCF Compatibility (Release 2)
CP293 APL (4224 Compatibility)
CP310 APL
CP833 Korean

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

137

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
132-133
134
135
136-137
138-139
140-141
142-143
144-145
146-147
148-149
150
151
152
153
154-155
156
157
158-159
160-161
162
163
164
165
166-167
168
169
170-171
172
173
174
175
176-177
178
179
180-181

Hex
84-85
86
87
88-89
8A-8B
8C-8D
8E-8F
90-91
92-93
94-95
96
97
98
99
9A-9B
9C
9D
9E-9F
A0-A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6-A7
A8
A9
AA-AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0-B1
B2
B3
B4-B5

PTX‐S828
Value
0449
10
02
000B
0055
00DF
001A
0057
00DE
0190
0C
01
04
02
0154
06
02
0013
0003
0A
01
04
02
037C
04
01
0013
0A
01
04
02
037D
04
02
0003

Description
CP1097 Farsi
Length of Font ID List
Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry
10 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
12 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
15 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
10 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
12 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
15 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
16.7 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
Total Length of CP List
CP Support
Length of CP List
Length of CP Repeating Group Entry
CP 340,OCR (4224 compatibility)
Length of Font ID List
Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry
OCR-B Quality
OCR-A Quality
Total Length of CP List
CP Support
Length of CP List
Length of CP Repeating Group Entry
CP 892,OCR-A
Length of Font ID List
Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry
OCR-A Quality
Total Length of CP List
CP Support
Length of CP List
Length of CP Repeating Group Entry
CP 893,OCR-B
Length of Font ID List
Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry
OCR-B Quality

Print Quality Support Self-Defining Field: These values apply if Host Fast Draft is
disabled in the printer configuration menu:

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

138

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4
5
6

Hex
0-1
2-3
4
5
6

PTX‐S828
Value
0007
0009
01
56
AB

Description
Length of this field
Print Quality ID
DP Quality
DP Text Quality
NLQ

These values apply if Host Fast Draft is enabled in the printer configuration menu:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4
5
6
7

Hex
0-1
2-3
4
5
6
7

Value
0008
0009
01
2B
56
AB

Description
Length of this field
Print Quality ID
Fast Draft Quality
DP Quality
DP Text Quality
NLQ

XOA RRL RT & RIDF Support Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4-5

Hex
0-1
2-3
4-5

Value
0006
000A
FF00

Description
Length
RRL Resource Type Self Defining Field
All Resources as Host Assigned Resource ID

Common Bar Code Type Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4
5
6

Hex
0-1
2-3
4
5
61

Value
0007
000E
0D
11
8

Description
Length of this field
RRL Resource Type Self Defining Field
Codabar Modifier Byte Options X'01' and X'02'
Code 128 Modifier Byte Options X'02'
POSTNET Modifier Byte Options X'00' - X'03'

Product Identifier Self-Defining Field: If the printer is in 4247 native or 4230 Emulation
Mode:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4
5-6
7-12
13-15
16-18

Hex
0-1
2-3
4
5-6
7-C
D-F
10-12

Value
Description
003C
Length
0013
Product Identifier
38
Length of this ID
0001
4247 with Page Counter Fix ID
F0F0F4F2F4F7 Device Type
E5F0F3
Model Number
C9C2D4
Manufacturer

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

139

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
19-20
21-32
33-34
35-43
44-59

Hex
13-14
15-20
21-22
23-2B
2C-3B

PTX‐S828
Value
F0F1
XX...XX
0000
XX...XX
XX...XX

Description
Plant of Manufacture
Sequence Number
Tag
EC Level
Device Specific

If the printer is in 4224 emulation mode:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4
5-6
7
8-9
10-15
16-18
19-21
22-23
24-35
36-37
38-46
47-62

Hex
0-1
2-3
4
5-6
7
8-9
A-F
10-12
13-15
16-17
18-23
24-25
26-2E
2F-3E

Value
Description
003F
Length
0013
Product Identifier
03
Length of this Field
0000
4224 with Page Counter Fix ID
38
Length of this Field
0001
4224 Product Identifier Parameter ID
F0F0F4F2F4F7 Device Type
E5F0F3
Model Number
C9C2D4
Manufacturer
F0F1
Plant of Manufacture
XX...XX
Sequence Number
0000
Tag
XX...XX
EC Level
XX...XX
Device Specific

Execute Order Any State (XOA)
Length

D633

Subcommand

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

Subcommand Data

The Execute Order Any State command identifies a set of subcommands (orders) that take effect
immediately, regardless of the current printer command state. This command is valid in any state.
Each data field contains a two byte order (subcommand), followed by a zero or more bytes of parameters
for that order. There is only one subcommand for a single XOA command.
The valid orders for the XOA command are:
Order
1000
F200
F400
F600

Description
Activate Printer Alarm (APA)
Discard Buffered Data (DBD)
Request Resource List (RRL)
Exception Handling Control (EHC)

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

140

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Order Description
F800 Print Quality Control (PQC)

Activate Printer Alarm (APA)
The XOA Activate Printer Alarm (APA) subcommand signals the printer to activate the alarm mechanism.
As long as the printers alarm function is enabled, the alarm will be turned on in response to this command.
It will remain on until Stop is pressed.
After processing this command, the printer continues to process the incoming IPDS data stream. If
synchronization of actions is desired, the application must ensure if the appropriate commands are sent to
the printer.

Discard Buffered Data (DBD)
The XOA Discard Buffered Data (DBD) subcommand deletes all buffered data from the printer storage and
returns the printer to home state. Any data currently being received is deleted. If this order is syntactically
correct, no exceptions can result from its execution. The DBD order does not affect completely received
resources, such as fonts, page segments, and overlays; however, if the printer is in any resource state, the
printer deletes the partial resource before returning to home state. If the printer is in Ordered Page Mode,
the subcommand prints all buffered data to the point of the command, does a page eject, and returns to
Home State.
The DBD order is a synchronizing command. Any command following a synchronizing command is not
processed until all preceding commands have been completely processed. Also, the ACK of the DBD order
is not returned until DBD processing is complete.

Request Resource List (RRL)
This subcommand is a request from the host application program for the printer to identify resources
currently allocated in the printer. The printer responds by placing the requested information in the Special
Data (SD) area of a subsequent Acknowledge Reply.
The subcommand and subcommand data field has the following format:
Decimal
0-1
2
3-4
5
6

Hex
0-1
2
3-4
5
6

Value
F400
FF
XXXX
03 - FF

01
04
05
FF
00

8-9

XXXX

Description
RRL Order Code
Device Defined Ordering
Entry Continuation Indicator (See Note 1)
Entry Length
Resource Type Requested (See Note 2)
Single Byte Fonts
Page Segments
Overlays
All Resources
Resource ID Format
Host-Assigned Resource ID
Resource ID (See Note 2)

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

141

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Notes:
1. If the entire resource list does not fit in the Special Data Area of the Acknowledge Reply, continuation is
necessary which the S828 Printer will indicate using the Acknowledgement Continuation bit in the flag byte of
the Acknowledge Reply. If the host requests Acknowledgement Continuation by sending a command with
ARQ bit and the Continuation bit set, the printer will complete the RRL reply using Acknowledgement
Continuation. If the host requests RRL continuation (by sending an RRL command with nonzero values in
bytes 3 and 4), the printer will use continuation, the printer will default to RRL continuation.
2. For overlays, segments, and symbol sets, this is their two byte ID. This field is omitted when the resource
type equals All.

Acknowledge Reply for Request Resource List
Length

D6FF

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

The format of the resource list returned with the Acknowledge Reply is as follows:
Decimal
0
1

Hex
0
1

Value
FF
01
06
00

5-6

01
04
05
FF
01

00
01
XXXX

Description
Unordered List
End of List
Length of this Entry
Resource Type
Resource Size equals 0. The queried Resource Type, ID
Format, or ID is unknown, unsupported, or inconsistent.
Deletable Single Byte Coded Font
Deletable Overlays
Resource Size equals 0
The List Query requested is not supported.
Resource ID Format (RIDF)
Host-Assigned Resource ID
Resource Size Indicator
Resource Not Present
Resource Present
Resource ID

Note: Bytes 2 - 6 repeat for each resource type.

Exception Handling Control (EHC)
An exception (error) exists when the printer detects an invalid or unsupported command, control, or
parameter value in the data stream received from the host. The IPDS structure provides Alternate
Exception Action (AEA) when the printer receives a valid parameter value, but the printer does not support
this value. The Exception Handling Control subcommand allows the host control of exception handling by
the printer. This subcommand specifies the action the printer is to take with respect to the reporting and
processing of exception (error) conditions. The format of the EHC subcommand is:
Decimal
0-1

Hex
0-1

Value
F600

Description
EHC Order Code

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

142

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
2
Bit 0

Hex
2
Bit 0

PTX‐S828
Value

Description
Exception Reporting
Undefined Character Check
Do Not Report Exceptions
Report Exceptions
Page Position Check
Do Not Report Exceptions
Report Exceptions
Reserved
All other Errors
Do Not Report Exceptions

Report Exceptions

0
1
Bit 1

Bit 1
0
1

Bit 2-6
Bit 7

3
Bit 0-6
Bit 7

4
Bit 0-5
Bit 6
Bit 7

Bit 2-6
Bit 7

3
Bit 0-6
Bit 7
0
1

Alternate Exception Action
Reserved
Take Alternate Exception Action and Continue
Do Not Take Alternate Exception Action, Proceed per Byte 4

4
Bit 0-5
Bit 6
0
1
Bit 7
0
1

Exception Presentation Processing
Reserved
No Page Continuation
Page Continuation (Skip and Continue Action)
Discard Page
Print to point of exception

Exception Reporting: Byte 2 of the EHC subcommand handles exception reporting. Bits 0, 1, and 7 of
this byte may be set to report or not report exceptions as defined below. If the exception has no Alternate
Exception Action or the printer is told not to take the Alternate Exception Action, the exception is always
reported.
● Bit 0: Report Undefined Character Check
When this bit is set to 1, an undefined data character in a Write Text, Write Graphics, or Write Bar Code
command causes the printer to report an error to the host program. When this bit is set to 0, the printer
does not report Undefined Character Check errors.
● Bit 1: Report Page Position Check
Printing occurs only where the physical medium and the logical page overlap. When bit 1 is set to 1, an
attempt to print outside the overlap of the logical page and the physical medium causes the printer to
report an error. If bit 1 is set to 0, the printer does not report Position Check errors.
● Bits 2-6: Reserved
● Bit 7: Report all other exceptions

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

143

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

If this bit is set to 1, the printer reports all exceptions other than those defined by bits 0-1. If this bit is
set to 0, the printer does not report errors other than those specified above.
If the printer is in home state or the application requests an Acknowledge Reply in an IPDS command, the
printer reports exceptions with a Negative Acknowledge Reply (NACK). If an exception occurs within a
page, overlay, or page segment, the printer reports the NACK instead of sending a positive
acknowledgment of the page, overlay, or page segment.
The first asynchronous NACK is the only one reported, even though other synchronous NACKs may be
detected before the first NACK is reported. If the printer has a pending exception (the exception has
occurred but has not yet been reported), the printer reports the exception when exception handling control
directs.
Alternate Exception Action: Byte 3 of the EHC subcommand controls Alternate Exception Actions.
● Bits 0-6: Reserved
● Bit 7: Alternate Exception Action (AEA) control
This bit defines how printer processing continues when a data stream error occurs.
If the bit is set to 0, the printer continues processing with the Alternate Exception Action. If the error has
no Alternate Exception Action defined, the printer continues as though this bit contained a 1.
If this bit is set to 1 or no AEA is defined, the printer reports the error regardless of the value in the
Exception Reporting byte above. The printer continues processing as defined by the contents of the
Exception Presentation Processing byte below.
Exception Presentation Processing: Byte 4 of the EHC subcommand defines what the printer does
when exceptions occur in any state except home state.
● Bits 0-5: Reserved
● Bit 6: Page Continuation
If bit 6 is 0, the printer does the following:
– Terminates processing of the page, overlay, or page segment data
– Prints as much of the previously processed data as possible
– Enters home state.
If bit 6 is set to 1, the printer ignores bit 7 (Error Page Print) after taking a skip and continue action.
The printer remains in the current state and treats subsequent commands as No Operation (NOP) until
it encounters either the next valid command or a terminating condition.
1. Skip and Continue Action
Skip and Continue Actions are attempts by the printer to skip the remainder of the IPDS block
containing the exception and to print subsequent blocks or text on the page (if any).
The printer treats all subsequent commands other than Any State commands (NOP, SHS, STM, and
XOA) as No Operation (NOP) commands until it encounters either the next valid command or a
terminating condition. The printer remains in page, page segment, or overlay state. If the printer is in
a block state, the End command is the next valid command that returns the printer to page, page
segment, or overlay state. When the next valid command is encountered, the printer begins normal
processing again. The exception that caused the skip and continue action is reported when the end
of the page is reached, when an XOA command sets home state, or when a command with an ARQ
is received. The following conditions determine the next valid command:
– If the exception occurs in a Write Text command, a Load Font Equivalence command, or an
Include Page Segment command, the next valid command is End Page, Set Home State, or
XOA Discard Buffered Data.
– If the exception occurs in a block state, the next valid command is End.
– If the exception occurs in an Any-state command, the next valid command is the command that
follows.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

144

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

– If the exception occurs in any other command, the next valid command is one of the following (if
supported):
- Write Text
- Include Overlay
- Include Page Segment
- Write Text Control
- Write Image Control
- Write Image Control 2
- Write Bar Code Control
- Write Graphics Control
- End Page
- Set Home State
- XOA Discard Buffered Data
- Load Font Equivalence.
If the following terminating conditions occur, the printer returns to home state and reports the
indicated exception:
– An asynchronous exception occurs such that the printer cannot recover without host intervention.
The asynchronous exception is reported and the exception that caused the skip and continue
action is discarded.
– A command is received with the ARQ flag set on. The exception that caused the skip and
continue action is reported.
– A command is received with a length outside the valid IPDS range. The exception that caused
the skip and continue action is reported.
– A command is received that violates the IPDS state diagram. The exception that caused the skip
and continue action is reported.
During skip and continue actions, Any-state commands are treated as follows:
– SHS and XOA-DBD are next valid commands in all cases. They are processed, the skip and
continue action processing is terminated, the exception is reported, and normal command
processing resumes.
– Any-state commands with the ARQ bit set on are terminating conditions. They are not processed;
they terminate skip and continue processing, the exception is reported, and the printer returns to
home state.
– All other Any-state commands are processed as normal. However, subsequent non-Any-state,
non-next valid commands are skipped.
Exceptions detected in included overlays or page segments are treated as though the commands
were received as part of the page.
● Bit 7: Error Page Print
If both bits 6 and 7 are set to 1, bit 7 is ignored. If bit 6 is 0 and bit 7 is 1, the printer prints as much of
the page as possible and returns to home state.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

145

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 1 of 3)

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

146

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 2 of 3)

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

147

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 3 of 3)

Print Quality Control (PQC)
The Print Quality Control subcommand allows the host to specify the desired print quality without changing
fonts (see notes). The quality selection (from the PQC subcommand) specifies the quality for printing text
associated with fonts selected by the Set Coded Font Local (SCFL) command and defined by the Load
Font Equivalence (LFE) command. A PQC specifying a print quality compatible with the desired font
should precede the SCFL command. The PQC has no effect when the default font (defined by the offline
operator panel selection) is in use.
The following bytes contain the print quality selection, as shown:
Byte Value
Bit 0-1 F800
Bit 2
00
01 - 55
56 - AA
AB - FE
FF

Description
PQC Order Code
Reserved
DP
DP Text
NLQ
Depends on Operator Panel setting

Note: Host Fast Draft disabled.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

148

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

The following bytes contain the print quality selection, as shown:
Byte Value
Bit 0-1 F800
Bit 2
01 - 2A
2B - 55
56 - AA
AB - FE
FF

Description
PQC Order Code
Fast Draft Quality
DP
DP Text
NLQ
Depends on Operator Panel setting

Note: S828 only with Host Fast Draft enabled.
For printing multiple-density selections of graphics and bar codes, the following values are valid if bar
code/graphics density is set to computer selected:
Byte Value
Description
Bit 0-1 F800
PQC Order Code
Bit 2
01 - 55
Low-Density Graphics/Bar Codes
56 - FE
High-Density Graphics/High-Contrast Bar Codes
FF
Depends on Operator Panel setting
Notes:
1. A PQC command can result in a font change in order to provide the desired quality level.
2. The printer changes fonts to satisfy quality selections for all supported code pages except OCR (340),
OCR-A (892), or OCR-B (893). It will not change the selected code page to provide a requested quality.

Text Function Set Commands
The text function set contains the commands and data controls for presenting text information on a logical
page, page segment, or overlay area on the physical medium. The following commands are the text
function set:
The following pages describe the text function set commands.

Load Equivalence (LE)
Length

D61D

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

This command permits Begin and End suppression controls imbedded in data stored within the printer to
reference different external values. For example, internal suppression values of 06, 07, and 09 (from a
Begin Suppression control) can map to an external value of 02 from a Load Copy Control command, if the
printer previously has received an appropriate Load Equivalence command. Thus, the printer can use a
single Load Copy Control suppression pair for more than one suppression value (see “Begin Suppression
(BSU)”).

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

149

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

If a Load Copy Control command refers to a suppression identifier that has not been specified as an
external value in an LE command, the identifier (external value) will map to itself. This is the only case
where the identifier will map to itself unless specified.
This mapping remains in effect until the printer receives another Load Equivalence command, at which
time its values will totally replace this mapping.
This command consists of a two-byte parameter followed by a list of 0 to 127 four-byte entries in the
following format:
Decimal
0-1

Hex
0-1

2-3

4-5

Description
Mapping Type - X'0100' Is the Only Valid Value, Indicating Suppression
Equivalence Mapping.
Internal Value - Value of the Stored Parameter that the Begin Suppression and
End Suppression Controls use. Valid Values are from 1 to 255 (X'1' to X'FF').
External Value - Value that the Load Copy Control Command uses. This Is the
Value for Referencing the Internal Value. Valid Values are from 1 to 127 (X'1' to
X'7F').

Notes:
1. Additional entries, each four bytes long, can follow this entry, using the same format as bytes 2
through 5.
2. The mapping of one internal ID to more than one external ID is an error.

Write Text (WT)
Length

D62D

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

Data

One or More Text Controls and Text Characters.
The Write Text command writes text presentation data to the printer. This command is only valid if the
printer is in the overlay, page, or page segment state.
The DATA field in this command can contain one or more text controls and text characters. A text control
begins with the text control escape sequence introducer, 2BD3. The format for this control is:
2BD3

Length

Control

Parameters

The length field of each text control is a one-byte value that gives the number of bytes in the text control.
This length value includes the length field itself but excludes the 2BD3 introducer. Multiple text controls
without intervening character data can chain together. Bit 7 (the least significant, or rightmost bit) of the
control field is the chain bit. If this bit is on, the following text control is chained to the previous control.
That is, chaining allows one escape sequence introducer for multiple text controls. With chaining, the first
text control contains the X'2BD3' introducer, and each subsequent text control starts with its own length
field, followed by its control field and any parameters for that control. The last text control in the chain
must have the chain bit off.
A Write Text command can span to another Write Text command. That is, if a Write Text command ends
after the control sequence has begun (the 2B has been received), and before all of the control sequence
parameters have been received, this Write Text command spans to the next Write Text command.
Spanning also occurs if a Write Text command ends between chained controls. Between the spanned
Write Text commands, only STM, XOA, and NOP commands are valid. All other commands received at
this time result in an error. The printer uses the following controls with the Write Text command:

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

150

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Control
CO (C1)
C2 (C3)
D0 (D1)
C6 (C7)
D2 (D3)
C8 (C9)
D4 (D5)
D8 (D9)
F0 (F1)
F6 (F7)
F2 (F3)

PTX‐S828

Description
Set Inline Margin (SIM)
Set Intercharacter Adjustment (SIA)
Set Baseline Increment (SBI)
Absolute Move Inline (AMI)
Absolute Move Baseline (AMB)
Relative Move Inline (RMI)
Relative Move Baseline (RMB)
Begin Line (BLN)
Set Coded Font Local (SCFL)
Set Text Orientation (STO)
Begin Suppression (BSU)

Control
F4 (F5)
E4 (E5)
E6 (E7)
EE (EF)
DA (DB)
F8 (F9)
C4 (C5)
74 (75)
72 (73)
76 (77)
78 (79)

Description
End Suppression (ESU)
Draw I-Axis Rule (DIR)
Draw B-Axis Rule (DBR)
Repeat String (RPS)
Transparent Data (TRN)
No Operation (NOP)
Set Variable Space Increment (SVI)
Set Text Color (STC)
Overstrike (OVS)
Underscore (USC)
Temporary Baseline Move (TBM)

Note: The controls shown in parenthesis are the text controls with their corresponding chain bit on.

Set Inline Margin (SIM)
2BD3

C0(C1)

P1P2

Description: This control specifies the position of the inline margin in the (I) direction, when the printer
performs a Begin Line command. Receipt of this control does not change the current print position.
Parameters P1P2 form a two-byte value that specifies the margin in units. All values between 0 and
X'7FFF' are valid. A value of X'FFFF' causes the printer to use the value in the LPD command.
Note: Values as large as X'7FFF' are valid but might be off the page.

Set Intercharacter Adjustment (SIA)
2BD3

C2(C3)

P1P2

C2(C3)

P1P2

or
2BD3

Description: This control specifies additional inline adjustment between graphic characters.
Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies an additional increment or decrement in the inline
direction between text characters in units. All values between 0 and X'7FFF' are valid. A value of X'FFFF'
causes the printer to use the value in the LPD command.
Parameter P3 is a direction parameter and is optional. This parameter identifies whether the adjustment is
an increment or a decrement. If P3 has a value of 0 or X'FF', the adjustment is an increment. If P3 has a
value of 1, the adjustment is a decrement. If this parameter is missing, the default is an increment.

Set Baseline Increment (SBI)
2BD3

D0 (D1)

P1P2

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

151

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Description: This control specifies a distance, which the printer adds to the current baseline coordinate
when the printer performs a Begin Line control.
Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the baseline increment in units. All values between
X'8000' and X'7FFF' are valid. A value of X'FFFF' causes the printer to use the value in the LPD
command.

Absolute Move Inline (AMI)
2BD3

04 C6 (C7)

P1P2

Description: This control moves the inline coordinate in the I direction. The move is to an absolute
position on the inline (I) axis.
Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the new inline coordinate in units. All values
between 0 and X'7FFF' are valid.
Notes:
1. Values as large as X'7FFF' are valid but might be off the page.
2. Several Absolute Move Inline controls used in a single line reduce throughput. If possible, replace
Absolute Move Inline controls with spaces, or combine multiple Absolute Move Inline controls into a
single Absolute Move Inline control.

Absolute Move Baseline (AMB)
2BD3

D2 (D3)

P1P2

Description: This control moves the baseline coordinate in the B direction. The move is to an absolute
position on the baseline (B) axis.
Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the new baseline coordinate in units. All values
between 0 and X'7FFF' are valid.
Note: Baseline coordinate values that require a negative baseline displacement in order to print results in
an error if the LPD command specifies ordered printing.

Relative Move Inline (RMI)
2BD3

C8 (C9)

P1P2

Description: This control moves the inline coordinate relative to the current line coordinate position.
Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the displacement value in units. All values between
X'8000' and X'FFFF' are valid. Negative values are in twos-complement form.
Notes:
1. Values as large as X'FFFF' are valid but might be off the page.
2. Several Relative Move Inline controls used in a single line reduce throughput. If possible, replace
Relative Move Inline controls with spaces, or combine multiple Relative Move Inline controls into a
single Relative Move Inline control.

Relative Move Baseline (RMB)
2BD3

D4 (D5)

P1P2

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

152

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Description: This control moves the baseline coordinate relative to the current baseline coordinate
position.
Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the displacement value in units. All values between
X'8000' and X'FFFF' are valid.
Note: Baseline displacement values that require a negative baseline displacement in order to print results
in an error if the LPD command specifies ordered printing.

Begin Line (BLN)
2BD3

D8 (D9)

Description: This control moves the inline and baseline coordinates to the first position on the next line.
The inline margin sets the inline coordinate. The baseline coordinate increases by the value in the Set
Baseline Increment control.

Set Coded Font Local (SCFL)
2BD3

F0 (F1)

Description: This control selects a previously assigned font, pitch, and code page. Load Font Equivalence
commands assign a local font identifier (LFID) to a specified font, pitch, and character set. The SCFL
control then specifies the LFID (in parameter P1) to use for printing. A Print Quality Control subcommand
specifying a print quality that is compatible with the LFID (defined by a previous Load Font Equivalence
command) must precede the SCFL control to provide the desired font and quality selections. Parameter
P1 is the LFID selection. Valid values for this parameter are 01 to X'FF'. A value of X'FF' specifies the LPD
value.

Set Text Orientation (STO)
2BD3

F6 (F7)

P1-P4

Description: This control can be set to print right-to-left by selecting 180, 90 (X'5A00', X'2D00') degree
orientation. The S828 Printer forces an inline sequence of 180 degrees for the default font to maintain
upright printing when right-to-left printing is selected. The only valid values are 0 and 180 degrees for the
inline direction and 90 degrees for the baseline direction. The Logical Page Descriptor command can also
be used to select right-to-left printing.
Parameters P1P2 specify the inline direction and must be a value of X'0000', X'5A00', or X'FFFF'.
Note: If the inline direction is set to 180 degrees, only fonts with 180 degree character rotation can be
used or else error 023F02 is flagged.
X'5A00' is an orientation of 180 degrees used to print in a right-to-left direction. X'FFFF' specifies to use
the inline direction from the LPD command. Parameters P3P4 specify the baseline direction and must be a
value of X'2D00' or X'FFFF'. X'FFFF' specifies to use the baseline direction value from the LPD command.
Refer to the description of the LFE command for supported combinations of LFE character rotation and
STO.

Begin Suppression (BSU)
2BD3

F2 (F3)

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

153

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Description: This control marks the beginning of a string of text that the printer can suppress from the
printed output.
Parameter P1 is a one byte suppression identifier. Valid values are from 1 to X'FF'. An End Suppression
control, with the same suppression identifier, must follow the Begin Suppression control. An error results
when BSU-ESU text controls are not paired properly or have different suppression IDs.
Suppression of the text output occurs only when activated by a Load Copy Control with a matching
suppression ID.
For additional information about suppression, see Suppression ID in the “Load Copy Control (LCC)” on
page 126.

End Suppression (ESU)
2BD3

F4(F5)

Description: This control marks the end of a string of text that the printer can suppress from the printed
output.
Parameter P1 is a one byte suppression identifier. Valid values are from 1 to X'FF'. A string of suppressed
text starts with a Begin Suppression control and ends with an End Suppression control having the same
suppression identifier.

Draw I-Axis Rule (DIR)
2BD3

04 or 07

E4(E5)

P1-P5

Description: This control specifies the dimensions of a horizontal rule (line) extending from the current
print position. The current position does not change as a result of this control. The rule is not drawn until
the current position advances vertically (as a result of other controls).
Parameters P1P2 specify the length of the rule in the inline direction in units. Valid values are from X'8000'
to X'7FFF'. Negative values are in twos-complement form.
Parameters P3, P4, and P5 are optional, as a group. That is, either all three parameters are omitted or all
three must be included together. Parameters P3P4 specify the width of the rule in the baseline direction in
units. Valid values are from X'8000' to X'7FFF'. Also valid is X'FFFF'’ which selects the printer default of 5
pels wide.
Parameter P5 is ignored by the S828 Printer.

Draw B-Axis Rule (DBR)
2BD3

04 or 07

E6(E7)

P1-P5

Description: This control specifies the dimensions of a vertical rule (line) extending from the current print
position. The current position does not change as a result of this control. The rule is not drawn until the
current position advances vertically (as a result of other controls).
Parameters P1P2 specify the length of the rule in the baseline direction in units. Valid values are from
X'8000' to X'7FFF'. Parameters P3, P4, and P5 are optional, as a group. That is, either all three
parameters are omitted or all three must be included together.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

154

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Parameters P3P4 specify the width of the rule in the inline direction in units. Valid values are from X'8000'
to X'7FFF'. Negative values are in twos-complement form. Also valid is X'FFFF'. This selects the printer
default of 5 pels wide.
Parameter P5 is ignored by the S828 Printer.

Repeat String (RPS)
2BD3

04-FF

EE (EF)

P1-Pn

Description: This control contains a string of coded graphic characters that repeats on the current line.
Parameters P1P2 specify the repeat length. This is the total length of the generated string.
Parameters P3 through Pn are the repeat data. The data specified in bytes P3 through Pn repeats until
the output equals the repeat length specified in parameters P1P2. The data field can be a maximum of
253 bytes. The printer does not check the data for the control sequence introducer (X'2B'). If the repeat
length is zero, this control is a no-op. If the count equals 04, but the repeat length is greater than zero, an
error occurs.

Transparent Data (TRN)
2BD3

02-FF

DA (DB)

P1-Pn

Description: This control marks the beginning of a string of coded characters, which the printer does not
check for an embedded X'2B' escape sequence. The inline position increments for each position in the
string.
Parameters P1 through Pn are the graphic characters. The data field can be a maximum of 253 bytes.

No Operation (NOP)
2BD3

02-FF

F8 (F9)

P1-Pn

Description: This control specifies a string of bytes that the printer ignores. The printer ignores all
parameter data. The data field can be a maximum of 253 bytes.

Set Variable Space Increment (SVI)
2BD3

C4 (C5)

P1-P2

Description: The Variable Space Increment is a two byte positive value that defines the width of the
variable space character in units. Parameters P1P2 are the width value. Valid values are 0 to X'7FFF'.
X'FFFF' equals the printer default. The variable space character is X'40' for EBCDIC code pages and X'20'
for ASCII code pages.

Set Text Color (STC)
2BD3

04 or 05

74 (75)

P1-P3

Description: This control specifies the color attributes for text.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

155

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Parameters P1P2 are the color attributes, as shown:
Hex
0000
FF00
FF07

Color
Hex
Black (Default) 0008
Black
FFFF
Black

Color
Black
Use Current Default
(Default)

Note: For Limited Simulated Color Support, all valid but unsupported color values for text data are
accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of unsupported color
exceptions. In the S828 Printer, simulation of Color of Medium is done by printing in Color of
Medium except where not possible because of different resolutions when text overlays graphics,
image, or barcode. For actual colors, all valid colors not listed in the above table are simulated in
the S828 Printer by printing in black.
Parameter P3 is the precision parameter. This parameter is optional and has the following meaning:
00
01
FF

If the color is not supported or cannot be printed as requested, the printer reports an exception.
Printing is in the default color if alternate exception action is invoked.
If the color is not supported or cannot be printed as requested, the printer does not report an
exception, regardless of the EHC, and printing is in the default color.
If the color is not supported or cannot be printed as requested, the printer reports an exception.
Printing is in the default color if alternate exception action is invoked.

Overstrike (OVS)
2BD3

72 (73)

P1-P3

Description: This control identifies text that the printer overstrikes with a specified character. The
overstrike character prints using the font and character set that is active when the printer receives the
Overstrike command.
Parameter P1 is the bypass identifier. This parameter controls white space to be overstruck, depending on
its value, as shown:
Bits 0-3

Reserved

Bit 4

0 Overstrike white space from Relative Move Inline
1 Bypass white space from Relative Move Inline

Bit 5

0 Overstrike white space from Absolute Move Inline
1 Bypass white space from Absolute Move Inline

Bit 6

0 Overstrike white space from Space or Variable Space Character
1 Bypass white space from Space or Variable Space Character

Bit 7

0 Bypass Treat Bits 0-6 according to their set values
1 No Bypass Treat Bits 0-6 as if their values were set to 0.

Note: If bit 7 is on, the printer treats all other bits in byte P1 as zeros, regardless of their values.
The printer ignores parameter P2 for this control. Parameter P3 is the overstrike character.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

156

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

An OVS command with a bypass value of 00 ends overstrike mode.

Underscore (USC)
2BD3

76 (77)

P1-P3

Description: This control identifies text the printer underscores at the baseline of the current line. The
underscore prints using the same print quality as the text.
Parameter P1 is the bypass identifier. This parameter controls underscoring of white space, depending on
its value, as shown:
Bits 0-3
Bit 4

Reserved
0 Underscore white space from Relative Move Inline
1 Bypass white space from Relative Move Inline

Bit 5

0 Underscore white space from Absolute Move Inline
1 Bypass white space from Absolute Move Inline

Bit 6

0 Underscore white space from Space or Variable Space Character
1 Bypass white space from Space or Variable Space Character

Bit 7

0 Bypass Treat Bits 0-6 according to their set values
1 No Bypass Treat Bits 0-6 as if their values were set to 0.

X'FF'

No bypass in effect.

Note: If bit 7 is on, the printer treats all other bits in byte P1 as zeros, regardless of their values.
A USC command with a bypass value of 00 ends underscore mode.

Temporary Baseline Move (TBM)
2BD3

03 or 06

78 (79)

P1-P4

Description: This control changes the position of the sequential baseline without change to the
established baseline. This control also stops and starts both subscript and superscript printing.
Parameter P1 is the direction parameter. Its values are:
00
01
02
03

Do not change baseline
Return to established baseline
Shift baseline away from the I axis (subscript) one additional temporary baseline
increment, per parameters P3 and P4
Shift baseline towards the I axis (superscript) one additional temporary baseline
increment, per parameters P3 and P4.

Parameter P2 is the precision parameter. Its values are:
00

Baseline shift is not simulated and the active font is used.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

157

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
01

PTX‐S828

A substitute font with characteristics identical to the current font may be used to simulate
baseline shift (superscript/subscript).
Same as 00.

Note: When subscript or superscript is active, double high printing will not occur.
Parameters P3 and P4 are the temporary baseline increments. Its values are:
0000 - 7FFF
FFFF

Temporary Baseline Increment
Half the current baseline increment.

Image Function Set Commands
The image function set contains the commands and data controls for presenting image data on a logical
page, page segment, or overlay area on the physical medium. The following commands are the image
function set:
Command
WIC
WI
END

Code
D63D
D64D
D65D

Description
Write Image Content
Write Image
End

Write Image Control (WIC)
Length

D63D

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

DATA

The Write Image Control command causes the printer to enter the image block state. The command
sequence that follows directs an image presentation block area on the current page, overlay, or page
segment that is being constructed.
The parameters of this command define the input and output size of the image array and the necessary
information for interpreting the input data.
In the page state, the printer checks all the Write Image Control command parameter values for validity. If
the parameters are not within the valid ranges, an exception condition exists.
An image cannot print outside the page without an error. If any part of the image extends beyond the
physical or logical page, no image prints and an exception occurs.
The DATA field bytes have the following meaning for this command:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4-5
6-7
8
9
10-11

Hex
0-1
2-3
4-5
6-7
8
9
A-B

Value
1 - 7FFF
1 - 7FFF
1 - 7FFF
1 - 7FFF
00
00
0101
0202

Description
Output - Pels per Scan Line
Output - Number of Scan Lines
Input - Pels per Scan Line
Input - Number of Scan Lines
No Compression Algorithm
Pel Data Format - One Bit per Pel
No Magnification
Scale by 2, Both X and Y

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

158

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
12-13
14-15
16

17-19
20
21-23
24-25

Hex
C-D
E-F
10

PTX‐S828
Value
0000
2D00

Description
Zero Degrees Scan Line Direction
90 Degrees Scan Line Sequence Direction
Coordinate Type (See note 1)
00
Absolute I, Absolute B
20
Absolute I, Relative B
40
Relative I, Absolute B
60
Relative I, Relative B
AD
Absolute X, Absolute Y
11-13 FF8000 - 7FFF First Pel X or I Coordinate
14
00
Reserved
15-17 FF8000 - 7FFF First Pel Y or B Coordinate
18-19 0000, 0008,
Color - Same as Text and Graphics Color Values (See note 2)
FF00, FF07,
FF08

Notes:
1. Only A0 can be used if the text is set to 180/90 degrees.
2. The S828 Printer provides Limited Simulated Color Support. All architecturally defined color values for
image data are accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of
unsupported color exceptions. All valid colors not listed in the above table (X'0001' through X'0007',
X'0009' through X'0010', and X'FF01' through X'FF06') are simulated by printing in black.
Coordinate Type: Can be either an absolute or a relative value. Absolute values specify a location on the
logical page relative to the reference coordinates. Relative values specify a location on the logical page
relative to the current coordinates.
If byte 10 equals X'00', the S828 Printer uses the absolute values of I and B, as specified in bytes 11
through 13 and bytes 15 through 17 of this command. These values are the text inline and text baseline
coordinates, respectively.
If byte 10 equals’X'20', the S828 Printer uses the absolute value of I and the relative value of B. The
absolute I value is the text inline coordinate (bytes 11 through 13 of this command); the relative B value is
the sum of the current text baseline coordinate and the value specified in bytes 15 through 17 of this
command.
If byte 10 equals X'40', the S828 Printer uses the relative value of I and the absolute value of B. The
relative I value is the sum of the current text inline coordinate and bytes 11 through 13 of this command;
the absolute B value is the text baseline coordinate, specified in bytes 15 through 17 of this command.
If byte 10 equals X'60', the S828 Printer uses the relative value of I and the relative value of B. The
relative I value is the sum of the current text inline coordinate and bytes 11 through 13 of this command;
the relative B value is the sum of the current text baseline coordinate and bytes 15 through 17 of this
command.
If byte 10 equals X'A0', the current logical page X and Y coordinates determine the origin. When the block
is within a page, WIC bytes 11 through 13 and 15 through 17 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and
Y-coordinate origin specified in a previously received LPP command (or from the printer default
coordinates if no LPP command is received). When the block is within an overlay that is invoked using an
LCC command, WIC bytes 11 through 13 and 15 through 17 specify the offset from the Xm-coordinate and

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

159

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Ym-coordinate origin. When the block is within an overlay that is invoked using an IO command, WIC bytes
11 through 13 and 15 through 17 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate origin specified
in the IO command.
Bytes C through D must equal 0 degrees scan line direction and bytes E through F must equal 90 degrees
scan line sequence direction. The Coordinate Type byte 10 is not used to modify the image direction.

Write Image (WI)
Length

D63D

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

DATA

This command transmits a block of image data to the printer. A sequence of one or more Write Image
commands follows the Write Image Control command and terminates with an End command.
The total number of bits of image is equal to the product of the number of source scan lines and the
number of bits on each scan line. Thus, the number of bytes sent is:
(Bytes 4 through 5 x bytes 6 through 7 of the WIC command) divided by 8
Note: If this calculation yields a fractional remainder, round the result to the next whole number. The
DATA parameter bytes contain the image bit string.

End (END)
For a description of the End control, see “End (END)”.

Graphics Function Set Commands
The graphics function set contains the commands and data controls for presenting graphic pictures on a
logical page, page segment, or overlay area on the physical medium. The following commands are the
graphics function set:
Command
WGC
WG
END

Code
D684
D685
D65D

Description
Write Graphics Content
Write Graphics
End

Graphics is a data type the printer uses to present line art picture drawings in a graphics block area on a
page. A sequence of drawing orders produce arcs, lines, fillets, character strings, markers, and other
elements that define the drawing. These orders, grouped into one or more segments, present the picture.
The control unit sends a Write Graphics Control command to the printer to establish the control
parameters and initial drawing conditions for presenting the picture data. The picture segments themselves
are sent to the printer as data in one or more Write Graphics commands.
Knowing how the graphics picture is developed allows an understanding of the relationship between the
Write Graphics command and the Write Graphics Control command. The following pages explain the
drawing order coordinates, the graphic medium presentation space, and the graphic block area.

Drawing Order Coordinate System
The drawing orders specify graphics in an abstract space rather than directly on the page. This allows
repositioning graphics on a page without changing the drawing orders. Coordinates (Graphics X and Y)
specify the position of the graphic.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

160

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Note: The Graphics X and Y coordinates are not the same as the media X and Y coordinates. The
horizontal axis is Graphics X; the vertical axis is Graphics Y. The intersection of the Graphics X and
Y axes is coordinate (0,0). The horizontal axis is positive to the right of center and negative to the
left of center. The vertical axis is positive to the top of center and negative to the bottom of center.
Therefore, both positive and negative values are valid. Negative values are specified in
twos-complement form.
All coordinates are in coordinate units, called drawing units that are the same as units in the Graphics
Data Descriptor (GDD) structured fields. Figure 16 shows the Graphics X and Y coordinate system.

Figure 16. The Graphics X and Y Coordinate System

Graphic Medium Presentation Space
The graphic medium presentation space is an abstract coordinate space where graphics are composed. It
is a conceptual structure defined by the limits of the coordinate space as shown in Figure 17.
Units are defined in “Graphic Data Descriptor (GDD)”.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

161

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 17. The Graphic Medium Presentation Space and Its Limits

Graphic Window
The graphic window is a user-defined, rectangular area within the graphic medium presentation space.
This area is the source from where information is selected for printing. Figure 18 illustrates the relationship
of the graphic window to the graphic medium presentation space.

Figure 18. The Graphic Window within the Graphic Medium Presentation Space

Graphic Block Area
The graphic block area is the part of the current physical medium in which the graphics is printed.
The graphic block area can overlap other output (such as text or images) specified earlier for the same
page. Likewise, subsequent output specified by other commands for the same page can overlap the
graphic block area. Figure 19 shows the graphic block area and its relationship to the
physical medium.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

162

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 19. The Graphic Block Area on the Physical Medium

Positioning the Graphic Window in the Graphic Block Area
As mentioned previously, the graphic window can be any size within the graphic presentation space limits.
The graphic block area size can be the entire physical Medium or a portion of the physical medium.
The Write Graphics Control command, described in detail in “Write Graphics Control (WGC)”,
specifies the mapping of the graphic window to the graphic block area.
The term mapping refers to the transformation of an abstract space into its size and position on the
physical medium. There are three ways to map the abstract space. They are scale-to-fit, center-and-trim,
and position-and-trim mapping. These mapping methods are described in detail in “Area Mapping Control
Options”.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

163

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Write Graphics Control (WGC)
Length

D684

Flag

GAP

GOC

GDD

Correlation ID (Optional)

DATA

The Write Graphics Control command causes the printer to enter the graphics block state. The parameters
of this command define the size, placement, and orientation of the graphic block area and establish the
initial conditions for interpreting the graphic data. Receiving the End command in the graphic block state
terminates the processing of the graphic data.
The Write Graphics Control data consists of three consecutive structured fields:
● The Graphic Area Position control defines the position of the graphics picture on the page.
● The Graphic Output Control (GOC) defines the size of this picture on the page.
● The Graphic Data Descriptor (GDD) defines the size of the graphics window and the default
characteristics of the graphics picture.
Each structured field contains a two byte length field, then a two byte structured field ID, and finally a data
field.
Note: The quality of the graphics output is affected by the graphics mode and direction parameter values
selected at the operator panel (see the Administrators Manual for your model printer), and by the Print
Quality Control command (see “Print Quality Control (PQC)”).

Graphic Area Position Control (GAP)
GAP

GOC

GDD

Length

DATA

The Graphic Area Position Control structured field is the first structured field in the DATA portion of the
Write Graphics Control command. This field defines the position and orientation of the graphic block area.
The top left corner of the graphic block area is defined relative to the reference coordinate system.
The format of the GAP field is:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4-5

Hex
0-1
2-3
4-5

Value
000B - (n + 1)
AC6B
8000 - 7FFF

6-7

8000 - 7FFF

8-9

0000

5A00

Description
Length of this Field
Structured Field ID
X Coordinate Position or Inline Coordinate Position of the
Graphic Block Area in Units (Position of the Top Left Corner)
Y Coordinate Position or Baseline Coordinate Position of the
Graphic Block Area in Units (Position of the Top Left Corner)
When you use the X,Y coordinate system or the I,B coordinate
system with the inline orientation system equal to 0 degrees,
you must use the 0 degree orientation for graphics.
When you use the I,B reference system and the inline
orientation is 180 degrees, you must use the 180 degree
orientation for graphics.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

164

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
10

11-n

Hex
A

PTX‐S828
Value
Reference
00
20
40
60
A0
B-n

Description
Coordinate System:
Absolute I, Absolute B
Absolute I, Relative B
Relative I, Absolute B
Relative I, Relative B
Absolute X, Absolute Y
Reserved

Figure 20 shows the Graphic Block Area Position control specifying the top left reference point for the
graphic block area.

Figure 20. Graphic Block Area Position Control and the Graphic Block Area
Byte A of the GAP specifies the reference coordinate system. The reference coordinate system used for
determining the top left corner of the graphic block area can be either the media X,Y or the I,B coordinate
system.
If byte A equals X'00', the absolute I and B coordinates determine the top left corner. GAP bytes 4 and 5
specify the text inline coordinate. GAP bytes 6 and 7 specify the text baseline coordinate.
If byte A equals X'20', the absolute I and relative B coordinates determine the top left corner. GAP bytes 4
and 5 specify the text inline coordinate. GAP bytes 6 and 7 add to the last text baseline coordinate
position used prior to graphics.
If byte A equals X'40', the relative I and absolute B coordinates determine the top left corner. GAP bytes 4
and 5 add to the last text inline coordinate position used prior to graphics. GAP bytes 6 and 7 specify the
text baseline coordinate.
If byte A equals X'60', the relative I and B coordinates determine the top left corner. GAP bytes 4 and 5
add to the last text inline coordinate position used prior to graphics. GAP bytes 6 and 7 add to the last text
baseline coordinate position used prior to graphics.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

165

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

If byte 10A equals X'A0', the current logical page X and Y coordinates determine the origin. When the
block is within a page, GAP bytes 4 through 7 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate
origin specified in a previously received LPP command (or from the printer default coordinates if no LPP
command was received). When the block is within an overlay that is invoked using an LCC command,
GAP bytes 4 through 7 specify the offset from the Xm-coordinate and Ym-coordinate origin. When the block
is within an overlay that is invoked using an IO command, GAP bytes 4 through 7 specify the offset from
the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate origin specified in the IO command.
When you use the X,Y coordinate system or the I,B coordinate system with the inline orientation equal to 0
degrees, you must use the 0 degree orientation for graphics.
When you use the I,B reference system and the inline orientation is 180 degrees, you must use the 180
degree orientation for graphics.

Graphic Output Control (GOC)
GAP

GOC

GDD

Length

DATA

The Graphic Output Control structured field is the second structured field in the DATA portion of the Write
Graphics Control command. This field specifies the size of the graphic block area and a mapping option
for placing the graphic window into the graphic block area. This field is optional and does not need to be in
the Write Graphics Control command. If the GOC field is not present, the printer uses:
● The mapping option X'30' (where offset equals zero)
● X offset and Y offset equals zero
● Graphics block size equals the graphics medium presentation space window size defined in the GDD
self-defining field.
The format of the GOC field is:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4

Hex
0-1
2-3
4

5-6

7-8

9-10

9-A

12-13
14-15

C-D
E-F

Value
0010 - (n + 1)
A66B
00
01
05A0 - 7FFF
1626 - 7FFF
1 - 7FFF
FFFF
1 - 7FFF
FFFF
10
20
30
8000 - 7FFF
8000 - 7FFF

Description
Length of this Structured Field
Structured Field ID
Unit Base (10 in.)
Unit Base (10 cm)
Units per Unit Base (10 in.) (See Note 1)
Units per Unit Base (10 cm) (See Note 1)
Width of Graphic Block Area in Units
Use Value From LPD Command
Height of Graphic Block Area in Units
Use Value From LPD Command
Area Mapping Control Option (See Note 2)
Scale-to-Fit
Center-and-Trim
Position-and-Trim
X Offset in Units (See Note 3)
Y Offset in Units (See Note 3)

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

166

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
16-17

Hex
10-n

PTX‐S828
Value

Description
Reserved

Notes:
1. For bytes 5 through 6 (units per base value), 14400/10 in. is supported precisely. Multiples of 14400/10 in.
are also supported. If byte 4 specifies units in centimeters and byte B specifies 20 (center-and-trim) or 30
(position-and-trim), then bytes 5 through 6 must be equivalent to a supported value such as X'1626' or
X'2C4C'.
2. See “Area Mapping Control Options”.
3. The printer ignores the X and Y offset fields unless byte B equals X'30'. These values are the offset of the
top left corner of the graphic window relative to the top left corner of the graphic block area.
Figure 21 shows the Graphic Output Control parameters specifying the size of the graphic block area.

Figure 21. Graphic Output Control and the Graphic Block Area

Graphic Data Descriptor (GDD)
GAP

GOC

GDD

Length

DATA

The Graphic Data Descriptor is the last structured field in the DATA portion of the Write Graphics Control
command. This field specifies the parameters for the graphic window in the graphic medium presentation
space (GPS) and sets the drawing default conditions. The graphic window limits define the range of
drawing order coordinate values that map to the graphic block area.
Without causing an error, the drawing orders can specify GPS coordinates in the X'8000' to X'7FFF' range.
The specified GDD graphic window limits select the part of the drawing order’s picture to consider for
mapping to the output area.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

167

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

The format of the GDD field is:
Decimal

Hex

Value

Description

0-1
2-3
4

5
6-7

8-9

10-13
14-15
16-17
18-19
20-21
22-25
26-27
28-n

A-D
E-F
10-11
12-13
14-15
16-19
1A-1B
1C-n

001C - (n + 1) Length of this Structured Field
A6BB
Structured Field ID
00
Unit Base (10 in.)
01
Unit Base (10 cm)
00
Reserved
05A0 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 in.) (See Note)
1626 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 cm) (See Note)
05A0 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 in.) (See Note)
1626 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 cm) (See Note)
00000000
Reserved
8000 - 7FFF X Left Limit of the Graphic Window in GPS coordinate units
8000 - 7FFF X Right Limit of the Graphic Window in GPS coordinate units
8000 - 7FFF Y Top Limit of the Graphic Window in GPS coordinate units
8000 - 7FFF Y Bottom Limit of the Graphic Window in GPS coordinate units
00000000
Reserved
0000
Graphics Flags - Ignored
Initial Graphic Default Conditions - Self-Describing Instructions
that Set the Drawing Defaults for the Picture (See Note)
(Optional field)

Note: See “Self-Describing Instructions”. Figure 22 shows the Graphic Data Descriptor control parameters
specifying the size of the graphic window.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

168

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 22. Graphic Data Descriptor and the Graphic Medium Presentation Space

Area Mapping Control Options
Byte B in the GOC data field is the area mapping control option byte. The option values are:
● 10 - Scale to fit
● 20 - Center and trim
● 30 - Position and trim.
Scale to Fit Mapping: The center of the graphic window is mapped to the center of the graphic block
area and the graphic data is scaled by the printer (to a printer-supported unit per unit base) so that the
picture within the graphic window fits entirely within the output area at the closest maximum scale.
Figure 23 shows the result of scale-to-fit mapping. For this example, the graphic window is shown larger than
the graphic block area. The parameters in the Graphic Data Descriptor specify the size of the graphic
window (in GPS coordinate units). The parameters in the Graphic Area Position and the Graphic Output
Control specify the size and location of the graphic block area on the physical medium.
If the graphic block area is smaller than the graphic window, as shown in this example, the graphic window
is proportionally reduced to fit in the graphic block area. That is, the entire graphic drawing contained
within the graphic window appears in the graphic block area, reduced in size to fit in the graphic block
area.
This size reduction is done to scale, keeping the same proportions as the original graphic drawing.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

169

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Notes:
1. The printer will not rescale graphics image data. If the image data does not fit within the output area,
clipping of the image data occurs.
2. Graphics markers are not scaled; they are always 3 mm (0.12 in. [17/144-in.]) square. If markers are
drawn close to the boundary of a page and the page is then scaled down, the center points of the
markers are scaled closer to the boundary of the page but the marker size is still the same. The
markers may be clipped from the page if the scaling factor scales the centers of the markers too close
to the edge.

Figure 23. Scale-to-Fit Mapping
Center and Trim Mapping: The center of the graphic window is mapped to the center of the graphic
block area and the graphic data is presented at the specified scale. Any portion of the picture that goes
outside the graphic block area is clipped to the graphic block area boundary. Figure 24 shows the result of
center-and-trim mapping. For this example, the graphic window is shown smaller than a previously defined
graphic picture. This picture is to be placed on the physical medium. The parameters in the Graphic Data
Descriptor specify the size of the graphic window (in graphic medium presentation space (GPS) units). The
parameters in the Graphic Area Position and the Graphic Output Control specify the size and location of the
graphic block area on the physical medium.
If the graphic block area is smaller than the graphic window, as shown in this example, a portion of the
graphic picture is eliminated. The centers of the graphic window and the graphic block area coincide, and
the boundaries of the graphic block area determine the limits of the graphic picture. Any portion of the
graphic picture extending beyond the graphic block area will not be drawn on the page.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

170

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 24. Center-and-Trim Mapping
Position and Trim Mapping: The upper left-hand corner of the graphic window is mapped to the graphic
block area using the specified offset and presented at the specified scale. Any portion of the picture that
goes outside the graphic block area is clipped to the area boundary. Figure 25 shows the result of positionand-trim mapping. For this example, the graphic window is shown smaller than a previously defined graphic
picture. This picture is to be placed on the physical medium. The parameters in the Graphic Data Descriptor
specify the size of the graphic window. The parameters in the Graphic Area Position and the Graphic Output
Control specify the size and location of the graphic block area on the physical medium.
If the graphic block area is smaller than the graphic window, a portion of the graphic picture is eliminated.
The top-left corner of the graphic window is either coincident with the top left corner of the graphic block
area, or it is offset from the top left corner of the graphic block area by a distance specified in the Graphic
Output Control. Only the portion of the picture contained within the overlapping areas of the graphic
window and the graphic block area will be drawn. The printer trims (eliminates) the portion of the graphic
picture outside this area.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

171

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 25. Position-and-Trim Mapping

Self-Describing Instructions
This portion of the Graphic Data Descriptor structured field contains zero or more self-describing
instructions that set the drawing defaults for the graphics picture. The general format of a self-describing
instruction is:
21

Length

Set

Mask

Default

Data

The first byte, 21, indicates that the following parameter is a Set Current Defaults instruction.
The Length byte is the length of the following data. If this value equals 4, the printer uses the standard
default values.
The Set byte indicates the type of attribute or parameter this instruction is specifying.
The bits 0 through 15 in the Mask bytes correspond to attribute items within the indicated set. The
individual set descriptions explain the meanings of these bits. When a mask bit equals one, the value of
the default byte selects one of two options. See the default byte description for details. When a mask bit
equals zero, the default does not change and the data does not include the value for the corresponding
attribute.
The Default byte has a value of either 0F or 8F. A value of 0F sets all indicated items to their standard
default values. A value of 8F and a mask bit equal to one requires the appropriate data for a new default
to be defined in the data field for the corresponding attribute. Unreferenced data bytes not addressed by
the mask field are ignored.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

172

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

The Data bytes contain immediate data that specifies values for the attributes in this instruction. If the
Default byte is 0F, these Data bytes are not present.
The Set byte specifies one of the following attributes or parameters:
Set Value
00
01
02
03
04
0B

Description
Drawing Attributes
Line Attributes
Character Attributes
Marker Attributes
Pattern Attributes
Arc Parameters

The following charts explain the meaning of the mask bits for each of the Set instructions. Refer to the
drawing order descriptions for supported attribute values.

Drawing Attributes Set (Set = 00):
Mask Bit
0
1-15

Item Name
Color
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)

Length (Bytes)
2
-

Line Attributes Set (Set = 01):
Mask Bit
0
1
2-15

Item Name
Line Type
Line Width
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)

Length (Bytes)
1
1
–

Character Attributes Set (Set = 02):
Mask Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6-15

Item Name
Angle X, Y
Cell size CW, CH
Direction
Precision
Symbol Set
Shear X, Y
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

Length (Bytes)
4
4
1
1
1
4
–

173

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Marker Attributes Set (Set = 03):
Mask Bit
0-1
2
3
4
5-6
7
8-15

Item Name
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
Precision
Symbol Set
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
Marker Symbol
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)

Length (Bytes)
–
–
1
1
–
1
–

Pattern Attributes Set (Set = 04):
Mask Bit
0-4
5-6
7
8-15

Item Name
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
Pattern Symbol
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)

Length (Bytes)
–
–
1
–

Arc Parameters Set (Set = 0B):
Mask Bit
0
1
2
3
4-15

Item Name
P Value
Q Value
R Value
S Value
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)

Length (Bytes)
2
2
2
2
–

If the self-describing instructions do not specify a current default, the printer uses the standard graphic
default for that parameter. The standard default values for the graphic segments are:
Description
Color
Line Type
Line Width
Character Angle
Character Cell
Character Direction
Character Set
Character Font
Marker Symbol
Pattern Symbol

Value
Black
Solid
Normal
No Rotation
Standard Size (19 Dots High by 21 Dots Wide in 1/144 in. Units)
Left to Right
Current Set (through the operator panel)
NLQ Courier
Cross
Solid Shading

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

174

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Description
Current Position
Arc Parameters
Foreground Mix
Background Mix
Character Precision
Marker Precision
Marker Symbol Set

PTX‐S828
Value
X, Y = 0, 0
P = Q = 1, R = S = 0
Overpaint
Leave Alone
Character Precision
Character Precision
Resident Set in Printer

Note: Standard NLQ text character images (18 1/144 in. high by 20 1/200 in. wide) map to the standard
size graphics character so that their upper left corners are coincident.

Write Graphics (WG)
Length
BSI

D685

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

DATA

One or More Drawing Orders

The Write Graphics command transmits graphic data to the printer. The data in this command consists of
picture segments that contain the drawing orders that define the picture in the graphic medium
presentation space. Any number of Write Graphics commands may follow the Write Graphics Control
command.
The Write Graphics command has a data length restriction of 32K. Within this data-length limit, the Write
Graphics command can transmit partial segments, full segments, multiple segments, or any combination of
these. Segments and drawing orders must be transmitted in the order in which they are to take effect.
When the printer encounters a partial segment, the printer expects the next graphics data to be the
remainder of the segment. This condition is called graphics spanning. For a spanned segment, the
segment length is the length of the entire segment before spanning. The Write Graphics command length
is the actual number of bytes being transmitted in the current command.
The valid sequence for graphics spanning is as follows:
● Write Graphics command with zero or more segments, followed by the start of a partial segment
● Zero or more XOA, NOP, or STM commands
● A new Write Graphics command with a continuation of the partial segment, followed by zero or more
segments.
All segments are run in deferred mode; drawing orders are included in the picture as they are received.
The printer does not retain or store the segments. Receipt of the first segment starts the drawing process.

Begin Segment Introducer (BSI)
BSI

One or More Drawing Orders

The Begin Segment Introducer precedes all of the drawing orders that are together in the graphic
segment. The following chart shows the format of the BSI:

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

175

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
0
1
2-5
6
7

Hex
0
1
2-5
6
7

PTX‐S828
Content
70
0C
NAME
00
Bit 0-2
Bit 3

Bit 4
Bit 5-6

8-9
10-13
14-n

8-9
A-D
E-n

Bit 7
LEN
NAME
ORDER

Description
Begin Segment Command
Length of the Following Parameters in BSI
Name of Segment (Printer ignores this field)
Reserved
Reserved (Must be Zeros)
Prologue Flag
0 - No Prologue
1 - Prologue
Reserved
Segment Flags
00 - New Segment (Reinitialize Current Drawing Attributes)
11 - Append This Segment to the Previous Segment (Do Not
Reinitialize Current Drawing Attributes)
Reserved
Length of Created Segment
Predecessor/Successor Name (The Printer Ignores This Field)
Drawing Order or Orders (The Number of Bytes in This Field
Must Equal the Length Field, Bytes 8-9)

If bit 3 of byte 7 is on, a prologue is the first sequence of drawing orders in a new segment. The prologue,
if present, is always at the beginning of a new segment's data and ends by an End Prologue order within
the same segment.
If bits 5 and 6 of byte 7 are zero, the drawing attributes are re-initialized to the current default values. If
bits 5 and 6 of byte 7 are equal to 11, this segment appends to the previous segment and the current
drawing attributes do not reinitialize.
Drawing Orders: One or more drawing orders follow each Begin Segment Introducer. The format of a
drawing order is:
Order Code
Order Code

Parameter(s)

Order Code

Length

Parameter(s)

The order code specifies the type of graphics to print or the assigned drawing attribute.
The Length field, if present, is a one byte value that specifies the length of the drawing order following this
byte. See the specific drawing orders for information about the length field.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

176

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

The parameter bytes contain the specific characteristics for the drawing order. For information about the
parameters, see the specific drawing orders, following this description.
Code
00
01
04
08
0A
0C
0D
11
18
19
21
22
26
28
29
85
87
91
92
93
A1

Drawing
No Operation
Comment
Reserved (Treated as a No-op)
Set Pattern Set
Set Color (Graphics)
Set Mix
Set Background Mix
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Current Position
Set Arc Parameters
Set Extended Color
Set Pattern Symbol
Set Marker Symbol
Fillet at Current Position
Full Arc at Current Position
Image at Current Position
Image Data
End Image
Relative at Current Position

Code
33
34
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3E
43
60
68
71
81
82
83
C1
C2
C3
C5
C7
D1
E1

Drawing
Set Character Cell Size
Set Character Angle
Set Character Set
Set Character Precision
Set Character Direction
Set Marker Precision
Set Marker Set
End Prologue
Reserved (Treated as a No-op)
End Area
Begin Area
End Segment (Treated as a No-op)
Line at Current Position
Marker at Current Position
Character String at Current Position
Line
Marker
Character String
Fillet
Full Arc
Begin Image
Relative Line

The following sections describe the drawing orders.

No Operation
00

Description: This order is a no-operation; it has no effect on the graphic medium presentation space or
any attribute or any current parameter.
Comment
01

P1..Pn

Description: This order is a no-operation; it has no effect on the graphic medium presentation space or
any attribute or any current parameter. This order can appear anywhere within the segment.
L1 is the length byte. This byte is a value between 1 and 255 and specifies the number of data bytes that
follow. Parameters P1 to Pn are the data bytes. The printer ignores the data within the order. However,
there must be at least one data byte within this order.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

177

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Segment Characteristics
04

P1..Pn

Description: This order is for compatibility with existing products and is a No Operation order.

Set Pattern Set
08

Description: This order sets the value of the current pattern set attribute. Parameter byte P1 has the
following value:
00 Pattern default

Set Color
0A

Description: This order sets the value of the current graphic color attribute. The color for non-graphics (for
example, text) does not change with this order. The color attribute applies to all following graphic drawing
orders until another Set Color order or Set Extended Color order occurs or until a new graphic segment
initializes the graphic attributes. This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.
Parameter P1 specifies the color, as follows:
Hex
00
07
08

Color (See note)
Current Default
Black
Color of Medium

Note: The S828 Printer provides Limited Simulated Color Support. All architecturally defined color values
for graphics data are accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of
unsupported color exceptions. All valid colors not listed in the above table (X'01' through X'06') are
simulated by printing in black.
If the color requested is not available, the printer uses black. If this occurs, the Exception Handling
Control determines whether to report this condition. The EHC also determines whether to continue
with the Write Graphics command.
For all color selections except the color of the medium, graphics prints in black. These selections
overpaints previous graphics (if of a different color) by changing the color of the dots to print. For a
color of medium selection, following graphics overpaints previous graphics by deleting (erasing) the
dots to print.

Set Mix
0C

Description: This order sets the value of the current mix attribute. The mix controls the way that the
printer combines the color of the foreground with the color of the medium presentation space. Parameter
byte P1 contains the value of the current mix attribute. The only valid values for this byte are:

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

178

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

00 Use the default (overpaint)
02 Overpaint - The color attribute value of the foreground replaces the color attribute value of the
graphics medium presentation space.

Set Background Mix
0D

Description: This order sets the value of the background mix. The background mix controls the way the
printer combines the color of the background with the color of the graphics medium presentation space.
Parameter byte P1 contains the value of the current mix attribute. The only valid values for this byte are:
00
05

Use the default (leave alone)
Leave Alone - The color attribute value of the medium presentation space does not change.

Set Fractional Line Width
11

Description: The Set Fractional Line Width order sets the line width attribute. This order changes only the
line width attribute. The printer uses the last line width received, no matter which order, Fractional Line
Width Order or Set Line Width, sets the line width. Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte sequence that
specifies the line width, as follows:
Hex Value
0000
0001 - 017FF
0180 - FFFF

Line Width
Current Default
Normal Line (One Dot Wide)
Thick Line (Two Dots Wide)

This order aids graphics interchange capability. See also “Set Line Width” .

Set Line Type
18

Description: The Set Line Type order sets the value of the current line type attribute. This order does not
change any other graphic drawing order attributes.
Parameter P1 specifies the type of line for the graphic output. The following values are valid for P1:
Hex
Line Type
00
Current Default
01
Dotted Line
02
Short Dashed Line
03
Dash-Dot Line
04
Double Dotted Line
05
Long Dashed Line
06
Dash-Double Dot Line
07
Solid Line
08
Invisible Line

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

179

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Set Line Width
19

Description: The Set Line Width order specifies the line width for subsequent graphics. This order
changes the fractional line width attribute only. The printer uses the last line width received, no matter
which order, Set Fractional Line Width Order or Set Line Width, sets the line width. Parameter P1 specifies
the width of the line for the graphic output. The following values are valid for P1:
Hex
00
01
02-FF

Line Type
Current Default
Normal Line (One Dot Wide)
Thick Line (Two Dots Wide)

Set Current Position
21

P1-P4

Description: This order sets the current graphics position for a subsequent drawing order. The position for
non-graphics (for example, text) does not change.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate in drawing units. Parameters
P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate in drawing units. The printer resolves the
coordinates to the nearest increment of 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]).

Set Arc Parameters
Description: This order specifies the parameters for a full arc (circle or ellipse), which the Full Arc orders
use.
The center of this circle or ellipse is the origin (coordinate 0,0). The circle or ellipse is drawn in a
counterclockwise direction. Parameters P1 to P8 form four two byte values that specify the coordinates of
the major and minor axis ends, as follows:
P1P2 - The X coordinate of the major axis end
P3P4 - The Y coordinate of the minor axis end
P5P6 - The X coordinate of the minor axis end
P7P8 - The Y coordinate of the major axis end.
For an ellipse:
(P1P2) x (P5P6) + (P3P4) x (P7P8) = 0
For a circle of radius r, the parameters are:
P1P2 = P3P4 = r, P5P6 = P7P8 = 0
For an ellipse with major axis a and minor axis b, the parameters are:
P1P2 = a, P3P4 = b, P5P6 = P7P8 = 0
For the above ellipse, tilted at an angle A to the X axis, the parameters are:
P1P2 = a cos(A)
P3P4 = b cos(A)
P5P6 = -b sin(A)
P7P8 = a sin(A)

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

180

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.

Set Extended Color
21

P1-P4

Description: This order functions the same as the Set Color order except that it specifies a length field
and the color parameter contains two bytes. The color for non-graphics (for example, text) does not
change with this order.This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.
This order aids graphics interchange compatibility.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the color, as follows:
Hex
0000
0008
FF00
FF07
FF08

Line Type
Current Default
Black
Black
Black
Color of Medium

Note: The S828 Printer provides Limited Simulated Color Support. All architecturally defined color values
for graphics data are accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of
unsupported color exceptions. All valid colors not listed in the above table (X'0001' through X'0007',
X'0009' through X'0010', and X'FF01' through X'FF06') are simulated by printing in black.
For all color selections except the color of the medium, graphics prints in the selected color. These
selections overpaint previous graphics (if of a different color) by changing the color of the dots to be
printed. For a color of medium selection, following graphics overpaints previous graphics by deleting
(erasing) the dots to print.

Set Pattern Symbol
28

Description: This order sets the value of the current shading pattern attribute for subsequent area
shading. For additional information, see “Begin Area” and “End Area”.
Parameter P1 specifies the pattern attribute value. This value determines which particular pattern from the
pattern symbol set the printer uses to shade (fill) the interior of subsequent areas. The pattern attribute
values are:
Hex
Line Type
00
Current Default
01 - 08 Density 1 to Density 8 (Decreasing)
09
Vertical Lines
0A
Horizontal Lines
0B
Diagonal Lines 1 (Bottom Left to Top Right)

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

181

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Hex
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
40

PTX‐S828

Line Type
Diagonal Lines 2 (Bottom Left to Top Right)
Diagonal Lines 1 (Top Left to Bottom Right)
Diagonal Lines 2 (Top Left to Bottom Right)
No Shading
Solid Shading
Blank

Set Marker Symbol
29

Description: This order sets the value of the current marker symbol attribute for subsequent markers. See
“Marker” and “Marker at Current Position” orders.
Parameter P1 specifies the marker symbol attribute value. This value determines which marker from the
marker symbol set the printer uses for subsequent orders. The following are the marker symbol values:
Hex
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
40

Line Type
Current Default
Cross
Plus
Diamond
Square
Six Point Star
Eight Point Star
Filled Diamond
Filled Square
Dot
Small Circle
Blank

Set Character Cell Size
33

P1-P4

Description: This order specifies the size of the character cell for output characters with subsequent
Character String orders. The character cell size for non-graphics (for example, text) does not change with
this order. The Set Character Cell order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.
There are two types of formats with this order. The first format has a length of 4 and has four parameter
bytes. The second format has a length of 8 and has eight parameter bytes.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

182

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

For both formats, parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the width of the character in
drawing units. Parameters P3P4 form a two byte value that specifies the height of the character in drawing
units.
For the second format, the width and height of the character cell contain both integer and fractional values.
Parameters P5P6 form a two byte value that specifies the fractional portion of the width of the character in
drawing units. Parameters P7P8 form a two byte value that specifies the fractional portion of the height of
the character in drawing units. There is an implied decimal point between P1P2 and P5P6, and between
P3P4 and P7P8.
The printer pads the standard graphics character cell with spaces to achieve the desired spacing. The
printer also adjusts the character size within the specified cell in integer multiples of the standard size
graphics character. The minimum character image (resulting from graphics mapping) is the standard size
graphics character, even though the scaled character cell may be smaller. In this case, overlapping of
characters may occur.
Note: The printer clips the expanded graphics representation of the last vertical column of a downloaded
NLQ character (see Load Symbol Sets).

Set Character Angle
34

P1-P4

Description: This order specifies the angle of the baseline of graphic character strings that print using
subsequent character string orders. The non-graphics (for example, text) character angle does not change
with this order. Angles of 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees are valid. This order does not change any other
graphic drawing order attributes.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate. Parameters P3 and P4 form
a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate. To meet the requirement that the angle be 0, 90, 180, or
270 degrees, either the X or the Y coordinate must equal zero, as follows:
If X > 0 and Y = 0, then the angle is zero degrees (default).
If X = 0 and Y > 0, then the angle is 90 degrees.
If X < 0 and Y = 0, then the angle is 180 degrees.
If X = 0 and Y < 0, then the angle is 270 degrees.
If X = 0 and Y = 0, then the angle is zero degrees.
If neither the X nor the Y coordinate is zero, the printer uses the current default for this drawing order.

Set Character Set
38

Description: This order sets the value of the current character set attribute. The character set specified by
this command must use an NLQ font if printing high-density graphics or a DP font if printing low-density
graphics. Downloaded DP characters are not supported in graphics.
Parameter P1 specifies the local character set identifier. A value of 0 or X'FF' selects the current drawing
default. A value of X'01' to X'FE' selects a local ID for the character set. This local ID is mapped to a
global font ID by the Load Font Equivalence command. See “Load Font Equivalence (LFE)”.

Set Character Precision
39

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

183

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Description: This order sets the value of the current character precision attribute. Parameter P1 specifies
the type of precision. Precision 2 (character precision) is the only valid type of precision for this printer. P1
must equal 01 or 02. P1 set to X'00' is the current default.

Set Character Direction
3A

Description: This order sets the value of the character direction attribute. Subsequent strings that print
using the Character String order will print in the direction specified relative to the character baseline angle.
See “Set Character Angle”. The character direction for non-graphics (text) does not change with this order.
This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.
Parameter P1 specifies the direction, as shown:
Hex
00
01
02
03
04

Line Type
Current Default
Left to Right
Top to Bottom
Right to Left
Bottom to Top

Set Marker Precision
3B

Description: This order sets the value of the current marker precision attribute. Parameter P1 specifies
the type of precision. Precision 2 (character precision) is the only valid type of precision for this printer. P1
must equal 01 or 02.

Set Marker Set
3C

Description: This order sets the value of the current marker symbol set attribute. Parameter P1 specifies
the local character set identifier. This printer only uses the default marker set. Thus, P1 must equal 00.

End Prologue
3E

Description: This order ends the prologue section of a segment. It is only valid if the prologue flag bit is
on in the Begin Segment Introducer (BSI). When the BSI prologue flag bit is on, only the following orders
are valid before the End Prologue order:
● Comment
● No Operation
● Segment Characteristics
● All Set Attribute type orders.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

184

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

End Area
80

P1-Pn

Description: This order indicates the end of the boundary of an area specified with a Begin Area order.
This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes. However, orders between a Begin
Area/End Area pair can update the current position.
L1 is the length of the data, P1 to Pn. If no data is present, the length is zero.
Parameters P1 to Pn are optional data bytes, and if present, must be zeros.
Within the area boundaries, one or more closed figures can exist. A figure ends either by an End Area
order or by a order specifying a coordinate that implies the start of a new closed figure. These orders
include a Line, Relative Line, Arc, Full Arc, Fillet, or Set Current Position order.
Each closed figure should close properly; its start and end points should be identical. If not, the figure
closes arbitrarily with a straight line connecting the start and end points.

Begin Area
68

Description: This order indicates the beginning of the boundary of an area that the printer shades. The
area definition must terminate with an End Area order.
The area boundaries consist of one or more closed figures. Each closed figure is made up of a continuous
set of straight lines, full arcs, and fillets defined using the Line at Current Position, Fillet at Current
Position, and Full Arc at Current Position orders. The pattern symbol and the shading color for the area
are the attribute values that are current prior to the Begin Area order. Only the following orders are valid
between a Begin Area and an End Area order:
● Comment
● Line or Relative Line
● Line at Current Position
● Relative Line at Current Position
● Set Arc Parameters
● Full Arc at Current Position
● Full Arc or Fillet
● Fillet at Current Position
● Set Color or Set Extended Color (see note)
● Set Line Type, Set Line Width, or Set Fractional Line Width (see note)
● Set Current Position.
Note: When used between Begin Area and End Area drawing orders, the orders Set Color, Set Extended
Color, Set Line Type, Set Line Width, and Set Fractional Line Width update the values of their
respective current attributes only for the Area boundary, if drawn. These orders do not update their
respective current values for the area fill pattern after an area has begun.
Use of the Line, Relative Line, Full Arc, and Fillet in the non At Current Position form can cause the printer
to arbitrarily close the area figure. The recommended orders to use within an area definition are those in
the At Current Position form.
The printer cannot nest Area orders. The Begin Area order does not change any other graphic drawing
attributes. However, orders between a Begin Area/End Area pair can update the current position.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

185

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Parameter P1 is a flag byte that specifies whether boundary lines are to be drawn, as shown:
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bits 2-7

Reserved
0 = Do Not Draw Boundary Lines
1 = Draw Boundary Lines
Reserved

The printer uses the current values of color, mix, background mix, pattern, and pattern set when shading
the area. If boundary lines are drawn, the printer uses the current values of graphics color, line type, and
line width. The printer shades any commented region with an odd number of line crossings from infinity.
This shading uses the current values of pattern symbol, color, mix, and background mix from the Begin
Area order. The printer will not shade regions with an even number of line crossings from infinity. The
printer counts all coincident boundary lines when counting line crossings.
The current position is the last coordinate value of the preceding drawing order. The Set Current Position
order can move the current position to any drawing order coordinate within the limits of the GDD defined
medium presentation space window.
Note: When filled areas are drawn such that some boundaries coincide, it is recommended that they be
drawn with the same value for Parameter P1 so that the area boundary is drawn properly.

Line at Current Position
81

P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies one or more connected lines. The printer draws a line from the current
graphics position to the points specified by the first set of X and Y coordinates in the parameters. The
printer then draws additional lines from the previous end point to the next coordinate pair, if additional
coordinates are present.
The printer uses the current attributes for color, mix, line type, and line width in drawing the lines.
L1, the length, specifies the number of bytes following this byte. The value of L1 must be a multiple of
four. If L1 is zero, no line is drawn.
Parameters P1 to Pn, if present, form two byte values that specify the X and Y coordinates of the end
points for a series of connected lines. This order updates the current graphics position to the last line end
point. If the order does not specify any points, the current graphics position does not change. P1 and P2
form a two byte sequence that specifies the X coordinate of the second end point. P3 and P4 form a two
byte sequence that specifies the Y coordinate of the second end point. Additional X and Y coordinates, if
present, are specified in the remaining parameters, following the same format.

Marker at Current Position
82

P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies one or more marker symbols, which the printer places at the points
specified by a pair of X and Y coordinates, beginning with the current graphics position. The Set Marker
Symbol order determines the marker that prints.
L1, the length, specifies the number of bytes following this byte. The value of L1 must be a multiple of
four. A value of zero for L1 is valid and results in only one marker symbol being drawn at the current
graphics position.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

186

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Parameters P1 to Pn, if present, form two byte values that specify the X and Y coordinates for each
additional marker symbol. The printer draws the first marker symbol at the current graphics position. P1
and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the second X coordinate. P3 and P4 form a two byte value
that specifies the second Y coordinate. Any remaining parameters specify additional coordinate values for
additional markers, using the same format.
The printer uses the current values of color, mix, background mix, marker, precision marker set, and
marker symbol for drawing the marker.
This order updates the current graphics position to the value of the last point coordinates. If this order
does not specify any points, the current graphics position will not change.
Note: The marker cell size is constant 3 mm (0.12 in. [17/144 in.]). The scaling factor used in defining a
graphics area does not affect the size of the marker. If markers are used near the edge of a defined
graphics area, scaling the graphics may result in the markers being clipped from the printable
graphics area.

Character String at Current Position
83

P1-Pn

Description: This order draws a character string, starting at the current graphics position. A previous Set
Character Set order specifies the font to use for drawing the character string. If no previous Set Character
Set order has been processed, the printer uses the drawing default character set.
The printer uses the current values of color, mix, background mix, and character precision when drawing
the string. The Set Character Cell, Set Character Angle, and Set Character Direction orders determine the
character size, character angle, and character direction, respectively.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the character string. If L1 is zero, no character string is
drawn.
Parameters P1 to Pn, the character string, are one-byte values that specify the code points (characters) of
the character string to be drawn, using the currently active character set.

Fillet at Current Position
85

P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies a curved line that the printer draws tangential to a specified set of
connected, imaginary, straight lines. The printer uses the current graphics position for the first point and
the parameter (or parameters) specifies additional points to use.
The printer joins the points specified by imaginary straight lines. The printer then fits a curve to the lines,
as follows:
● The curve is tangent to the first line at the start point and to the last line at its end point.
● If there are intermediate lines, the curve is tangent to these lines at their center points.
L1 specifies the length of the parameter (or parameters) in this order. The value of L1 must be a multiple
of four. A value of zero for L1 is invalid.
The first end point for the imaginary line specifying the fillet is the graphics current position. Parameters P1
to Pn form two byte values that specify additional X and Y coordinates. These coordinates are additional,

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

187

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

sequential end points of the imaginary lines specifying the fillet.
The printer uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the fillet.
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last point.

Full Arc at Current Position
87

P1-P2

Description: This order specifies a full arc (circle or ellipse) with the center at the current graphics
position. A previous Set Arc Parameters order determines the shape and orientation of the arc. If no Set
Arc Parameters order has been received, then the printer draws an arc using the default values of the arc
parameters.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the scale. P1 specifies the integer portion of
the scale; P2 specifies the fractional portion of the scale (P2 divided by 256). For example, if P2 equals
X'40', the decimal value of P2 is 64. This value (64) divided by 256 equals the fraction one-fourth.
The scale value acts as a multiplier for the arc parameters. For a circle, the radius is P1P2 x r. A previous
Set Arc Parameters order specifies the value of r.
For an ellipse: The major axis is P1P2 x a, the minor axis is P1P2 x b, and a previous Set Arc Parameters
order specifies the values for a and b.
The printer uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the arc.
This order does not update the current graphics position.

Begin Image at Current Position
91

P1-P6

Description: This order defines an image, with the top left corner of the image at the current graphics
position. An image consists of a rectangular region with a resolution of one pel, defined in increments of
0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]). Each pel, therefore, represents one dot in the printed image. One or more
Image Data orders follow the Begin Image at Current Position order. The Image Data orders contain the
image data itself. The Begin Image at Current Position order introduces a graphics image. Only Image
Data, Comment, or No-op orders are valid between Begin Image and End Image orders.
Parameters P1 and P2 are always zero for this order. Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that
specifies the width of the image in increments of 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]). Parameters P5 and P6
form a two byte value that specifies the height of the image in increments of 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144
in.]).
The printer uses the current values of color and mix when drawing the image.
Note: The Begin Image at Current Position order always specifies the width and height of the image in
increments of 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]), not in drawing units.

Image Data
92

P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies the image data for all or part of an image introduced by a Begin Image
order. A Begin Image order must precede an Image Data order.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

188

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length (in bytes) of the image data that follows. Valid values for
L1 are X'00' through X'FF'.
Parameters P1 to Pn are values that specify the image dot data, a zero indicating the absence of a dot, a
one indicating the presence of a dot. The dots are 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]) apart horizontally and
vertically.
The image data is in the form of horizontal scan lines (rows), left to right. Each Image Data order specifies
only one scan line (row) of the image. Therefore, the number of Image Data orders following a Begin
Image order must be equal to the value specified in parameters P5 and P6 (the image height) of the Begin
Image order.
Each of the parameters, P1 to Pn, of the Image Data order specifies eight dots. Therefore, parameter L1
of the Image Data order must equal the image width divided by eight. Parameters P3 and P4 of the Begin
Image order specify the image width. If the image width is not a multiple of eight, the printer ignores any
extra dots specified by bits in the last parameter, Pn.
Note: The image data specified in the Image Data Orders between a Begin Image and End Image pair
must exactly fill the area specified by the width and height of the Begin Image order.
This order does not update the current graphics position.

End Image
93

P1-Pn

Description: This order defines the end of an image. A Begin Image order and zero or more Image Data
orders must precede the End Image order.
L1, the length, is a one-byte value that specifies the number of parameter bytes that follow. If no
parameter bytes follow, L1 is zero.
Parameters P1 to Pn are optional. The printer does not use these parameters; if they are present, the
printer discards them.
This order does not update the current graphics position.

Relative Line at Current Position
A1

P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies one or more connected straight lines, like the Line at Current Position
order. With this order, the end point of each line is an offset from the previous end point, rather than an
absolute coordinate pair.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field. L1 must be a multiple of two. The
printer will not draw a line if L1 is zero.
Parameters P1 to Pn are signed, twos-complement, one-byte values that specify the offset, in drawing
units. The first line end point is the graphics current position. P1 specifies the X coordinate for the second
point as an offset from the first point. P2 specifies the Y coordinate for the second point as an offset from
the first point. The remaining parameters, if present, specify additional X and Y coordinate values, as
offsets from each previous end point, following the same format.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

189

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

The printer uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the line.
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last end point. If there are no
offsets in this order, the current graphics position does not change.

Line
C1

P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies one or more connected lines.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field that follows. The value of L1 must be
a multiple of four and cannot be zero. If L1 equals four, no line is drawn, but the printer updates the
graphics current position to the points specified by parameters P1 to P4.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the first X coordinate point. Parameters P3
and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the first Y coordinate point. Parameters P5 to P8, if present,
specify the second X and Y coordinate points. The printer draws a line from the point specified by the first
pair of coordinates to the point specified by the second pair of coordinates. If additional coordinate pairs
are present, the printer draws additional lines from the previous end point to the next coordinate pair.
This order uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width.
Following this order, the printer updates the graphics current position to the last end point specified in the
order.

Marker
C2

P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies one or more marker symbols to place at the points specified by pairs of
coordinates. The specified location is the center of the marker.
A previously specified Set Marker Symbol order determines the marker symbol the printer uses. If no
previous Set Marker Symbol order was processed, the printer uses the current graphics default marker
symbol. The printer uses the current values of color, mix, background mix, marker precision, marker set,
and marker symbol when drawing the markers.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field that follows. The value of L1 must be
a multiple of four. If L1 equals zero, the printer does not draw a marker.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate point for the first marker.
Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate point for the first marker.
Parameters P5 to Pn, if present, specify the X and Y coordinate points for additional markers.
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last end point.
Note: The marker cell size is constant 3 mm (0.12 in. [17/144 in.]). The scaling factor used in defining a
graphics area does not affect the size of the marker. If markers are used near the edge of a defined
graphics area, scaling the graphics may result in the markers being clipped from the printable
graphics area.

Character String
C3

P1-Pn

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

190

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Description: This order draws a character string starting at the specified location. A previous Set
Character Set order specifies the font to use for drawing the character string. If no previous Set Character
Set order was processed, the printer uses the drawing default character set.
The printer places the character cell of the first character in the string at the specified graphics position.
The Set Character Cell, Set Character Angle, and Set Character Direction orders determine the character
size, character angle, and character direction, respectively. The printer uses the current values of color,
mix, background mix, and character precision when drawing the string.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field that follows. L1 must be greater than
or equal to four. If L1 equals four, the printer does not draw the character string, but the printer updates
the graphics current position to the point specified by parameters P1 to P4.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate of the starting location.
Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate of the starting location.
Parameters P5 to Pn, if present, are one-byte values that specify the code points of the character string,
using the currently active character set.
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last point.

Fillet
C5

P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies a curved line, which the printer draws tangential to a specified set of
connected, imaginary, straight lines.
The printer joins the points specified in the order by imaginary straight lines. The printer then fits a curve
to the lines. The curve is tangent to the first line at the start point and is tangent to the last line at its end
point. If there are intermediate lines, the curve is tangent to these lines at their center points.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the following parameters. L1 must be a multiple of four
and cannot equal zero. If L1 equals four, the printer does not draw the fillet, but the printer updates the
graphics current position to the point specified by parameters P1 to P4.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate of the first point. Parameters
P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate of the first point. Parameters P5 to Pn, if
present, form two byte values that specify the corresponding coordinate values for additional points. If only
two points are specified, the printer draws a straight line.
The printer uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the fillet.
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last point.

Full Arc
C7

P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies a full arc (circle or ellipse) with the center at the specified point. A
previous Set Arc Parameters order determines the shape and orientation of the arc. If no previous Set Arc
Parameters order was processed, the printer draws the arc using the graphics default arc parameters.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate for the center of the arc.
Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate for the center of the arc.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

191

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Parameters P5 and P6 form a two byte, unsigned, floating point value that specifies the scale. P5 specifies
the integer portion of the scale; P6 specifies the fractional portion of the scale. There is an implied decimal
point between P5 and P6. Byte P6 represents the fraction given by the value of P6 divided by 256 (see
“Full Arc at Current Position”).
The scale value acts as a multiplier for the arc parameters, as follows:
For a circle: The radius is P5P6 x r. A previous Set Arc Parameters order specifies the value of r. For an
ellipse: The major axis is P5P6 x a and the minor axis is P5P6 x b.
A previous Set Arc Parameters order specifies the values for a and b. The printer uses the current values
of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the arc.
This order does not update the current graphics position.

Begin Image
D1

P1-P10

Description: This order defines an image at the graphics position specified by parameters P1 to P4. An
image consists of a rectangular region defined in increments of 1/144 in. One or more Image Data orders
follow the Begin Image order. The Image Data orders contain the image data itself. The Begin Image order
introduces a graphics image. Only Image Data, Comment, or No-op orders are valid between Begin Image
and End Image orders.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate for the start of the image.
Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate for the start of the image.
Parameters P1 to P4 define the location of the top left corner of the image. Parameters P5 and P6 are
always zero for this order. Parameters P7 and P8 form a two byte value that specifies the width of the
image in increments of 1/144 in. Parameters P9 and P10 form a two byte value that specifies the height of
the image in increments of 1/144 in.
The printer draws the image in the current values of color and mix.
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the image (parameters P1 to P4).
Notes:
1. The Begin Image at Current Position order always specifies the width and height of the image in
increments of 1/144 in., not in drawing units.
2. By sending the image ordered (immediate) instead of unordered (deferred), the printer uses less
storage.

Relative Line
E1

P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies one or more connected straight lines, like the Line order, except that the
end point of each line is an offset from the previous end point.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field that follows. A value of zero for L1 is
invalid; L1 must be a multiple of 2. If the value of L1 is two, the printer does not draw the line. However,
the printer does update the graphics current position to the point specified by P1 and P2.
Parameters P1 to Pn are signed, twos-complement, one-byte values that specify the offset in drawing
units. Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate of the first end point of
the line. Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate of the first end point

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

192

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

of the line. Parameter P5 is a signed, twos-complement, one-byte value that specifies the X coordinate of
the second end point as an offset from the first end point. Parameter P6 is a signed, twos-complement,
one-byte value that specifies the Y coordinate of the second end point as an offset from the first end point.
The remaining parameters, if present, specify additional X and Y coordinate values as offsets from the
previous point, following the same format.
The printer draws the line in the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width.
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last offset point. If there are no
offset points with this order, the current graphics position does not change.

End (END)
For a description of the End control, see “End (END)”.

Related Drawing Orders
The following list contains drawing orders that relate to a selected order. That is, when defining parameters
for a specific order, the additional orders in the list are also affected or should be considered.
Table 8. Related Drawing Order
Set Color

Set Fractional Line Width

Set Line Type

Set Line Width

Set Extended Color
Line, Line at Current Position
Fillet, Fillet at Current Position
Begin Area, End Area
Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position
Begin Image
Begin Image at Current Position
Image Data, End Image
Marker, Marker at Current Position
Character String
Character String at Current Position
Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Set Line Width
Line, Line at Current Position
Fillet, Fillet at Current Position
Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position
Begin Area, End Area
Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Line, Line at Current Position
Fillet, Fillet at Current Position
Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position
Begin Area, End Area
Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Set Fractional Line Width
Line, Line at Current Position
Fillet, Fillet at Current Position
Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position
Begin Area, End Area
Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

193

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 8. Related Drawing Order (continued)
Set Current Position

Set Arc Parameters
Set Extended Color

Set Pattern Symbol
Set Marker Symbol
Set Character Cell Size

Set Character Angle

Set Character Direction

End Area

Begin Area

Line at Current Position
Fillet at Current Position
Full Arc at Current Position
Begin Image at Current Position
Marker at Current Position
Character String at Current Position
Relative Line at Current Position
Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position
Set Color
Line, Line at Current Position
Fillet, Fillet at Current Position
Begin Area, End Area
Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position
Begin Image
Begin Image at Current Position
Image Data, End Image
Marker, Marker at Current Position
Character String
Character String at Current Position
Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Begin Area, End Area
Marker
Marker at Current Position
Set Character Angle (Related to Cell Size, Not affected by It)
Set Character Direction (Related to Cell Size, Not affected by It)
Character String
Character String at Current Position
Set Character Cell Size (Related to Character Angle, Not affected by It)
Set Character Direction (Related to Character Angle, Not affected by It)
Character String
Character String at Current Position
Set Character Angle (Related to Character Direction, Not affected by It)
Set Character Cell Size (Related to Character Direction, Not affected by It)
Character String
Character String at Current Position
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Pattern Symbol
Begin Area
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Pattern Symbol
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
End Area

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

194

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 8. Related Drawing Order (continued)
Line at Current Position

Marker at Current Position

Character String at Current Position

Fillet at Current Position

Full Arc at Current Position

Begin Image at Current Position

Image Data

End Image

Relative Line at Current Position

Line, Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Color
Set Extended Color
Set Current Position
Marker
Set Marker Symbol
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Current Position
Character String
Set Character Direction
Set Character Angle
Set Character Cell Size
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Current Position
Fillet
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Current Position
Full Arc
Set Arc Parameters
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Current Position
Begin Image
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Image Data
End Image
Set Current Position
Begin Image
Begin Image at Current Position
Set Color, Set Extended Color
End Image
Begin Image
Begin Image at Current Position
Image Data
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Line, Relative Line
Line at Current Position
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Current Position
Set Color, Set Extended Color

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

195

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 8. Related Drawing Order (continued)
Line

Marker

Fillet

Full Arc

Begin Image

Relative Line

Line at Current Position
Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Color
Set Extended Color
Marker at Current Position
Set Marker Symbol
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Character String Character String at Current Position
Set Character Direction
Set Character Angle
Set Character Cell Size
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Fillet at Current Position
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Full Arc at Current Position
Set Arc Parameters
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Begin Image at Current Position
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Image Data
End Image
Set Current Position
Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Line at Current Position
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Current Position
Set Color, Set Extended Color

Bar Code Function Set Commands
The bar code function set contains the commands and controls for presenting bar code information on a
logical page, a page segment, or an overlay area on the physical medium. The following commands are
the bar code function set:
Command
Code Description
WBCC
D680 Write Bar Code Control
WBC
D681 Write Bar Code
END
D65D End
The following pages describe the bar code function set commands.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

196

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Write Bar Code Control (WBCC)
Length

D680

Flag

BCAP

BCOC

BCDD

Correlation ID (Optional)

DATA

The Write Bar Code Control command causes the printer to enter the bar code block state in the current
page, overlay, or page segment state. The parameters of this command define the size, placement, and
orientation of the bar code block. Parameters in this command also establish the initial conditions for
interpreting the bar code data.
Note: The quality of the bar code output is affected by the bar code mode and direction parameter values
selected at the operator panel (see the Administrators Manual for your model printer), and by the Print
Quality Control command (see “Print Quality Control (PQC)”).
A bar code block contains one or more bar code symbols with or without human readable interpretation of
the bar encoded information. Because an important application of bar code printing is printing bar code
symbols on labels, means are provided in the function set to repeat symbols. The repeated symbols must
be of the same type, but the length and content of the variable data can be different. General parameters
applying to all the repeated symbols are in a single Write Bar Code Control command. Parameters that
always change or can change from symbol to symbol are in the Write Bar Code command. A separate
Write Bar Code command must be used with the variable bar code data for each symbol.
Upon receiving the Write Bar Code Control command, the printer enters the appropriate bar code block
state. The printer then initializes control for processing bar code symbols in subsequent Write Bar Code
commands. Receiving the End Code in the bar code block state terminates the processing of bar code
data.
The Write Bar Code Control command data contains three consecutive structured fields:
● Bar Code Area Position (BCAP)
● Bar Code Output Control (BCOC)
● Bar Code Data Descriptor (BCDD).
Each structured field contains a two byte length field, then a two byte structured field ID, and finally a data
field.
Note: For more detailed information on bar codes, see Appendix C, “S828 Bar Code and OCR Printing
Options,”.

Bar Code Area Position (BCAP)
BCAP

BCOC

BCDD

Length

Data

The Bar Code Area Position Control structured field is the first structured field in the DATA portion of the
Write Bar Code Control command. This field defines the origin and orientation of the bar code block
relative to the reference coordinate system. The format of the BCAP field is:
Decimal
0-1
2-3

Hex
0-1
2-3

Content
000B - XXXX
AC6B

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

Description
Length of This Field
Structured Field ID

197

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
4-5
6-7
8-9

Hex
4-5
6-7
8-9

11-x

B-x

PTX‐S828
Content
8000 - 7FFF
8000 - 7FFF
0000
2D00
Note (2)

Description
X Coordinate of Origin of Bar Code Block
Y Coordinate of Origin of Bar Code Block
When you use the X,Y coordinate system or the I,B
coordinate system with the inline orientation equal to 0
degrees, you must use the 0 or 90 degree orientation for bar
codes.

5A00
8700

When you use the I,B reference system and the inline
orientation is 180 degrees, you must use the 180 or 270
degree orientation for bar codes.

00
20
40
60
A0

Absolute I, Absolute B
Absolute I, Relative B
Relative I, Absolute B
Relative I, Relative B
Absolute X, Absolute Y
Reserved

Notes:
1. Any positive or negative value fitting in the two byte field is allowable. Negative values are in
twos-complement form. Figure 26 shows the BCAP field specifying the top left reference point, or
origin, for the bar code block, relative to the logical page.
2. Bar codes with a unit/module width of 0.533 mm (0.021 in.) cannot be printed in high speed mode. Bar
codes with a unit/module width of 0.356 mm (0.014 in.) and a wide-to-narrow ratio of 2.5:1 cannot be
printed in high speed mode.

Figure 26. Specifying the Bar Code Block Using the Bar Code Area Position Field
Byte A of the BCAP specifies the reference coordinate system. The reference coordinate system for
determining the top left corner of the bar code area can be either the X,Y or the I,B coordinate system.
If byte A equals X'00', the absolute I and B coordinates determine the top left corner. BCAP bytes 4 and 5
specify the text inline coordinate. BCAP bytes 6 and 7 specify the text baseline coordinate.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

198

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

If byte A equals X'20', the absolute I and relative B coordinates determine the top left corner. BCAP bytes
4 and 5 specify the text inline coordinate. BCAP bytes 6 and 7 add to the last text baseline coordinate
position prior to bar codes.
If byte A equals X'40', the relative I and absolute B coordinates determine the top left corner. BCAP bytes
4 and 5 add to the last text inline coordinate position prior to bar codes. BCAP bytes 6 and 7 specify the
text baseline coordinate.
If byte A equals X'60', the relative I and B coordinates determine the top left corner. BCAP bytes 4 and 5
add to the last text inline coordinate position prior to bar codes. BCAP bytes 6 and 7 add to the last text
baseline coordinate position prior to bar codes.
If byte A equals X'A0', the current logical page X and Y coordinates determine the origin. When the block
is within a page, BCAP bytes 4-7 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate origin specified
in a previously received LPP command (or from the printer default coordinates if no LPP command
received). When the block is within an overlay that is invoked using an LCC command, BCAP bytes 4-7
specify the offset from the Xm-coordinate and Ym-coordinate origin. When the block is within an overlay
that is invoked using an IO command, BCAP bytes 4-7 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and
Y-coordinate origin specified in the IO command.
When you use the X,Y coordinate system or the I,B coordinate system with the inline orientation equal to 0
degrees, you must use the 0 or 90 degree orientation for bar codes.
When you use the I,B reference system and the inline orientation is 180 degrees, you must use the 180 or
270 degree orientation for bar codes.

Bar Code Output Control (BCOC)
BCAP

BCOC

BCDD

Length

Data

The Bar Code Output Control structured field is the second structured field in the DATA portion of the Write
Bar Code Control command. This field specifies the mapping option for the bar code block. This field is
optional and may not be present in the Write Bar Code Control command.
If the BCOC field is not present, the bar code block is equal to the bar code medium presentation space.
The format of the BCOC field is:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4

Hex
0-1
2-3
4

5-6

7-8

9-10

9-A

Content
0010 – XXXX
A66B
00
01
05A0 - 7FFF
1626 - 7FFF
1 - 7FFF
FFFF
1 - 7FFF

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

Description
Length of This Structured Field
Structured Field ID
Unit Base (10 in.)
Unit Base (10 cm)
Units per Unit Base (10 in.)
Units per Unit Base (10 cm)
Block Width (X-Extent of Block)
Use LPD Value
Block Height (Y-Extent of Block)
FFFF Use LPD Value
Area Mapping Option - Position

199

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
12-13
14-15
16-x

Hex
C-D
E-F
10-x

PTX‐S828
Content
8000 - 7FFF
8000 - 7FFF

Description
X Offset of Medium Presentation Space Origin in Units
Y Offset of Medium Presentation Space Origin in Units
Reserved

Figure 27 shows the BCOC field specifying the size of the bar code block on the logical page.

Figure 27. Specifying the Bar Code Block Size Using the Bar Code Output Control

Bar Code Data Descriptor (BCDD)
BCAP

BCOC

BCDD

Length

Data

The Bar Code Data Descriptor structured field is the last structured field in the DATA portion of the Write
Bar Code Control command. This field specifies the parameters that define the bar code symbols that
print. The format of the BCDD field is:
Decimal
0-1
2-3
4

Hex
0-1
2-3
4

5
6-7

8-9

Content
001B – XXXX
A6EB
00
01
05A0 - 7FFF
1626 - 7FFF
05A0 - 7FFF
1626 - 7FFF

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

Description
Length of This Structured Field
Structured Field ID
Unit Base (10 in.)
Unit Base (10 cm)
Reserved
Units per Unit Base (10 in.)
Units per Unit Base (10 cm)
Units per Unit Base (10 in.)
Units per Unit Base (10 cm)

200

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Decimal
10-11

Hex
A-B

Content
1 - 7FFF
FFFF

12-13

C-D

1 - 7FFF
FFFF

14-15
16

E-F
10
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E-10
11
12-15
16
17
18

17
18

11
12

19-20

13-14

01-FE
FF
0000
0008
FF00
FF07
FF08
FFFF

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

Description
X-Extent of Medium Presentation Space (Width)
Use BCOC bytes 7-8 if BCOC is present. Otherwise, use
LPD value.
Y-Extent of Medium Presentation Space (Height)
Use BCOC bytes 9-A if BCOC is present. Otherwise, use
LPD value.
Reserved
Bar Code Type
Reserved
3 of 9 Code
MSI
UPC - Version A
Reserved
UPC - Version E
UPC - Two Digit Add-On (Magazine)
UPC - Five Digit Add-On (Paperback)
EAN-8
EAN-13
2 of 5 Industrial
2 of 5 Matrix
2 of 5 Interleaved
Codabar
Reserved
Code 128
Reserved
EAN Two Digit Add On (Magazine)
EAN Five Digit Add On (Paperback)
POSTNET (See Note 6)
Modifier (See Note 1)
Local Font ID (See Note 4)
Printer Default
Color support (See note 7)
Printer Default (Black)
Black
Printer Default (Black)
Color of Medium
Printer Default (Black)
Use Current Default

201

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
21

Hex
15

PTX‐S828
Content
0E
11

22-23
24
25-26

27-x

15
1C
FF
16-17 1 - 7FFF
FFFF
18
1 - FF
19-1A
2, 14
19, 0FA
3, 1E
FFFF
1B-x

Description
Unit/Module Width (See Note 2)
0.36 mm (0.014 in.) Width
0.43 mm (0.017 in.) Width (Must have 0 in bytes 8-9 of
BCAP)
0.53 mm (0.021 in.) Width
0.71 mm (0.028 in.) Width
Printer Default
Element Height (See Note 3)
Printer Default
Height Multiplier (See Note 3)
Wide-to-Narrow Ratio (See Note 5)
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
Printer Default
Reserved

Notes:
1. The meaning of byte 11 (modifier byte) is dependent upon the bar code type. For the meaning of this
byte, see “Modifier Byte”
2. Any bar code can print with a unit/module width of 0.36 mm (0.014 in.). The only bar codes that can
print with a unit/module width of 0.53 and 0.71 mm (0.021 and 0.028 in.) are: Code 128, Codabar,
Code 3 of 9, MSI, 2 of 5 Industrial, 2 of 5 Matrix, and 2 of 5 Interleaved. If an unsupported unit/module
width is specified, the closest smaller supported unit/module width is used. For 0.43 mm (0.017 in.),
bar code block must equal 0 in BCAP bytes 8 - 9.
3. For all bar code types except UPC and EAN, the specified height equals the height of the bar/space
patterns. For UPC and EAN bar codes, the specified height includes the bar/space patterns and the
HRI. If a UPC or EAN bar code specifies a height less than or equal to 190 units at 1440 units per in.,
the height of the bar/space patterns equals the specified height and the total height is the specified
height plus the HRI height (180 units at 1440 units per in.).
If UPC supplemental or EAN add-on bar codes specify a zero degree rotation and a height less than
or equal to 460 units at 1440 units per in., the top of the bar/space patterns begins at the symbol
reference point. The height of the bar/space patterns equals the specified height, and the total height
equals the specified height plus the HRI height (450 units at 1440 units per in.). Otherwise, the top of
the HRI begins at the symbol reference point and the specified height includes the bar/space patterns
and the HRI.
If UPC supplemental or EAN add-on bar codes specify a 90 degree rotation and a height less than or
equal to 420 units at 1440 units per in., the top of the bar/space patterns begins at the symbol
reference point. The height of the bar/space patterns equals the specified height, and the total height
equals the specified height plus the HRI height (410 units at 1440 units per in.). Otherwise, the top of
the HRI begins at the symbol reference point and the specified height includes the bar/space patterns
and the HRI.
4. Byte 12 selects a Local Font ID, either OCR-A or OCR-B, for use when printing the Human Readable
Information (HRI) beneath the bar code. The list below shows the bar code types that use OCR-A and
those that use OCR-B:
OCR-A
Code 128
Code 3 of 9

OCR-B
UPC - Version A
UPC - Version E

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

202

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
OCR-A
MSI
2 of 5 Industrial
2 of 5 Matrix
2 of 5 Interleaved
Codabar

PTX‐S828
OCR-B
UPC - Two Digit Add-On (Magazine)
UPC - Five Digit Add-On (Paperback)
EAN-8
EAN-13
EAN Two Digit Add-On
EAN Five Digit Add-On

5. Wide-to-Narrow ratio is only valid for the following bar code types:
● Code 3 of 9 (X'01')
● MSI (X'02')
● 2 of 5 Industrial (X'0A')
● 2 of 5 Matrix (X'0B')
● Interleaved 2 of 5 (X'0C')
● Codabar (X'0D')
The default ratio for Codabar, Code 3 of 9, and the 2 of 5 types is 2.5:1 for unit/module width of 0.36
and 0.43 mm (0.014 and 0.017 in.), 3:1 for 0.53 mm (0.021 in.), and 2.5:1 for 0.71 mm (0.028 in.) The
default for MSI is always 2:1.
6. BCDD bytes 12 and 15-1A and WBC command byte 0 are not applicable to POSTNET; these bytes
are ignored by the printer as the POSTNET Specification defines values for these parameters.
7. The S828 Printer provides Limited Simulated Color Support. All architecturally defined color values for
graphics data are accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of
unsupported color exceptions. All valid colors not listed in the above table (X'0001' through X'0007',
X'0009' through X'0010', and X'FF01' through X'FF06') are simulated by printing in black.
8. If the color requested is not available, the printer uses black.
Figure 28 shows the BCDD field specifying the size of the bar code medium presentation space within the
bar code block on the logical page. The bar code medium presentation space must fit within the bar code
block.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

203

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 28. Specifying the Bar Code Medium Presentation Space Size. Using the Bar Code Data Descriptor

Modifier Byte: 3 of 9 Code:
01 Print bar code with no printer generated check character.
02 Generate check character and print with bar code.
MSI Code:
01 Print bar code with no printer generated check character.
02 Print bar code with IBM Modulus 10 check digit generated by the printer and put at the end of the
data. This check digit will be the second check digit.
03 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will also be IBM Modulus 10.
04 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be NCR Modulus 11. Check
digit equals remainder; check digit of 10 equals error.
05 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be IBM Modulus 11. Check
digit equals remainder; check digit of 10 equals error.
06 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be NCR Modulus 11. Check
digit equals 11 minus remainder; check digit of 10 equals zero.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

204

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

07 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be IBM Modulus 11. Check
digit equals 11 minus remainder; check digit of 10 equals zero.
08 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be NCR Modulus 11. Check
digit equals 11 minus remainder; check digit of 10 equals error.
09 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be IBM Modulus 11. Check
digit equals 11 minus remainder; check digit of 10 equals error.
UPC Version A:
00 Generate check digit and print standard symbol. Variable data field of Write Bar Code command
contains 11 bytes, first the number system digit, then the 10 article number digits.
UPC Version E:
00 Print bar code; six digits are bar encoded. Ten variable data characters are input. From the ten
input digits, the printer generates both the check digit and the six bar code characters. The printer
does not bar code the check digit. The check digit only assigns odd or even parity to the six bar
encoded digits.
UPC Two Digit Add-On:
00 Print the two supplemental digits (bar/space pattern and HRI). The Write Bar Code command
variable data consists only of the two supplemental digits. The preceding Version A or E symbol
prints under control of separate Write Bar Code Control and Write Bar Code commands.
UPC Five Digit Add-On:
00 Print the five supplemental digits (bar/space pattern and HRI). The Write Bar Code command
variable data consists only of the supplemental digits. The preceding Version A or E symbol prints
under control of separate Write Bar Code Control and Write Bar Code commands.
EAN-8:
00 Print the bar code symbol. The input variable data is seven digits: two flag digits and five article
identification digits. The seven digits are all bar coded along with a check digit generated by the
printer. The check digit follows the last article identification digit.
EAN-13:
00 Print the bar code symbol. The input variable data is twelve digits — two flag digits and ten article
identification digits, in that order. The first flag digit is not bar encoded. The second flag digit, the
article identification digits, and a check digit generated by the printer are bar encoded. The first
flag digit prints in human readable form at the bottom of the left quiet zone. The first flag digit
governs the A/B number set pattern of the bar/space encoding of the six digits to the left of the
center pattern.
Two of Five Industrial, Two of Five Matrix, Two of Five Interleaved:
01 Print the bar code with no printer generated check digit.
02 Generate the check digit and print it with the bar code.
EAN Two Digit Add-On:
00 Print the two add-on digits (bar/space pattern and HRI). The Write Bar Code command variable

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

205

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

data consists of only the add-on digits. The preceding EAN-13 symbol prints under control of
separate Write Bar Code Control and Write Bar Code commands.
EAN Five Digit Add-On:
00 Print the five add-on digits (bar/space pattern and HRI). The Write Bar Code command variable
data consists of only the add-on digits. The preceding EAN-13 symbol prints under control of
separate Write Bar Code Control and Write Bar Code commands.
Codabar:
01 Print the bar code with no printer generated check digit.
02 Generate the check digit and print it with the bar code.
Code 128:
01 Print the bar code with no printer generated check digit (4230 and 4224 emulation only)
02 Generate the check digit and print it with the bar code.
Note: Code 128 is normally printed with a check digit.
POSTNET:
00 Print a U.S. Postal Service POSTNET ZIP Code (5 digit) bar code symbol. The ZIP Code to be
bar encoded is defined as a 5-digit, numeric (0-9), input data variable to the Write Bar Code
(WBC) command. The POSTNET ZIP Code bar code is printed with a leading frame bar, the bar
encoded ZIP Code data, a correction digit, and a trailing frame bar.
01 Print a U.S. Postal Service POSTNET ZIP+4 (9 digit) bar code symbol. The ZIP+4 code to be bar
encoded is defined as a 9-digit, numeric (0-9), input data variable to the Write Bar Code (WBC)
command. The POSTNET ZIP+4 bar code is printed with a leading frame bar, the bar encoded
ZIP+4 Code data, a correction digit, and a trailing frame bar.
02 Print a U.S. Postal Service POSTNET Advanced Bar Code (ABC, 11 digit) bar code symbol. The
ABC code to be bar encoded is defined as an 11-digit, numeric (0-9), input data variable to the
Write Bar Code (WBC) command. The POSTNET ABC bar code is printed with a leading frame
bar, the bar encoded ABC data, a correction digit, and a trailing frame bar.
03 Print a variable length POSTNET bar code symbol. The code to be bar encoded is defined as a
n-digit, numeric (0-9), input data variable to the Write Bar Code (WBC) command. The printer
produces a bar code symbol without length checking; the symbol is not guaranteed to be
scannable or interpretable. The POSTNET variable-length bar code is printed with a leading frame
bar, the bar encoded data, a correction digit, and a trailing frame bar.

Write Bar Code (WBC)
Length

D681

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

DATA

The Write Bar Code command transmits data (code points) to output as a bar code symbol. This
command contains parameters that locate the symbol reference point within the bar code medium
presentation space. The WBC command also contains the variable bar code data for printing as bar/space
patterns and information about printing the code in human readable form.
A flag byte contains information as to whether a human readable interpretation (HRI) is to print, whether
the HRI is to be above or below the bar/space patterns, and for the 3 of 9 code, whether the HRI of the
start/stop character (a star or asterisk) is to print or not.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

206

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

The HRI code prints in the OCR-A or the OCR-B font, depending on the bar code type. The following bar
codes print the HRI in OCR-A:
● Code 128
● Code 3 of 9
● MSI
● 2 of 5 Industrial
● 2 of 5 Matrix
● 2 of 5 Interleaved
● Codabar.
The following bar codes print the HRI in OCR-B:
● UPC-A
● UPC-E
● UPC Two Digit Add-On
● UPC Five Digit Add-On
● EAN-8
● EAN-13
● EAN Two Digit Add-On
● EAN Five Digit Add-On.
POSTNET bar codes have no HRI.
The DATA field for the WBC command has the following format:
Decimal
0

Hex
0

Content
Bit 0
Bit 1-2

Bit 3

1-2
3-4
5-n

Bit 4-7
1 - 7FFF
1 - 7FFF

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

Description
Flags
0 - Print Human Readable Code (HRI)
1 - Do Not Print HRI
00 - Printer Option
01 - Print HRI Below Symbol - Valid for Code 128,
Codabar, 3of 9, MSI, UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-8, EAN-13,
and All 2 of 5 Bar Codes.
10 - Print HRI Above Symbol - Not valid for UPC and EAN
without 2-Digit Supplemental and UPC and EAN 5-Digit
Supplemental.
11 -Invalid Combination
0 - Do Not Print Asterisk (*) with Bar Code 3 of 9
1 - Print Asterisk (*) with Bar Code 3 of 9
Reserved
X Coordinate of Symbol Reference Point
Y Coordinate of Symbol Reference Point
Bar Code Data (See Note 3)

207

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Notes: If bar codes with human readable interpretation (HRI) are placed too close to the page edges, the
human readable characters may fall outside the physical medium boundaries. If the HRI falls outside the
physical medium boundaries, the characters may not print and a Position Check error, X'041100', may occur.
To ensure that the human-readable characters print, choose X and Y parameter values that allow sufficient
space for the characters to print. Some guidelines are:
1. For bar code types UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-8, and EAN-13, choose X and Y coordinates that place the bar
code at least 3.88 mm (0.15 in.) from both the top and left edges of the page.
2. For bar code types UPC Two Digit Add-On and UPC Five Digit Add-On, choose a Y coordinate that places
the bar code at least 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) from the top edge of the page.
3. For Codabar bar codes, the data must include the START and STOP characters. For Code 128 bar codes,
the table on the following page should be used to determine the hex value of the desired character.
The symbol reference point must be inside the bar code medium presentation space and must lie within the
logical page.

Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC)
Table 9. Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC)

Character
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
HT
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
BS
CAN
EM
GS
RS
US
FS
LF
ETB
ESC

Hex
00
01
02
03
05
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
16
18
19
1D
1E
1F
22
25
26
27

Character
.
<
(
+
|
&
!
$
*
)
;
_
/
,
%
‐
>
?
‘
:
#
@
’
=

Hex
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
60
61
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

Character
i
FNC 1
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
~
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
^
[
]
FNC 4

208

Hex
89
8F
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
91
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
BO
BA
BB
BE

Character
I
}
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
\
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
FNC 2
0
1
2

Hex
C9
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
E0
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
F0
F1
F2

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 7. Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC) (continued)

Character
ENQ
ACK
BEL
SYN
EOT
DC4
NAK
SUB
SP

Hex
2D
2E
2F
32
37
3C
3D
3F
40

Character
"
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h

Hex
7F
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88

Character
{
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

Hex
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8

Character
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FNC3
DEL

Hex
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FF

Note: All START, STOP, SHIFT, and CODE characters are generated by the printer in order to produce
the shortest bar code possible from the given data.

Overlay Function Set Commands
The overlay function set contains the commands the printer uses to store, delete, and present information
in the overlay memory of the printer. These commands are independent of any specific data types used in
defining the overlay.
The overlay is contained between the Begin Overlay (BO) command and the End Page (EP) command
and cannot contain itself. Overlays can be nested; that is, overlays can contain other overlays. The depth
of the overlay nesting cannot exceed five levels.
Figure 29 shows an overlay nesting.

Figure 29. An Example of Overlay Nesting
The following commands are the overlay function set:
Command
Code Description
BO
D6DF Begin Overlay
DO
D6EF Delete Overlay
IO
D67D Include Overlay
The following pages describe the overlay function set commands.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

209

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Begin Overlay (BO)
Length

D6DF

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

DATA

The Begin Overlay command causes the printer to leave the home state and enter the overlay state. This
command defines data that the printer saves for later use within an overlay. The printer later merges the
stored overlay with ordinary printed pages by using the Include Overlay command or the Load Copy
Control command. The current Load Page Description, Load Font Equivalence, and Load Equivalence
records, if any, become part of the definition of the overlay. The definition of the overlay terminates by an
End Page command. The overlay itself is between the Begin Overlay and the End Page commands.
The DATA field is one byte and it specifies the overlay ID. Valid values for this byte are decimal 1 through
254 (X'1' through X'FE'’). If this value specifies an overlay identifier already loaded in the printer, an
exception occurs.
Note: Because overlays use more than the normal amount of printer storage, use overlays only when
data needs to be kept.

Delete Overlay (DO)
Length

D6EF

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

DATA

The Delete Overlay command deletes (clears) either a single overlay or all overlays from the printer
memory.
The DATA field is one byte in length and can be any value between 0 and 254 (X'00' to X'FE'). This value
is the overlay identifier, and it specifies the overlay to be deleted. If this value is zero, all overlays are
deleted.

Include Overlay (IO)
Length

D67D

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

DATA

The Include Overlay command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current page at the
specified presentation position. Following the inclusion and processing of an overlay, the current print
position remains where it was prior to the overlay processing. The printer restores all page description
values, font and suppression equivalences, and text control values to the values that existed for each at
the time the overlay was processed.
The DATA field is 10 bytes in length, and contains the following:
Decimal
0-1
2
3-5

Hex
0-1
00
3-5

Content
0001 - 00FE

000000 007FFF
FF8000 FFFFFE
FFFFFF
00

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

Description
Overlay ID
Reserved
X Coordinate
Positive Offset Value Relative to the Logical Page
Negative Offset Value Relative to the Logical Page
Use the Current Inline Text Position
Reserved

210

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
7-9

Hex
7-9

PTX‐S828
Content
000000 007FFF
FF8000 FFFFFE
FFFFFF

Description
Y Coordinate
Positive Offset Value Relative to the Logical Page
Negative Offset Value Relative to the Logical Page
Use the Current Baseline Text Position

Note: Negative values must be specified in twos-complement form.

Page Segment Function Set Commands
The page segment function set contains the commands the printer uses to store, delete, and present
information in the page segment memory of the printer. These commands are independent of any specific
data types defining the page segment. The following commands are the page segment function set:
Command
BPS
DPS
IPS

Code
D65F
D66F
D67F

Description
Begin Page Segment
Deactivate Page Segment
Include Page Segment

The following pages describe the page segment function set commands.

Begin Page Segment (BPS)
Length

D65F

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

DATA

The Begin Page Segment command causes the printer to enter the page segment state. This command is
only valid in the home state. Receipt of an End Page command while in the page segment state causes
the printer to return to the home state.
The Page Segment command defines a segment of page data to save within the printer for later printing.
This printer later includes this segment when it receives the Include Page Segment command.
The DATA field is two bytes in length and can be any value between X'01' and X'7F'. This value is the
page segment identifier. If this value specifies a page segment identifier already loaded in the printer, an
exception occurs.
Note: Because page segments use more than the normal amount of printer storage, use page segments
only when data needs to be kept.

Include Page Segment (IPS)
Length

D67F

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

DATA

The Include Page Segment command causes a previously stored set of commands to process in the input
data stream as though they were just received from the host. The printer places the segment at the
current presentation position and updates the presentation position as a result of this command.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

211

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

The DATA field is two bytes in length and can be any value between X'01' and X'7F'. This value is the
page segment identifier, and it specifies the page segment to include. A value specifying a page segment
identifier that is not defined in the printer causes an exception to occur.

Deactivate Page Segment (DPS)
Length

D66F

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

DATA

The Deactivate Page Segment command deletes (clears) either a single page segment or all page
segments from the printer memory.
The DATA field is two bytes in length and can be any value between X'00' and X'7F'. This value is the
page segment identifier, and it specifies the page segment to delete. A value of zero deletes all segments.

Loaded Font Function Set Commands
The loaded font function set contains the commands the printer uses to download and delete font
information from the font storage of the printer. The following commands are the loaded font function set:
Command
LSS

Code
D61E

Description
Load Symbol Set

The following pages describe the loaded font function set commands.

Load Symbol Set (LSS)
Length

D61E

Flag

Correlation ID (Optional)

DATA

The Load Symbol Set command provides control and pattern information for code points of a font. This
command is only valid in the home state and does not result in a state transition. The DATA field contains
the following information:
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4

Hex
0
1
2
3
4

Content
90
00
01-0F
00
D-FF

6
7

60
61
XX

8
9

09 NLQ
12
00
00

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

Description
FLAGS (Vertical Format Download - See Note 1)
Reserved
Starting Code Point
Reserved
Additional Parameter Byte Length (This Value Is One More
Than the Number of Bytes Remaining)
No Self-Defining Fields Present
Self-Defining Fields Present
Uniform Character Box Size X Dimension (See Note 2)
Uniform Character Box Size Y Dimension
DP and DP Text Quality

Reserved
Reserved

212

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Decimal
10
11
12
13
14
15-16
17-x
(x+1) - xx
o-p

Hex
A
B
C
D
E
F-10
11-x
(x+1) - xx
o-p

PTX‐S828
Content
00
01-FF
00
00
00
0001 - 7EFF
00...00
02FF...XX
XX...XX

Description
Reserved
Ending Code Point
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Loaded Font Identifier (See Note 3)
Reserved (See Note 4)
Self-Defining Fields
Character Raster Data

Notes:
1. Vertical format download refers to the method used to send the character patterns to the printer. The
bits are organized as a sequence of vertical cell slices. Each slice contains a number of bits equal to
the uniform box Y size (byte 7). Slices are contiguous (run together) in the raster pattern data. The last
slice of each character is padded with the minimum number of bits needed to reach a byte boundary.
Padded bits are always zeros. The number of vertical slices per character is equal to the uniform box
X size (byte 6).
The first vertical slice received by the printer is the left reference edge of the character box. The last
slice received is the right reference edge of the character box. The first received pel of each slice
makes up the top reference edge of each character box. The last received non-padding pel of each
slice makes up the bottom reference edge of each character box.
2. The meaning of this byte depends upon the font selected, as explained below.
3. An LFE entry must exist for this LFID prior to receiving the LSS command; otherwise an error occurs.
4. The value of byte 4 determines the number of bytes in this field.
5. Load symbol set into Fast Draft fonts is not allowed.
Character Box Size X Dimension (Byte 6): The meaning of byte 6 is as follows:
● Resident Fonts, except PSM
– 0A - DP Quality
– 14 - DP Text and NLQ Quality
● Resident PSM Fonts
– 01-FF - DP Text Quality
– 01-FF - NLQ Quality
● Non-Resident Fonts
– 01-FF - With Y Dimension (byte 7) equal to 09
– 01-FF - With Y Dimension (byte 7) equal to 12.
The print quality must be set appropriately (with the PQC command) before the LSS command is issued if
the font is present in the printer (specified by the LFE command).
Self-Defining Fields: If byte 5, bit 7, equals one, then the DATA field includes one or more self-defining
fields. The format of each field is:
L

Data

L and T are single byte values that specify the length and type of self-defining field. The only valid
self-defining field is the terminator field X'02FF', without any data. The character raster patterns
immediately follow this field. The printer ignores any other self-defining fields.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

213

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Character Raster Patterns: Data in this field contains the actual code points (bit patterns) for the font
specified in bytes 0F and 10. If the font identifier matches an existing font ID, and one or more of the code
points specified in bytes 2 and 0B overlap previously specified code points, then the printer replaces the
character patterns of the previously specified code points, regardless of how they were originally loaded.
Note: Printronix recommends that image data bits for the last vertical column of NLQ
character patterns be all zeros. The printer clips the graphics representation of the last vertical
column if NLQ characters are expanded for graphics printing (see “Set Character Cell Size” on
page 182). Resident NLQ text character patterns do not contain image data (dots) in the last
column of the character box.

Chapter 5 IPDS Programming Information

214

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Chapter 6. IPDS Exception Reporting Codes
The following tables contain the exception reporting codes, which the printer sends to the host in the
NACK reply. These codes are in a three-byte format. The first byte, byte 0, is the error group. The
remaining two bytes, bytes 1 and 2, are the individual error identifiers. Table 8 shows the error group
meanings:
Table 10. Exception Reporting Group Codes
Byte 0
80
40
10
08
04
03
02
01

Error Type
“Command Reject - X'80'”
“Intervention Required - X'40'”
“Equipment Check - X'10'”
“Data Check - X'08'”
“Specification Check-Bar Code - X'04'”
“Specification Check-Graphics - X'03'”
“Specification Check-General - X'02'”
“Conditions Requiring Host Notification - X'01'”

Command Reject: Indicates that the printer cannot recognize a received command.
Intervention Required: Indicates that the printer requires operator intervention.
Equipment Check: Indicates that a hardware error has occurred. Data Check: Indicates that the printer
detects a data error when receiving a logical unit from the application program or that the printer detects a
data error while printing the page.
Specification Check: Indicates that the data parameters or values in a received command are invalid.
Condition Requiring Host Notification: Indicates that the printer has detected an error or condition that
should be reported to the host computer.

Command Reject - X'80'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for a command reject condition:
X'800100' Invalid IPDS Command Code

X'800200' Invalid IPDS Command Sequence

Explanation:
1. The command code is not recognized. An error
length on a previous command may have caused the
current data to be processed as a command.
2. The command is not supported.
Alternate Exception Action: None

Explanation: The printer state is invalid for the
received command.
Alternate Exception Action: None

Intervention Required - X'40'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for an intervention required condition:
X'400000' Printer Not Ready

X'400100' Printer Out of Forms

Explanation: The printer needs operator intervention
to tear off a continuous forms paper source so paper
source switching can be done when in 4224
emulation mode.
Alternate Exception Action: None

Alternate Exception Action: None

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

215

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

X'402000' Incorrect Forms Module Selection

X'401300' Tear-Off Required

Alternate Exception Action: None.

Explanation: The printer needs operator
intervention to tear off a continuous forms paper
source so paper source switching can be done.
Alternate Exception Action: None

X'40E000' Forms Jam

X'40E400' Cancel Print Key Pressed

Alternate Exception Action: None.

Explanation: The Cancel Print key was
pressed while the printer was receiving IPDS
data.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

Equipment Check - X'10'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for an equipment check condition:
X'10F100' Permanent Error
Explanation:
1. There was a permanent hardware error.
2. The microcode detected an irrecoverable logic error.
3. The microcode detected a condition that should not
have occurred.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

Data Check - X'08'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for a data check condition:
X'082100' Undefined Character

X'08C100' Position Check

Explanation:
1. An undefined character code has been detected in
Write Text data.
2. An undefined overstrike character code has been
detected.
3. A character has been detected in Write Text
Command data which is undefined at the quality
level specified by the XOA-PQC command.
4. An undefined character code has been detected in
Write Bar Code data.

Explanation: An attempt was made to print
outside the valid printable area.

Alternate Exception Action: For reasons 1-3, print
the default character. For reason 4, there is no
alternate exception action.

Alternate Exception Action: All physical
printing
outside the valid printable area is suppressed.
All data and controls continue processing. The
printer continues to print within the valid
printable area to the greatest possible extent.
For text, this may mean truncating text lines at
the character boundary closest to the edge of
the intersection. For graphics, this may mean
truncating graphics pictures at the pel closest
to the boundary. For image, this may mean
truncating scan lines at the pel closest to the
boundary, or alternatively, not printing any of
the image if any part of the image falls outside
the valid printable area.

Specification Check-Bar Code - X'04'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for a bar code specification check condition:
X'040300' Bar Code Type Requested Is Not
Supported
Explanation: The bar code type requested in the
Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not
supported.

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

X'040400' LCID Requested Is Not Supported
Explanation: The type style/font requested in
the
Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not
supported.

216

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Alternate Exception Action: None.

Alternate Exception Action: Use printer
default.

X'040500' Bar Code Color Requested Is Not
Supported
Explanation: The color requested in the Write Bar

Code Data Descriptor field is not supported.
Alternate Exception Action: Use printer default
color.
X'040600' Bar Code Color Requested Is Not
Supported
Explanation: The unit/module width specified in the
Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not
supported.
Alternate Exception Action: Use closest smaller
width supported or the device default for those
devices with only one fixed default value.

X'040700' Element Height Specified Is Not
Supported
Explanation: The element height specified in
the Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not
supported.
Alternate Exception Action: Use closest
height supported

X'040800' Height Multiplier Specified Is Not
Supported
Explanation: The height multiplier specified in the
Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not
supported.
Alternate Exception Action: Use closest multiplier
supported.

X'040900' Wide/Narrow Ratio Is Not
Supported
Explanation: The wide/narrow ratio specified
in the Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is
not supported.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the printer
default wide element width. The default wide
element width and the specified or default
unit/module width should be such that a
wide/narrow ratio of 2.50 or 3.00 results.

X'040A00' Invalid Symbol Reference Point
Explanation: The symbol reference point given in
the Write Bar Code command is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'040B00' Invalid Bar Code Modifier
Explanation: The bar code modifier, byte 17
of the Bar Code Data Descriptor structured
field, is not a valid or supported value for the
bar code type specified by byte 16 of the same
structured field.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'040C00' Invalid Bar Code Data Length
Explanation: The length of the variable data (as
given in bytes 5-n of the Write Bar Code command)
to be bar-encoded/printed, plus any printer-generated
check digits to be coded/printed, is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'040E00' Check Digit Calculation Error
Explanation: A first check digit calculation
resulting in a value of 10 is defined as an error
in various modifier options (byte 17 of the Bar
Code Data Descriptor structured field) for the
MSI bar code.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'041000' HRI Location Not Supported
Explanation: HRI location specified in the FLAGS
byte of the WBC command is not a supported
location.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'041100' Attempt to Print Portion of
Symbol Outside Block or VPA
Explanation:
1. A portion of the bar code presentation
space, as mapped into the block, extends
outside the bar code block boundaries, or a
portion of the bar code block extends outside
of the logical page (or current overlay).
2. An attempt is made to print a bar code
symbol or HRI outside the physical page.
3. The symbol reference point lies outside the
bar code block, presentation space, or logical
page (or current overlay).
Alternate Exception Action: None.

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

217

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Specification Check-Graphics - X'03'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for a graphics specification check condition:
X'030001' Unallocated Graphic Order or
Command Code
Explanation:
1. An attempt was made to execute an unallocated
order code that is reserved for future use.
2. An attempt was made to execute an unallocated
command code that is reserved for future use.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'030002' Reserved Byte Error or Invalid
Default
Explanation:
1. A reserved byte in the graphic order is not set
to zero.
2. The Set Current Defaults instruction attempts,
in byte 2, to set an invalid or unsupported
attribute.
3. An invalid default byte value was received in
the GDD.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'030003' Incorrect Drawing Order Length
Explanation: A drawing order length is invalid.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'030004' Invalid Attribute Value
Explanation: An attribute value for a graphic
order or for a WGC Set Current Default
instruction is invalid.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard
default value for that attribute.

X'030008' Truncated Order Error
Explanation: An order has been requested that is
not a complete order. This order is one of the
following:
1. A fixed 2-byte order and the second byte is not in
the segment.
2. A long order and the length byte is not in the
segment.
3. A long order and the number of bytes following
the byte containing the length count to the end of
the segment is less than the value of the length
count.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'03000C' Segment Prologue Error
Explanation: A supported order that is not valid
within a prologue was found in a prologue.
The end of a segment was reached without an
End Prologue order.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'03000E' Unsupported Attribute Value
Explanation: An attribute value for a graphic order
or for a WGC Set Current Default instruction is not
supported.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard
default value for that attribute.

X'0300021' Invalid Default
Explanation: The Set Current Defaults
instruction sets an invalid or unsupported
default for an attribute.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'033400' Character Angle Value Not Supported
Explanation: The specific character angle
requested is not supported.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the closest angle
supported by the printer.

X'033E00' Invalid End Prologue
Explanation: An End Prologue was found
outside the prologue section of a segment.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'036000' Area Bracket Error
Explanation: An End Area order has been
executed without a Begin Area order having
previously been executed.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'038000' Begin Area Received Incorrectly
Explanation: Begin Area order received while
Begin Area is already in progress.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

218

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

X'036801' Area Truncation Error
Explanation: A Begin Area order has been
executed in a segment, and the end of the segment
is reached without an End Area order being
executed. Area fill implementation results are printer
dependent.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'036802' Supported Order Invalid in Area
Explanation: A supported order is detected
that is not valid within an area.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
.

X'036803' Pattern Symbol Set Not Available
Explanation: The symbol set identified by the
current Pattern Set is not available.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard
default pattern symbol set.

X'036804' Undefined Pattern Symbol
Explanation: The current pattern symbol is
undefined in the pattern symbol set.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard
default pattern symbol.

X'037001' Invalid Repeat/Append Bit
Explanation: The Begin Segment Repeat/Append
bit has a value of B'10' in chained immediate mode.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'037082' Invalid Repeat/Append Bit
Explanation: The Begin Segment
Repeat/Append bit has a value of B'01'.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'0370C1' Invalid Begin Segment length
Explanation: The Begin Segment parameter length
is invalid.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'039200' Graphic Image Order Sequence
Error
Explanation: A Begin Image order was not
executed before the Image Data order in this
segment.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'039201' Image Data Discrepancy
Explanation: There are insufficient or too many
bytes of data in the Image Data order.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'039300' Graphic Image Bracket Error
Explanation: An End Image order is executed
without a Begin Image order having been
previously executed.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'039301' Incorrect Number of Image Data
Orders
Explanation: The number of Image Data orders
between the Begin Image and End Image orders is
not equal to the number of rows in the image (as
given by the value of height in the Begin Image
order).
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'03C200' Marker Symbol Set Not Available
Explanation: The symbol set identified by the
current Marker Set attribute is not available.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard
default marker symbol set.

X'03C201' Undefined Marker Code
Explanation: A marker code point is undefined in
the current marker symbol set.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard
default marker symbol.

X'03C300' Character Symbol Set Not
Available
Explanation:
1. The symbol set identified by the current
Character Set is not available.
2. The current character set specified in the Set
Character Set order does not have the proper
attributes to be printed in graphics mode.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard
default character symbol set.

X'03C301' Undefined Graphics Character Code
Explanation: A code in a character string is
undefined in the current character symbol set.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard
default character symbol.

X'03D100' Truncated Graphic Image Error
Explanation: A Begin Image order has been
executed in a segment, and the end of the
segment is reached without an End Image order
having been executed.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

219

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

X'03D101' Invalid Order in Graphic Image
Explanation: A Begin Image order has been
executed in a segment, and an order other than a
Comment, Image Data, or End Image order is
executed.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'03D102' Graphic Image Format Not
Supported
Explanation: The value specified for the
graphic image format parameter is not
supported.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'03D103' Image Width Greater Than Maximum
Supported
Explanation: The Width value specified in the
Begin
Image order exceeds the maximum image width
supported by the product.
Alternate Exception Action: The image width is
truncated at the maximum width supported.
X'03E100' Relative Line Outside Coordinate
Space
Explanation: The relative line starts inside the
drawing order coordinate space but goes outside.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'03D104' Image Height Greater Than
Maximum Supported
Explanation: The Height value specified in the
Begin Image order exceeds the maximum
image height supported by the product.
Alternate Exception Action: The image height
is truncated at the maximum height supported.

Specification Check-General - X'02'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for a general specification check condition:
X'020001' Embedded Text Control Code Error
Explanation: Undefined text control code.
Alternate Exception Action: Ignore the control
sequence.

X'020202' Invalid IPDS Command Length
Explanation: The length for a command is not
within the allowed range.
The length of a Request Resource List entry is not a
valid or supported value.
The length specified for a Request Resource List
entry does not match the number of bytes received.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020201' End Suppression Text Control
Error
Explanation: The active Begin Suppression ID
within the current page, overlay, or page
segment is not the same as that specified in the
ES control.
There is no active suppression ID.
X'020205' Invalid Data Structured Field
Length
Explanation: A data structured field has been
received in a WGC or WBCC command that is
less than the minimum allowable length.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020302' IPDS Command Header Length too
Small
Explanation: The length value of a command is
less than 5 (or less than 7 if a correlation ID is
included).
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020305' Area Position Orientation is Not
Supported
Explanation: The orientation specified in the
Area Position structured field of the WGC or
WBCC command is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020401' End Page Encountered During Active
Suppression
Explanation: The End Page control was
encountered before a text suppression ended.
Alternate Exception Action: Process the object as
if the corresponding End Suppression control
sequence appeared at the end of the object. That is,
all of the data following the Begin Suppression
control sequence in the object is processed and
suppressed.

X'020402' Acknowledge Reply Response
Continuation Request is Invalid
Explanation: The printer received a command
whose response continuation bit is on but there
is no response to continue.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

220

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

X'020405' Area Position Reference System is
Not Supported
Explanation: The reference system specified in the
Area Position structured field of the WGC or WBCC
command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020501' Invalid Spanning Sequence
Explanation: A Write Text or Write Graphics
command is required to complete a partial
order, control, or double-byte character code
and another command was received other than
an XOA command.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020502' Unsupported Baseline Move
Explanation: Unsupported advancement of the
baseline coordinate toward the I-axis.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020505' Structured Field Unit-Base Invalid
Explanation: The unit-base (measurement
units) specified in the Output Control or the Data
Descriptor structured field of the WGC or WBCC
command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020601' Begin Suppression Error
Explanation: Begin Suppression encountered in
the same unit (page, segment or overlay) before
previous suppression in that unit ended.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020605' Structured Field Units Invalid
Explanation:
1. The units specified in the Output Control or
the Data Descriptor structured field of the WGC
or WBCC command is not a valid or supported
value.
2. The result of the calculation cannot be
represented in the printer. This may result from
the WGC GDD window limits being very close
together.
3. Coordinate overflow while scaling graphics.
Possible if scaling coordinates require
multiplication by a value greater than 1.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020705'
Structured
Field
Extents
Not
Supported
Explanation: The extents specified in the Output
Control or Data Descriptor structured field of the
WGC or WBCC command are not a valid or
supported value. The window values of the WGC
GDD structured field are not consistent; therefore,
the value of XL is larger than the value of XR or the
value of YB is larger than the value of YT.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020805' Invalid Mapping Option
Explanation: A mapping option specified in the
Output Control structured field of the WGC or
WBCC command is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020905' Invalid Axis Offsets
Explanation: The axis offsets specified in the
Output Control structured field of the WGC or
WBCC command are not valid or supported values.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020B05' Invalid Structured Field Identifier
Explanation: A two-byte structured field
identifier in a WGC or WBCC command is
invalid or out of sequence.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020F01' Invalid Text Orientation
Explanation: Baseline or Inline orientation specified
in Set Text Orientation is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: Use an inline
orientation of 0 degrees and a baseline orientation
of 90 degrees.

X'021001' Invalid Margin
Explanation: The margin position is not a valid
or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

221

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

X'021101' Invalid Baseline Increment
Explanation: The value of the baseline increment is
not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021201' Invalid Intercharacter Adjustment
Explanation:
1. The value of the intercharacter adjustment is
not a valid or supported value.
2. The intercharacter adjustment direction is not
a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action:
1. Ignore the control sequence and continue
presentation with the parameter values
according to the hierarchy (the hierarchy is the
last valid value received or if none received then
use the LPD value).
2. Use direction = zero.
Note: In an LPD command, no Alternate
Exception Action occurs.

X'021202' Font Storage is Full
Explanation: There is insufficient pattern storage to
store the font transmitted with the Load Symbol Set
command. There is insufficient storage to load the
data transmitted with the Load Font Equivalence
command.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'021401' Invalid Absolute Move Inline Value
Explanation: The Absolute Move Inline parameter
value is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021301' Invalid Absolute Move Baseline
Value
Explanation: The Absolute Move Baseline
parameter value is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021403'
Explanation: Unsupported Baseline Move
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021802' Invalid Font ID
Explanation:
1. The two-byte Font Identifier on a Load Symbol
Set or Load Font Equivalence command is not a
valid or supported value.
2. The one-byte Font Identifier value on the Load
Font Equivalence command is not a valid or
supported value.
3. A font is referenced on a Set Font control, a
Logical Page Description, a Load Symbol Set, a
Write Graphics, or Write Bar Code command, but
the font has not been previously identified by the
Load Font Equivalence command.
4. The font or symbol set referenced in a Logical
Page Description, Write Text, or Write Graphics
command is defined within the current Load Font
Equivalence but is not loaded in the printer.
Alternate Exception Action:
1. None.
2. None.
3. Substitute the active font for the specified local
font and continue processing.
4. Substitute the active coded font for the specified
local font and continue processing.

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

222

X'021402' Font to be Deleted Not Found
Explanation: The single byte font specified by
the Deactivate Font command is not in the
machine.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'021502' Invalid DF Font
Explanation: The Loaded Font Identifier field is
required in the Deactivate Font command;
however, it is not present or its value is not a
valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'021701' Invalid Variable Space Increment
Explanation: The value of the variable space
increment as specified in a text control is not a
valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

X'021702' Invalid DF Deletion Type
Explanation: The Deletion Type on a Deactivate
Font command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021901' Repeat String Length Error
Explanation: The Repeat String target string
length is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021902' Multiple Occurrences of the Same LFE
Local ID
Explanation: Explanation: The one-byte Local
Identifier value in the Load Font Equivalence
command has been used more than once, making
the Two-Byte Font Identifier reference ambiguous.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021C01' Invalid Embedded Text Control
Sequence
Explanation: A text control sequence contains
a code other than X'D3' following X'2B'.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021D02' Invalid LFE Identifier
Explanation: One or more of the following font
parameters listed in the LFE or their combination is
not valid or supported: Character Set ID, Code Page
ID, Uniform Character Increment, and Proportional
Increment Coefficient Table.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021E01' Invalid Text Control Length
Explanation: The length of a text control is not
valid.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021E02' Mismatch Between Font and XOA
Print Quality Control
Explanation:
1. The combination of parameters specified in LFE
are not supported together with the quality indicated
by XOA Print Quality Control.
2. The Font (Style) ID specified in the LFE is invalid
or unsupported or is not valid with the other font
parameters.
Alternate Exception Action: Choose “Best Fit”
font. Note: This error will be flagged when an
attempt to present the font is processed.

X'021F01' Repeat String Length Error
Explanation: Repeat String control on a Write
Text command has nonzero fill count but zero
string length.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021F02' Mismatch of LFE Two-Byte Loaded
Font ID Parameters
Explanation: Two fonts have been assigned the
same two-byte Loaded Font ID by the LFE
command, but one or more of the following
attributes differ: Character Set ID, Code Page ID,
Font (Style) ID, Uniform Character Increment,
Proportional Increment Coefficient Table.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'022602' Invalid LSS X Box Size
Explanation: The Box X size, specified in Byte
6 of the Load Symbol Set command, is not a
valid or supported value or is incompatible with
the specified font.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'022702' Invalid LSS Y Box Size
Explanation: The Box Y size, specified in Byte 7 of
the Load Symbol Set command, is not a valid or
supported value or is incompatible with the specified
font.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'022802' LSS Pattern Download Format
Reserved or Not Supported
Explanation: The specified pattern download
format in LSS is either a reserved value or not
supported.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'022902' Invalid LSS Additional Parameter Byte
Length
Explanation: The additional parameter byte length
specified in the LSS command is outside the range
X'0D' through X'FF' or is not a supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'023101' Invalid LCC Number of Copies
Explanation: The Number of Copies value
specified on the Load Copy Control command is
not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: Proceed as
though the number of copies field stated 1.

X'023201' Invalid LCC Number of Copies

X'023401' Invalid LCC Copy Group Byte

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

223

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Explanation: There is an invalid or unsupported
Load Copy Control keyword in the group entry.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

Count
Explanation:
1. The number of bytes in Load Copy Control
group is not a multiple of two byte pairs.
2. The number of bytes in Load Copy Control
group is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'023601' Invalid or Unsupported Load Copy
Control Simplex/Duplex Parameter
Explanation: The LCC command simplex/duplex
parameter is invalid or unsupported.
Alternate Exception Action: If invalid, none. If
unsupported, the printer prints simplex.

X'023A02' Maximum Number of Fonts
Allowed by the Printer Exceeded
Explanation: An attempt was made to
download more fonts than the printer can
support.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'023F02' Font Index Not Loaded
Explanation:
1. The font inline sequence in Load Font
Equivalence command is not supported or not
supported with the current Text Orientation.
2. The Font Index specified in a Load Font
Equivalence command called out by a Set Coded
Font Local text control is not loaded.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024201' WIC Pel Count < Minimum
Required
Explanation: The Target or Source Pel Count
value on the Write Image Control command is
less than 1.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024301' WIC Pel Count > Maximum Allowed
Explanation: The Target or Source Pel Count value
on the Write Image Control command is greater
than the valid or supported maximum.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024401' WIC Scan Count < Minimum
Required
Explanation: The Target or Source Scan Count
value on the Write Image Control command is
less than 1.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024501' WIC Scan Count > Maximum Allowed
Explanation: The Target or Source Scan Count
value on the Write Image Control command is
greater than the valid or supported maximum.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024601' Invalid WIC Source Image Format
Explanation:
1. The Compression Algorithm value (Byte 8) is
not a valid or supported value.
2. The (Pel) Data Format value (Byte 9) in the
Write Image Control command is not X'00'.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024701' Invalid WIC Scale Factor Value
Explanation:
1. The Pel Count Scale Factor value on the Write
Image Control command is not a valid or supported
value.
2. The Scan Count Scale Factor value on the Write
Image Control command does not equal the Pel
Count Scale Factor.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024702' Invalid LFE Font Inline Sequence
Explanation: The Font Inline Sequence
parameter in a Load Font Equivalence
command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None

X'024801' Invalid WIC Scan Line Direction
Explanation: The Scan Line Direction parameter
value on the Write Image Control command is not a
valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024802' Invalid Font Section Number in
LSS command
Explanation: The section number specified in
the LSS command is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

224

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

X'024901' Invalid WIC Scan Sequence Direction
Explanation: The Scan Line Sequence Direction
value specified on the Write Image Control
command is not plus ninety degrees from the Scan
Line Direction value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Note: Plus ninety from 270, (X'8700') must be
X'0000'.

X'024902' Invalid Starting Code Point in LSS
command
Explanation: The Starting Code Point in the
LSS command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024A01' Invalid WIC Coordinate Specification
Explanation:
1. The Coordinate Definition value on the Write
Image Control command is not a valid or supported
value.
2. The First Pel Location (X or I Direction) value on
the Write Image Control command is not a valid or
supported value.
3. The First Pel Location (Y or B Direction) value on
the Write Image Control command is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024A02' Invalid WIC Coordinate
Specification
Explanation: The Ending Code Point specified
in the LSS command is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024B02' Invalid Bit Values in Flag Bytes of LSS
Command
Explanation: One or more of the bits in the two
Flags bytes of the LSS command Extended Form,
Clear/Overstrike, Skip, APA/CB/OB, Use S. E. T. is
not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024C02' Invalid LSS Data Length
Explanation:
1. The LSS additional parameter byte length
does not correlate with the LSS data length.
2. An LSS self-identifying field length is not a
valid or supported value or does not correlate
with the LSS data length.
3. The amount of bit image data in the LSS
command does not correspond with the number
of code points, box size, and pattern download
format.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'025301' Invalid WIC Color Value
Explanation: The Color value of the WIC command
is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: Use printer default
value.

X'025503' Unsupported Color or Color Attribute
Explanation:
1. The text color is not a valid or supported
value.
2. The text color precision is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: If the attribute
value is not valid, ignore the control and
continue presentation with the value that was in
effect prior to this control sequence. If the
attribute value is valid but unsupported for this
printer, use the printer default color.
X'026102' Invalid LPD Y Units/Unit-Base
Explanation:
1. On the Logical Page Description command,
the Y units per unit-base value is not a valid or
supported value.
2. On the Set Media Size command, the units
per unit-base value is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026002' Invalid LPD X Units/Unit-Base
Explanation: On the Logical Page Description
command, the X units per unit-base value is not a
valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

225

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

X'026202' Invalid LPD X-Extent
Explanation: On the Logical Page Description
command, the X-Extent is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026302' Invalid LPD Y-Extent
Explanation: On the Logical Page Description
command, the Y-Extent is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026401' Insufficient Control Storage for Image
Explanation: There is insufficient control storage to
print the image data transmitted with the Write
Image command.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026402' Invalid LPD Unit-Base
Explanation: On the Logical Page Description
command, the unit-base is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026802' Invalid LPD Inline Direction
Explanation: On a Logical Page Description
command the Inline Sequence Direction value is not
a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: Use an inline
sequence direction of 0 degrees and a baseline
sequence direction of 90 degrees.

X'026902' Invalid LPD Baseline Direction
Explanation: On a Logical Page Description
command the Baseline Sequence Direction
value is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: Use an inline
sequence direction of 0 degrees and a baseline
sequence direction of 90 degrees.

X'026A01' Insufficient Source Image Data
Explanation: The number of source image bytes
received < the number implied in the Write Image
Control command.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026A02'
Invalid
LPD
Initial
Inline
Coordinate
Explanation: On a Logical Page Description
command, the initial inline coordinate value is
not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026B01' Excess Source Image Data
Explanation: The number of source image bytes
received > the number implied in the Write Image
Control command.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026B02' Invalid LPD Initial Baseline
Coordinate
Explanation: On a Logical Page Description
command, the initial baseline coordinate value
is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'027002' Invalid Units Value in an XOH SMS
Command
Explanation: The units value in an XOH SMS
command is invalid or unsupported.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'027302' Invalid SMS Y-Extent
Explanation: On the Set Media Size command, the
Y-extent is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'027202' Invalid SMS X-Extent
Explanation: On the Set Media Size command,
the X-extent is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'028101' Insufficient Storage for Overlay or
Page Segment
Explanation: There is insufficient storage to
process an overlay or page segment.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'028501' Invalid DO Parameter Value
Explanation: The Overlay Identifier on the
Deactivate Overlay command is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'028A01' Invalid DPS Parameter Value
Explanation: The Page Segment Identifier on the
Deactivate Page Segment command is not a valid
or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029001' Overlay Number Outside Valid
Range
Explanation:
1. The Overlay Identifier on the Begin Overlay
command is not a valid or supported value.
2. The Overlay Identifier on the Include Overlay
command is not a valid or supported value.
3. The Overlay Identifier on a Load Copy
Control command is not a valid or supported
value. Alternate Exception Action: None.

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

226

X'027402' Invalid SMS Unit Base
Explanation: On the Set Media Size command,
the unit-base is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

X'029101' BO Overlay Number Already Loaded
Explanation: The host attempted to download an
overlay from the Begin Overlay command that
already exists in the printer.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029102' Invalid Request Resource List
Parameter
Explanation:
1. The Requested Ordering parameter of a
Request Resource List order is not a valid or
supported value.
2. The Entry Index parameter of a Request
Resource List order is not a valid or supported
value.
3. The Resource Qualifier parameter of a
Request Resource List order is not a valid or
supported value.
4. The Resource Type parameter on the
Request Resource List order is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029201' Overlay Number Not Loaded
Explanation: The overlay identified by the Overlay
Identifier on the Include Overlay, Deactivate Overlay
or LCC command was not loaded or was already
deleted prior to its attempted use.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029202' Invalid Print Quality Control
Parameter:
Explanation: The Print Quality Control
parameter is X'00', which is a reserved value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029301' Recursive Overlay Invocation:
Explanation: An infinite nesting loop has occurred
with the Include Overlay command (for example, an
overlay has included itself).
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029401' Recursive Overlay Invocation:
Explanation:
1. The Page Segment Identifier on the Include
Page Segment command is not a valid or
supported value.
2. The Page Segment Identifier on the Begin
Page Segment command is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029501' Page Segment Number Already
Loaded
Explanation: The host attempted to download a
page segment that already exists in the printer.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029601' Page Segment Number Not
Loaded
Explanation: The page segment identified by
the Page Segment Identifier on the Include
Page Segment or Deactivate Page Segment
command was not loaded or was already
deleted prior to its attempted use.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029701' Overlay Nesting Limit Exceeded
Explanation: Depth of overlay nesting is greater
than the maximum depth.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029801' Suppression Number Outside
Valid Range
Explanation:
1. On a Write Text command, the Begin
Suppression number value is not a valid or
supported value.
2. In a LCC command, the suppression number
value is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action:
1. Ignore the control sequence.
2. None.

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

227

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

X'029803' Temporary Baseline Move Error
Explanation:
1. The temporary baseline increment is not a valid
or supported value.
2. The temporary baseline move direction is not a
valid or supported value.
3. The temporary baseline move precision is not a
valid or supported value.
4. Unsupported multiple offset temporary baseline
move.
5. Unable to support temporary baseline move by
printing full size characters.
Alternate Exception Action:
1. None for reasons 1 through 4.
2. For reason 5, present according to the
substitution method.

X'02A401' Logical-page boundary in the
X-direction cannot be represented
Explanation: In either the page or page
overlay, the sum of the logical page origin and
the logical page size in the X direction exceeds
the maximum supported.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02A501' Logical-page boundary in the
Y-direction cannot be represented
Explanation: In either the page or page overlay, the
sum of the logical page origin and the logical page
size in the Y direction exceeds the maximum
supported.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02AC01' Insufficient Storage to Print the
Sheet
Explanation: Page is too large for main
storage.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02AD01' Invalid Logical Page Position
Parameter
Explanation: The X Coordinate value on the
Logical Page Position command is not a valid or
supported value. The Y Coordinate value on the
Logical Page Position command is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02AE01' Invalid Include Overlay Position
Parameter
Explanation:
1. The X-Coordinate value on the Include
Overlay command is not a valid or supported
value.
2. The Y-Coordinate value on the Include
Overlay command is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02C101' Maximum Number of Simplex
Keywords in an LCC Command
Explanation: More than one simplex operation
keyword has been specified in an LCC command
copy group.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02C102' Load Equivalence Internal Value
Not Unique
Explanation: The first two bytes of two or more
list entries on the Load Equivalence command
are not unique. Setting both external values to
the same value will not prevent the error.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02C602' Invalid Load Equivalence Mapping
Type
Explanation: The Mapping Type on the Load
Equivalence command is not X'0100'.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02C801' An unsupported Input Media
Source ID was Specified
Explanation: An unsupported Input Media
Source ID was specified in an XOH-SIMS
command.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02C802' Invalid Internal/External Value on LE
Explanation: The Internal or External value on a
Load Equivalence command is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

228

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Conditions Requiring Host Notification - X'01'
X'010100' Media Size or Input Media Source ID
Changed
Explanation:
1. The size of the media in one or more of the
installed input media sources was changed.
2. The input media source ID of one or more of the
installed input media sources was changed.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Note: Not reported in 4224 Emulation Mode.

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

229

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This page is intentionally left blank

Chapter 6 IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

230

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example
The following pages contain examples of the printing capabilities of the S828 Printer and one IPDS coding
example.

Text Print Samples
Various print styles are available with this Printronix printer. The data stream sent by the host computer
determines the print style, characters per inch, and character set.
There are four print qualities available:
This is Fast Draft Mode
This is DP mode, printed in the Gothic font,
This is DP Text mode, printed in the Courier font.
This is NLQ mode, printed in the Courier font.
Pitches include:
10 characters per inch,
12 characters per inch,
15 characters per inch
16.7 characters per inch in DP quality
Printer can also be Underscored to emphasize important points.

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 231

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Bar Codes
The following are sample bar code labels printed with the S828 Printer:

Figure 30. Bar Code Example in IPDS

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 232

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Graphics Patterns
The following example shows the area fill patterns, line widths, line types, and marker symbols available
with this printer.

Figure 31. Graphic Patterns Example in IPDS

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 233

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Graphics Example
The following drawing is an example of the graphics capabilities of the S828 Printer. The actual IPDS
graphics data stream commands necessary to draw this graphic follow the example.

Figure 32. Graphic Example in IPDS
Data Stream for Graphics Example
********* BEGIN PAGE
0009D6AF0000000000
********* Write Graphics Control
003CD68400000BAC6B000000000000A0
0010A66B0038403DE030001000000000
001CA6BB00003840384000000000DB0010001000F000
000000000000
********* Write Graphics Command Header
037FD68500
********* Begin Segment
700C000000000000036C00000000
********* Set Character Cell Size
3304010E021C
********* Character String
C31DF32B0E10
********* String Data - EXPENITURE BY DEPARTMENT
C5E7D7C5D5C4C9E3E4D9C540C2E840C4C5D7C1D9E3D4C5D5E3
********* Character String
C313F8710BF4
********* String Data - FIRST HALF 1979
C6C9D9E2E340C8C1D3C640F1F9F7F9
********* Key Circles, Set Line Type979
1800
********* Color
0A00
********* Set Pattern Symbol
2806

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 234

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

********* Begin Area
6840
********* Full Arc
C706ED680A8CF000
********* End Area
6000
********* Color
0A00
********* Set Pattern Symbol
2803
********* Begin Area
6840
********* Full Arc
C706F6DC0A8CF000
********* End Area
6000
********* Color
0A00
********* Set Pattern Symbol
280D
********* Begin Area
6840
********* Full Arc
C706FFB00A8CF000
********* End Area
6000
********* Color
0A00
********* Set Pattern Symbol
280D
********* Set Line Type
1800
********* Begin Area
6840
********* Fillet
C528EDB80654F1F00492F6280924
FA6000654FE98008702D00438070800FA
OB4002760CA8FF1F0F78010E
********* Set Line Type
1803
********* Line At Current Position
810C0F78FB14EDBBFB14EDB80654
********* End Area
6000
********* Color
0A08
********* Set Pattern Symbol
2800
********* Set Line Type
1800
********* Begin Area
6840
********* Fillet
C528EDB8021CF1F00087F628
0384FA6001C2FE98FE3E02D0
00B40708FE110B40FFA60CA8
FD8A0F78FCD6
********* Set Line Type
1808
********* Line At Current Position
810C0F78FB14EDB8FB14EDB8021C
********* End Area
6000
********* Color
0A00
********* Set Pattern Symbol
2803

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 235

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Set Line Type
1800
********* Begin Area
6840
********* Fillet
C528EDB8021CF1F00087F628
0384FA6001C2FE98FE3E02D0
00B40708FE110B40FFA60CA8FD8A0F78FCD6
********* Set Line Type
1808
********* Line
810C0F78FB14EDB8FB14EDB8021C
********* End Area
6000
********* Color
0A08
********* Set Pattern Symbol
2800
********* Set Line Type
1800
********* Begin Area
6840
********* Fillet
C528EDB8FE3EF1F0FD8AF628
FEC5FA60FE3EFE98FC7C02D
FE3E0708FBC80B40FCD6
0CA8FC220F78FBC8
********* Set Line Type
1808
********* Line At Current Position
810C0F78FB14EDB8FB14EDB801C2
********* End Area
6000
********* Color
0A00
********* Set Pattern Symbol
2806
********* Set Line Type
1800
********* Begine Area
6840
********* Fillet
C528EDB8FE3EF1F0FD8AF628
FEC5FA60FE3EFE98FC7C02D0FE3E0708FBC80B40FCD6
0CA8FC220F78FBC8
********* Set Line Type
1808
********* Line At Current Position
810C0F78FB14EDB8FB14EDB801C2
********* End Area
6000
********* Axes and Tic Marks, Set Line Type
1800
********* Set Line Width
1902
********* Color
0A00
********* Line
C108EDB8FB14EDB80951
********* Line
C108EDB8FB140F78FB14
********* Line
C108EDB8FB14ED04FB14
********* Line
C108EDB8FCD6ED04FCD6
********* Line
C108EDB8FE98ED04FE98

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 236

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

********* Line
C108EDB8005AED04005A
********* Line
C108EDB8021CED04021C
********* Line
C108EDB803DEED0403DE
********* Line
C108EDB805A0ED0405A0
********* Line
C108EDB80762ED040762
********* Line
C108EDB80924ED040924
********* Line
C108EDB8FBF5ED5EFBF5
********* Line
C108EDB8FDB7ED5EFDB7
********* Line
C108EDB8FF79ED5EFF79
********* Line
C108EDB8013BED5E013B
********* Line
C108EDB802FDED5E02FD
********* Line
C108EDB804BFED5E04BF
********* Line
C108EDB80681ED5E0681
********* Line
C108EDB80843ED5E0843
********* Line
C108F358FB14F358FA8D
********* Line
C108FA60FB14FA60FA8D
********* Line
C1080168FB140168FA8D
********* Line
C1080870FB140870FA8D
********* Line
C1080F78FB140F78FA8D
********* Letters and Numbers, Set Character Cell
330400000000
********* Character String, DEPT. A
C30BEEC60A32
C4C5D7E34B40C1
********* Character String, DEPT. B
C30BF7EA0A32
C4C5D7E34B40C2
********* Character String, DEPT. C
C30B00E10A32
C4C5D7E34B40C3
********* Character String, 5
C305F2FEF9AC
F5
********* Character String, 10
C306F9ACF9AC
F1F0
********* Character String, 15
C30600BAF9AC
F1F5
********* Character String, 20
C30607BCF9AC
F2F0
********* Character String, 25
C3060EC4F9AC
F2F5
********* Character String, WEEKS
C309FD30F844
E6C5C5D2E2

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 237

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

********* Character String, 80
C306EB4208ca
F8F0
********* Character String, 70
C306EB420708
F7F0
********* Character String, 60
C306EB420546
F6F0
********* Character String, 50
C306EB420384
F5F0
********* Character String, 40
C306EB4201C2
F4F0
********* Character String, 30
C306EB420000
F3F
********* Character String, 20
C306EB42FE3E
F2F0
********* Character String, 10
C306EB42FC7C
F1F0
********* Character String, 0
C305EBF6FABA
F0
********* Character Angle
3404000005A0
********* Character String, 1000
C308EAE800B4
F1F0F0F0
********* END
0005D65D00
********* END PAGE
0005D6BF00

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 238

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

IPDS Coding Example
The S828 Printer produced this example of text, bar codes, and block graphic characters printing on the
front continuous forms paper source. The code used to print the example appears in Table 11.

Figure 33. Print Sample from an IPDS Application Program
The following chart is an example of an IPDS application program that prints the block graphic characters,
two bar codes, and text information shown in Table 9, printing on the front continuous forms paper source.
The first column (IPDS Commands) contains abbreviations of the IPDS instructions that are coded in
column 2. Column 2 (Hexadecimal Code) contains the hexadecimal code that produces the characters, bar
codes, and text pictured in Table 9. Column 3 (Code Explanation) explains each command element.
When the application is actually coded, the hexadecimal code of each command may be entered in one
stream. The IPDS command abbreviations in the first column and the explanation of each part of the
command in the last column, are comments.
Table 11. IPDS Coding Example
IPDS Command
********
SHS
—
—
X0A(EHC)
—
—
—
—
—

Hexadecimal Code
Printer Initialization
0005
D697
00
000A
D633
00
F600
C1
01

Code Explanation
Control Length
Set Home State
Flag Byte
Control Length
Execute Order Any State
Flag Byte
Exception Handling Order
Report All Exceptions
Do Not Take Alternate Action

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 239

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 11. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command
—
XOA(DBD)
—
—
—
LPD
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
LPP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
XOH(SMS)

Hexadecimal Code
01
0007
D633
00
F200
0030
D6CF
00
00
00
3840
3840
00
00
00
00
00
00
0000
00000000
0000
0000
2D00
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
FFFF
FF
FFFF
000F
D66D
00
00
000000
00
000000
0000
000E

Code Explanation
Print All Data and Exit
Control Length
Execute Order Any Style
Flag Byte
Discard Buffer Data
Control Length
Load Page Descriptor
Flag Byte
Units Base Value equals (10 in.)
Reserved
X Units per Base Value
Y Units per Base Value
Reserved
3570 Width of Page (Units)
Reserved
1EF0 Length of Page (Units)
Reserved
No Ordered Page
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
X-Axis Orientation (0 degrees)
Y-Axis Orientation (90 degrees)
Initial X Displacement
Initial Y Displacement
Initial Left Margin
Intercharacter Increment
Reserved
Baseline Increment (Use Default)
Local Font ID (Use Default)
Text Color (Use Default)
Control Length
Load Page Position
Flag Byte
Reserved
X Displacement
Reserved
Y Displacement
Reserved
Control Length

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 240

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
LFE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
XOA(PQC)
—
—
—
—
XOH(SIMS)
—
—
—
—

Hexadecimal Code
D68F
00
1700
00
3840
3570
1EF0
0015
D63F
00
07
0007
0000
0000
0025
000B
0000
00
80
00
0008
D633
00
F800
AB
0008
D68F
00
1500
00

********

Begin Page

BP
—
—
—

0009
D6AF
00
00000000

********

Write Text Data

Code Explanation
Execute Order Home State
Flag Byte
Set Media Size (SMS)
Units Base Value equals (10 in.)
Units per Base Value
X-Extent of Physical Medium
Y-Extent of Physical Medium
Control Length
Load Font Equivalence
Flag Byte
Local ID
Loaded Font ID
Character Rotation (0 degrees)
Reserved
Code Page ID (USA)
Font Style ID (10 CPI, Courier)
Reserved
Reserved
Font Attribute (In printer)
Reserved
Control Length
Execute Order Any State
Flag Byte
Print Quality Control
Select NLQ
Control Length
Execute Order Home State
Flag Byte
Select Input Media Source
Front Paper Source

Control Length
Begin Page
Flag Byte
Data ** Ignored

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 241

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command
WT
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
WT
—
—
—
—
—
WT
—
—
—
—
—
WT
—
—
—
—
—
—
WT
—
—
—
—
—
WT
—
—
—
—
—
WT

Hexadecimal Code
0014
262D
00
2BD3
03F107
04C709D8
04D20F78
F2F8
0011
D62D
00
2BD3
04C61194
F1F2F3F4F5F6F
000D
D62D
00
2BD3
04C62058
F9F9
0013
D62D
00
2BD3
04C709D8
04D21248
F6F5F2F3
000E
D62D
00
2BD3
04C613B0
F8F0F0
0011
D62D
00
2BD3
04C62058
F1F4FFC5C5C5
0014

Code Explanation
Control Length
Write Text
Flag Byte
Escape Sequence
Set Coded Font Local
Absolute Move Inline
Absolute Move Baseline
Data '28'
Control Length
Write Text
Flag Byte
Escape Sequence
Absolute Move Inline
Data '123456'
Control Length
Write Text
Flag Byte
Escape Sequence
Absolute Move Inline
Data '99'
Control Length
Write Text
Flag Byte
Escape Sequence
Absolute Move Inline
Absolute Move Baseline
Data '6523'
Control Length
Write Text
Flag Byte
Escape Sequence
Absolute Move Inline
Data '800'
Control Length
Write Text
Flag Byte
Escape Sequence
Absolute Move Inline
Data '14 EEE'
Control Length

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 242

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command
—
—
—
—
—
—
WT
—
—
—
—
—
WT
—
—
—
—
—

Hexadecimal Code
D62D
00
2BD3
04C70E10
04D21518
F7F3F2F4F5
000E
D62D
00
2BD3
04C61AB8
F0F9F9
0013
D62D
00
2BD3
04C628C8
F1F262F1F661F8F6

********

Write Graphics Control

WGC
—
—
(GAP)
—
—
—
—
—
(GDD)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

002C
D684
00
000B
AC6B
0000
0000
0000
A0
001C
A6BB
00
00
3840
3840
00000000
0000
3570
1EF0

Code Explanation
Write Text
Flag Byte
Escape Sequence
Absolute Move Inline
Absolute Move Baseline
Data '73245'
Control Length
Write Text
Flag Byte
Escape Sequence
Absolute Move Inline
Data '099'
Control Length
Write Text
Flag Byte
Escape Sequence
Absolute Move Inline
Data '12/16/86'

Control Length
Write Graphics Control
Flag Byte
Field Length
Graphics Area Position Control
Inline (X) Coordinate Position
Baseline (Y) Coordinate Position
Orientation (0 degrees)
Absolute X, Absolute Y
Field Length
Graphics Data Descriptor
Unit Base (10 in.)
Reserved
X Units/Unit Base
Y Units/Unit Base
Reserved
X Left Limit of Window
X Right Limit of Window
Y Top Limit of Window

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 243

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command
—
—
—

Hexadecimal Code
0000
00000000
0000

Code Explanation
Y Bottom Limit of Window
Reserved
Graphics Flags ** Ignored

003D
D685
00
70
0C
00000000
00
06
002A
00000000
33
04
021C
02D0
38
07
05
C3
0BF4
1734
D4
C3
10
1680
1734
F6F3CAF3F0F3CA
F4F9F8CAF8
C3
07
21C0
1248
C5F4F8
0005
D65D

Control Length
Write Graphics
Flag Byte
Begin Segment Introducer
Length of Following Parameter
Reserved
Flags
Append Segment
Length of Segment
Reserved
Set Character Cell Size
Length of Data
Width of Cell
Height of Cell
Set Character String
Local Character Set ID
Character String
Field String
X Coordinate (Units)
Y Coordinate (Units)
Data 'M'
Character String
Field Length
X Coordinate (Units)
Y Coordinate (Units)
Data '63-303-498-8'

******** Write Graphics
WG
—
—
(BSI)
—
—
—
—
—
—
(SCCS)
—
—
—
(SCS)
—
(CS)
—
—
—
—
(CS)
—
—
—
—
—
(CS)
—
—
—
—
END
—

Character String
Field Length
X Coordinate (Units)
Y Coordinate (Units)
Data 'E48'
Control Length
End (Graphics)

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 244

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command
—

Hexadecimal Code
00

********

Write Bar Code Control

WBCC
—
—
(BCAP)
—
—
—
—
—
(BCDD)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

002B
D680
00
000B
AC6B
0000
0000
0000
A0
001B
A6EB
00
00
3840
3840
3840
2FD0
0000
0C
01
FF
0000
0E
02D0
01
0019

Code Explanation
Flag Byte

Control Length
Write Bar Code Control (BC)
Flag Byte
Field Length
BC Area Position Control
X Coordinate of BC Area
Y Coordinate of BC Area
Orientation of Bar Code (0 Degrees)
Absolute X, Absolute Y
Field Length
Bar Code Data Descriptor
Unit Base (10 in.)
Reserved
X Units/Unit Base
Y Units/Unit Base
X Extent of Block (Width)
Y Extent of Block (Height)
Reserved
Bar Code Type (2 of 5 Interleaved)
No Check Digit
User Printer Default LFID
Select Color (Black)
Unit Module Width (.014 in.)
Element Height (720 Units)
Height Multiplier
Wide/Narrow Ratio

******** Write Bar Codes
WBC
—
—
—
—
—
—

0013
Control Length
D681
Write Bar Code
00
Flag Byte
20
Bar Code Flag
2544
X Coordinate
0168
Y Coordinate
F2F8F6F5F1F3F8F1F0 Data '286523810'

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 245

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command
WBC
—
—
—
—
—
—
END
—
—

Hexadecimal Code
00E
D681
00
20
28C8
0D5C
F7F3F2F4
0005
D65D
00

********

End of Page

EP
—
—

0005
D6BF
00

Code Explanation
Control Length
Write Bar Code
Flag Byte
Bar Code Flag
X Coordinate
Y Coordinate
Data '7324'
Control Length
End (Bar Code)
Flag Byte

Control Length
End Page
Flag Byte

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example 246

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Appendix A. Code Pages
The EBCDIC code charts contains information about the code pages that the Printronix S828 Model
Printers use on the Ethernet IPDS attachments.
See the “ASCII Code Pages” for information about the code pages for Ethernet ASCII attachments.
You can use the following charts to determine the actual character printed for any code page and font
combination.

EBCDIC Code Pages (IPDS)
The table below lists the EBCDIC code pages used by the S828 Printer, and also provides page
references so you can determine what code page contains the characters you want to use.
Code
Page
37
260
273
274
275
277
278
280
281
282
284
285
290
297
420
423
424
500
813
833
838
870
871
875
880
890
892
893
924
1025

Character Set Name
USA/Canada/Canadian Bilingual
Canadian French
Austrian/German
Belgian Old
Brazilian
Danish/Norwegian
Finnish/Swedish
Italian
Japanese English
Portuguese
Spanish/Spanish Speaking
English (UK)/Ireland
Japanese Katakana
French/French Azerty
Arabic
Greek (Old)
Hebrew Bulletin
International 5/Swiss/Belgian
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7) + euro
Korean
Thai
Latin 2/ROECE
Icelandic
Greek New + euro
Cyrillic
Yugoslav (Old)
OCR-A
OCR-B
Latin 9 (ISO 8859) + euro
Cyrillic Multilingual

Appendix A. Code Pages

247

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Code
Page
1026
1097
1112
1122
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149

PTX‐S828

Character Set Name
Latin-5 Turkey
Farsi
Baltic Multilingual
Estonian
USA/Canada + euro
Austrian/German + euro
Danish/Norwegian + euro
Finnish/Swedish + euro
Italian + euro
Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro
English/UK + euro
French + euro
International 5/Belgian New + euro
Icelandic + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

248

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

USA/Canada/Canadian Bilingual
Code Page 00037

Figure 34. CP00037

USA/Canada/Canadian Bilingual

Appendix A. Code Pages

249

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Canadian French
Code Page 00260

Figure 35. CP00260

Canadian French

Appendix A. Code Pages

250

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Austrian/German
Code Pages 273

Figure 36. CP00273

Austrian/German

Appendix A. Code Pages

251

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Belgian Old
Code Pages 274

Figure 37. CP00274

Belgian Old

Appendix A. Code Pages

252

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Brazilian
Code Pages 275

Figure 38. CP00275

Brazilian

Appendix A. Code Pages

253

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Danish/Norwegian
Code Page 00277

Figure 39. CP00277

Appendix A. Code Pages

Danish/Norwegian

254

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Finnish/Swedish
Code Pages 278

Figure 40. CP00278

Appendix A. Code Pages

Finnish/Swedish

255

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Italian
Code Page 00280

Figure 41. CP00280

Italian

Appendix A. Code Pages

256

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Japanese English
Code Pages 00281

Figure 42. CP00281

Japanese English

Appendix A. Code Pages

257

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Portuguese
Code Page 00282

Figure 43. CP00282

Portuguese

Appendix A. Code Pages

258

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Spanish/Spanish Speaking
Code Pages 00284

Figure 44. CP00284

Spanish/Spanish Speaking

Appendix A. Code Pages

259

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

English (UK)/Ireland
Code Page 00285

Figure 45. CP00285

English (UK)/Ireland

Appendix A. Code Pages

260

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Japanese Katakana
Code Page 00290

Figure 46. CP00290

Japanese Katakana

Appendix A. Code Pages

261

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

French/French Azerty
Code Page 00297

Figure 47. CP00297

French/French Azerty

Appendix A. Code Pages

262

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Arabic
Code Page 00420

Figure 48. CP00420

Arabic

Appendix A. Code Pages

263

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Greek (Old)
Code Page 00423

Figure 49. CP00423

Greek (Old)

Appendix A. Code Pages

264

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Hebrew Bulletin
Code 00424

Figure 50. CP00424

Hebrew Bulletin

Appendix A. Code Pages

265

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

International 5/Swiss/Belgian
Code Page 00500

Figure 51. CP00500

International 5/Swiss/Belgian

Appendix A. Code Pages

266

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7) + euro
Code Page 00813

Figure 52. CP00813

Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7) + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

267

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Korean
Code Page 00833

Figure 53. CP00833

Korean

Appendix A. Code Pages

268

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Thai
Code Page 00838

Figure 54. CP00838

Thai

Appendix A. Code Pages

269

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin 2/ROECE
Code Page 00870

Figure 55. CP00870

Latin 2/ROECE

Appendix A. Code Pages

270

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Icelandic
Code Page 00871

Figure 56. CP00871

Icelandic

Appendix A. Code Pages

271

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Greek New + euro
Code Page 00875

Figure 57. CP00875

Greek New + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

272

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Cyrillic
Code Page 00880

Figure 58. CP00880

Cyrillic

Appendix A. Code Pages

273

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Yugoslav (Old)
Code Page 00890

Figure 59. CP00890

Yugoslav (Old)

Appendix A. Code Pages

274

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

OCR-A
Code Page 00892

Figure 60. CP00892

OCR-A

Appendix A. Code Pages

275

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

OCR-B
Code Page 00893

Figure 61. CP00893

OCR-B

Appendix A. Code Pages

276

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin 9 (ISO 8859) + euro
Code Page 00924

Figure 62. CP00924

Latin 9 (ISO 8859) + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

277

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Cyrillic Multilingual
Code Page 01025

Figure 63. CP01025

Cyrillic Multilingual

Appendix A. Code Pages

278

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin-5 Turkey
Code Page 01026

Figure 64. CP01026

Latin-5 Turkey

Appendix A. Code Pages

279

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Farsi
Code Page 01097

Figure 65. CP01097

Farsi

Appendix A. Code Pages

280

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Baltic Multilingual
Code Page 01112

Figure 66. CP01112

Baltic Multilingual

Appendix A. Code Pages

281

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Estonian
Code Page 01122

Figure 67. CP01122

Estonian

Appendix A. Code Pages

282

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

USA/Canada + euro
Code Page 01140

Figure 68. CP01140

USA/Canada + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

283

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Austrian/German + euro
Code Page 01141

Figure 69. CP01141

Austrian/German + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

284

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Danish/Norwegian + euro
Code Page 01142

Figure 70. CP01142

Danish/Norwegian + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

285

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Finnish/Swedish + euro
Code Page 001143

Figure 71. CP01143

Finnish/Swedish + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

286

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Italian + euro
Code Page 00144

Figure 72. CP01144

Italian + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

287

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro
Code Page 01145

Figure 73. CP01145

Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

288

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

English/UK + euro
Code Page 01146

Figure 74. CP01146

English/UK + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

289

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

French + euro
Code Page 01147

Figure 75. CP01147

French + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

290

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

International 5/Belgian New + euro
Code Page 01148

Figure 76. CP01148

International 5/Belgian New + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

291

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Icelandic + euro
Code Page 01149

Figure 77. CP01149

Icelandic + euro

Appendix A. Code Pages

292

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ASCII Code Pages
The table below lists the ASCII code pages used by the S828 Printer, and also provides page references
so you can determine what code page contains the characters you want to use.
These Code Pages can be found in the EPSON/IBM/ANSI emulations.
Code
Page
437
437-G
437-SL
850
851
852
853
855
857
858
860
862
863
864E
865
866
867
876
877
1098
1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
1257
MAZOWIA
GOST
TASS
UKRANIAN
KOI8-U
FARSI 1
FARSI 2
Kamenicky
CWI
Roman-8
IN2
Turkish
Bulgarian

Character Set Name
USA (Personal Computer) A-54
Greek
Croatian
PC Multilingual
Old Greek
Latin 2/ROECE
Latin 3 (PC)
Cyrillic (PC)
Latin 5-Turkey + euro
PC Multilingual + euro
Portuguese
Hebrew
Canadian French
Arabic
Danish/Norwegian
PC Data, Cyrillic, Russian
Turkish 2
OCR-A
OCR-B
Farsi (Personal Computer)
Central Europe Latin 2
Cyrillic
Latin 1 Ansi Windows
Greek Windows
Turkish Windows
Hebrew Windows
Arabic Windows
Baltic Windows
Polish
Russian
Cyrillic
old version
new version

Appendix A. Code Pages

293

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual
Code
Page
ISO 8859-1
ISO 8859/2
ISO 8859/3
ISO 8859/4
ISO 8859-5
ISO 8859-6
ISO 8859-7
ISO 8859-8
ISO 8859-9
ISO 8859-15
96 GREEK

PTX‐S828

Character Set Name

Page

Latin 1
Latin 2
Latin 3
Latin 4
Latin/Cyrillic
Latin/Arabic
Latin/Greek
Latin/Hebrew
Latin 5
Latin 9

281
300
301
302
305
308

Extended Graphics Character Table
Italic Character Table
Epson Extended Character Variables
ANSI National VAriations

Appendix A. Code Pages

318
319
320

294

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

USA (Personal Computer) A-54
Code Page 00437

Figure 78. USA(CP437)

Appendix A. Code Pages

295

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Greek
Code Page 00437-G









’







░

└

╨









▒

┴

╤





“







▓

┬

╥



≥









│

├

╙



≤









┤

─

╘



⌠









╡

┼

╒



⌡



–







╢

╞

╓







‘







╖

╟

╫



≈





(







╕

╚

╪





)







╣

╔

┘



■









║

╩

┌





;

[

{







╗

╦

█



√

└







╝

╠

▄



ⁿ



]

}







╜

═

▌











╛

╬

▐



■









┐

╧

▀





Figure 79.Greek(CP437-G)

Appendix A. Code Pages

296

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Croatian
Code Page 00437-SL

Figure 80.Croatian(CP437-SLAVIC)

Appendix A. Code Pages

297

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7)
Code Page 00813

Figure 81. Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7)

Appendix A. Code Pages

298

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin 1 (ISO 8859-1)
Code Page 00819

Figure 82 .ISO8859/1(Latin1)

Appendix A. Code Pages

299

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

PC Multilingual
Code Page 00850

Figure 83.Multilingual(CP850)

Appendix A. Code Pages

300

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Old Greek
Code Page 00851

Figure 84.Old Greek(CP851)

Appendix A. Code Pages

301

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin 2/ROECE
Code Page 00852

Figure 85.EasternEurope(CP852)

Appendix A. Code Pages

302

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin 3 (PC)
Code Page 00853

Figure 86.Turkish(CP853)

Appendix A. Code Pages

303

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Cyrillic (PC)
Code Page 00855

Figure 87.Cyrillic(CP855)

Appendix A. Code Pages

304

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin 5-Turkey + euro
Code Page 00857

Figure 88.Turkish(CP857)

Appendix A. Code Pages

305

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

PC Multilingual + euro
Code Page 00858

Figure 89.EuroPCMultilingual(CP858).

Appendix A. Code Pages

306

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Portuguese
Code Page 00860

Figure 90.Portugal(CP860)

Appendix A. Code Pages

307

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Hebrew
Code Page 00862

Figure 91.Hebrew(CP862)

Appendix A. Code Pages

308

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Canadian French
Code Page 00863

Figure 92.Canada/France(CP863)

Appendix A. Code Pages

309

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Arabic
Code Page 00864

Figure 93.Arabic(CP864)

Appendix A. Code Pages

310

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Arabic
Code Page 00864E

Figure 94.CP864E(Arabic)

Appendix A. Code Pages

311

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Danish/Norwegian
Code Page 00865

Figure 95.Denmark/Norway(CP865)

Appendix A. Code Pages

312

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

PC Data, Cyrillic, Russian
Code Page 00866

Figure 96. Russian(CP866)

Appendix A. Code Pages

313

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Turkish 2
Code Page 00867

Figure 97.Turkish2(CP867)

Appendix A. Code Pages

314

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

OCR-A
Code Page 00876

Figure 98.OCR-A(CP876)

Appendix A. Code Pages

315

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

OCR-B
Code Page 00877

Figure 99.OCR-B(CP877)

Appendix A. Code Pages

316

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin 2 (ISO 8859-2)
Code Page 00912

Figure 100.ISO8859/2(Latin2)

Appendix A. Code Pages

317

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin 3 (ISO 8859-3)
Code Page 00913

Figure 101.ISO8859/3(Latin3)

Appendix A. Code Pages

318

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin 4 (ISO 8859-4)
Code Page 00914

Figure 102.ISO8859/4(Latin4)

Appendix A. Code Pages

319

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5)
Code Page 00915

Figure 103.ISO8859/5(Latin/Cyrillic)

Appendix A. Code Pages

320

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin 8 (ISO 8859-8)
Code Page 00916

Figure 104.ISO8859/8

Appendix A. Code Pages

321

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin 5 (ISO 8859-9)
Code Page 00920

Figure 105.ISO8859/9(Latin5)

Appendix A. Code Pages

322

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Baltic Multilingual
Code Page 00921

Figure 106.BalticWindows(CP921)

Appendix A. Code Pages

323

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Estonian
Code Page 00922

Figure 107.Estonian (CP922)

Appendix A. Code Pages

324

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin 9 (ISO 8859-15) + euro
Code Page 00923

Figure 108.ISO8859/15(Latin9) .151

Appendix A. Code Pages

325

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Urdu
Code Page 01006

Figure 109.Urdu (CP01006)

Appendix A. Code Pages

326

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Arabic Extended
Code Page 01046

Figure 110.Arabic Extended (CP1046)

Appendix A. Code Pages

327

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin 6 (ISO 8859-6)
Code Page 01089

Figure 111.ISO8859/6(Latin/Arabic)

Appendix A. Code Pages

328

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Farsi (Personal Computer)
Code Page 01098

Figure 112.Farsi(CP1098)

Appendix A. Code Pages

329

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Estonian (Personal Computer)
Code Page 01116

Figure 113.Estonian (CP1116)

Appendix A. Code Pages

330

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latvian (Personal Computer)
Code Page 01117

Figure 114.Latvian (Personal Computer) (CP1117)

Appendix A. Code Pages

331

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Lithuanian (Personal Computer)
Code Page 01118

Figure 115.Lthuanian (Personal Computer) (CP1118)

Appendix A. Code Pages

332

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Central Europe Latin 2
Code Page 01250

Figure 116.CentralEurope(CP1250)

Appendix A. Code Pages

333

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Cyrillic Windows + euro
Code Page 01251

Figure 117.Cyrillic(CP1251)

Appendix A. Code Pages

334

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Latin1 Ansi Windows
Code Page 01252

Figure 118.Latin1AnsiWindows(CP1252)

Appendix A. Code Pages

335

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Greek Windows
Code Page 01253

Figure 119.GreekWindows(CP1253)

Appendix A. Code Pages

336

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Turkish Windows
Code Page 01254

Figure 120.TurkishWindows(CP1254)

Appendix A. Code Pages

337

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Hebrew Windows
Code Page 01255

Figure 121. HebrewWindows(CP1255)

Appendix A. Code Pages

338

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Arabic Windows
Code Page 01256

Figure 122.ArabicWindows(CP1256)

Appendix A. Code Pages

339

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Baltic Windows
Code Page 01257

Figure 123.Batlic Windows (CP1257)

Appendix A. Code Pages

340

260071‐001A

Programmeer Manual

PTX‐S828
8

MAZOW
WIA (Polis
sh)

Polish)
Figure 124.MAZOWIA(P

Appendix A
A. Code Pagess

341

260071‐001A
A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

GOST (Russian)

Figure 125.GOST(Russian)

Appendix A. Code Pages

342

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

TASS (Cyrillic)

Figure 126.TASS(Cyrillic)

Appendix A. Code Pages

343

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

UKRANIAN (old version)

Figure 127.UKRANIAN(oldversion)

Appendix A. Code Pages

344

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

KOI8-U (new version)

Figure 128.KOI8-U(newversion)

Appendix A. Code Pages

345

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

FARSI 1

Figure 129. Farsi 1

Appendix A. Code Pages

346

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

FARSI 2

Figure 130. Farsi 2

Appendix A. Code Pages

347

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Kamenicky

Figure 131.Kamenicky

Appendix A. Code Pages

348

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

CWI

Figure 132.CWI

Appendix A. Code Pages

349

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Roman-8

Figure 133.Roman-8

Appendix A. Code Pages

350

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

IN2

Figure 134.IN2

Appendix A. Code Pages

351

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Turkish

Figure 135.Turkish

Appendix A. Code Pages

352

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Bulgarian

Figure 136. Bulgarian

Appendix A. Code Pages

353

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

96 GREEK

Figure 137.96GREEK

Appendix A. Code Pages

354

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Character Sets
Character Set 1

00
00

NUL

’

NUL

░

└

╨

≡

DC1

▒

┴

╤

DC2

“

DC2

▓

┬

╥

≥

DC3

│

├

╙

≤

DC4

┤

─

╘

⌠

╡

┼

╒

⌡

╢

╞

╓

‘

BEL

╖

╟

╫

≈

(

╕

╚

╪

BEL

)

⌐

╣

╔

┘

║

╩

┌

Ω

;

[

{

╗

╦

█

√

╝

╠

▄

∞

ⁿ

]

}

╜

═

▌

╛

╬

▐

■

DEL

┐

╧

▀

∩

CAN

ESC

CAN

ESC

Figure 138.CharacterSet1

Appendix A. Code Pages

355

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Character Set 2

00
00

’

░

└

╨

≡

DC1

▒

┴

╤

NUL

01
02

DC2

“

▓

┬

╥

≥



DC3

│

├

╙

≤



DC4

┤

─

╘

⌠



╡

┼

╒

⌡



╢

╞

╓

BEL

‘

╖

╟

╫

≈

BS CAN

(

╕

╚

╪

)

⌐

╣

╔

┘

║

╩

┌

Ω

;

[

{

╗

╦

█

√

╝

╠

▄

∞

ⁿ

]

}

╜

═

▌

₧

╛

╬

▐

■

DEL

┐

╧

▀

∩

ESC

Figure 139.CharacterSet2

Appendix A. Code Pages

356

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Hexadecimal to Decimal Table

112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240

113 129 145 161 177 193 209 225 241

114 130 146 162 178 194 210 226 242

115 131 147 163 179 195 211 227 243

100 116 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 244

101 117 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 245

102 118 134 150 166 182 198 214 230 246

103 119 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 247

104 120 136 152 168 184 200 216 232 248

105 121 137 153 169 185 201 217 233 249

106 122 138 154 170 186 202 218 234 250

107 123 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 251

108 124 140 156 172 188 204 220 236 252

109 125 141 157 173 189 205 221 237 253

110 126 142 158 174 190 206 222 238 254

111 127 143 159 175 191 207 223 239 255

Figure 140.Hexadecimal to Decimal Table

Appendix A. Code Pages

357

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Epson FX-series Code Pages
The following Epson code charts provide information on the character tables available for Epson FX-series
emulation mode.

Extended Graphics Character

Figure 141. Epson Extended Graphics Character

Appendix A. Code Pages

358

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Italic Character Table

Figure 142. Epson Italic Character

Appendix A. Code Pages

359

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Epson Extended Character Variables
The following table shows characters that vary, by language, from the Epson Extended Character Graphics
set.
The code points shown are the only ones that vary. For example, in the United Kingdom, only code point
X'23' is different from the basic Epson table, shown on previous pages.

Figure 143. Epson Extended Character Variables

Appendix A. Code Pages

360

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

ANSI National Variations
The following table shows characters that vary, by language, from the ANSI Extended Character Graphics
set.

Figure 144. ANSI National Variations

Appendix A. Code Pages

361

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This page is intentionally left blank

Appendix A. Code Pages

362

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Appendix B. Interfaces
This section provides technical information for the parallel and serial interfaces.

The Parallel Interface
The parallel interface of this printer fully supports the Centronics protocol plus the specific features
requested by the EPSON and IBM printer connection in monodirectional mode and the Compatibility and
Nibbles modes in bidirectional mode, plus the negotiation phases and the device identifier (as IEEE
P1284).
The parallel interface is available on a specific 36 contact connector type AMPHENOL 57-40360- 12-D56
or equivalent connector for 1284 Type B.
● Drive Capability
Up to 15 feet (5 m) on AWG26 min. wire size of twisted conductors on TTL receiver. The max.
reachable distance is conditioned by the host drive capability and by the noise level along the interface
cable path.
● Printer Connector Type
36 pins, 1284 Type B
● Cable Connector
25 pin, 1284 A Type

Signals Description
According to the IEEE - P1284 Standard, the pins assume different meanings and are identified by
different names depending on the actual handshaking mode as follows:
● Compatibility mode (Centronics)
This is the lower level mode provides an asynchronous, byte-wide forward (host-to-peripheral) channel
with data and status lines used according to their original definitions. The interfaces power up in the
compatibility Mode Idle phase.
● Nibble Mode
This mode provides an asynchronous, reverse (peripheral-to-host) channel, under control of the host. In
this mode, peripheral device to host data bytes are sent as two sequential, four-bit nibbles using the
four peripheral-to-host status lines. These two modes cannot be active simultaneously.
● Byte Mode
This mode provides an asynchronous, byte-wide reverse (peripheral-to host) channel based on eight
data lines of the interface for data and the control/status lines for handshaking. Byte mode is under host
control and it cannot be simultaneously active with compatibility mode.

Operating Phases
The link protocol is mainly based on the following three phases:
● Negotiation Phase
This phase is activated always by the host, only when in compatibility mode, and defines:
– whether a bidirectional link protocol can be established.
– the handshaking mode as well as the communications mode to be used.
– the device identification, if supported.
● Communication Phase
This phase is based on well defined handshaking rules which depend upon the selected link mode.
● Termination Phase

Appendix B‐ Interfaces

363

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This phase is initiated by the host and returns the interface to the compatibility mode.

Parallel Interface Signals
Description of the signals in monodirectional link:
Signal Name
STROBE
ACK

Pin N° Source
1
HOST
10
PRINTER

DATA BIT 1

DATA BIT 2
DATA BIT 3
DATA BIT 4
DATA BIT 5
DATA BIT 6
DATA BIT 7
DATA BIT 8
BUSY

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11

PRINTER

SELECT

PRINTER

PRINTER /
HOST

AUTOFEEDXT 14

HOST

GND
16
CHASSIS GND 17
+5 VDC
18

–
–
PRINTER

SIGNAL GND 19-30 –
INIT
31
HOST
ERROR

PRINTER

+5V
SELECTIN

35
36

PRINTER
HOST

Appendix B‐ Interfaces

Description
Clock signal which controls data transmission with its falling edge.
Negative pulsed signal indicating that the printer has received data
and is ready to accept the next set of data. Also sent when the
printer is switched from off-line to on-line and at the end of the
initialization time. The BUSY line is always active.
Data 8 is the most significant bit. These are the data lines used by
host or printer to transfer control code or ASCII codes.

When high, this signal indicates that the printer cannot accept data
or control codes. This signal goes high during data processing, in
test and program modes, during initialization, when the buffer is full,
and when a paper jam, paper end or paper size error occurs, in case
of a power-on reset, the reception of a STROBE signal, while the
register was not yet read, or when the INIT line is still active.
When high, this signal indicates that the automatic input bin is out of
paper and paper cannot be loaded from an other bin.
When high, this signal indicates that the printer is on-line. It is put to
low state in case of initialization or test and program mode. In IBM
Proprinter emulation in low condition this signal signals a off-line
request from the operator panel, paper jam, paper end or paper size
errors.
Active low level signal. Indicates whether a LF is performed after a
CR or not.
Logical ground level (0V).
Frame ground.
Is the DC voltage supplied by a component that limits the driven
capability up to 100 mA.
Signal ground.
Active low level signal. Indicates, that the printer is initializing. The
BUSY signal is forced high.
When low, this signal indicates that the printer is offline, there is an
offline request from the operator panel, or the printer is in an error
state because of: paper jam, paper end or paper size error, engine
error, output bin full or cover open condition.
Pulled up to signal.
Active low level signal. Enables the printer.

364

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

The pins 1 to 14 of the printer are connected to the pins with the same number of the parallel port of the
host.
The pins 19 to 30 of the printer are connected to the pins 18 to 25 of the parallel port of the host.
The pins 31, 32 and 36 of the printer are connected respectively to the pins 16, 15 and 17 of the parallel port
of the host.
1284 Mode signal names are shown with their Compatibility mode (Centronics) names in parenthesis ( ) for
the bidirectional link.
Signal Name
HostClk (nStrobe)
AD1 (Data 1)
AD2 (Data 2)
AD3 (Data 3)
AD4 (Data 4)
AD5 (Data 5)
AD6 (Data 6)
AD7 (Data 7)
AD8 (Data 8)
PrtClk (nAck)
PrtBusy (Busy)
AckDataReq (PError)
Xflag (Select)
HostBusy (nAutofd)
Peripheral Logic High
(+5 V)
n.a. (nInit)
nDataAvail (NFault)
1284 Active (NSelectIn)
Common Logic Ground
Chassis Ground

Pin N° for
Signal Wire
1
2

Pin N° for
Return Wire
19
20

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
18

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
28
28
30

Source
HOST
HOST in Compatibility mode and negotiation
phase.
NOT USED in Nibble mode.
BIDIRECTIONAL in Byte mode.

PRINTER
PRINTER
PRINTER
PRINTER
HOST
PRINTER

31
30
32
29
36
30
16 and Return Wires
17

HOST
PRINTER

Parallel Interface Signals Behaviour
HostClk /nWrite (nStrobe)
Compatibility Mode:
Set Active low to transfer data into printer input latch. Data is valid while nStrobe is
low.
Negotiation Phase:
Set active low to transfer extendibility request value into printer input latch. Data is
valid on the falling edge of HostClk.
Reverse Data Transfer Set high during Nibble Mode transfer to avoid latching data into printer. Pulsed
Phase:
low during Byte Mode transfers to acknowledge transfer of data from the printer.
The printer shall ensure that this pulse does not transfer a new data into the printer
input latch.
AD1 ... AD8 (Data 1 ... Data 8)
Compatibility Mode:
Forward channel data.
Negotiation Phase:
Extendibility request value.
Reverse Data Transfer Nibble Mode: NOT USED.
Phase:
Byte Mode: Reverse channel data.

Appendix B‐ Interfaces

365

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

PrtClk (nAck)
Compatibility Mode:
Negotiation Phase:

Pulsed low by the printer to acknowledge the transfer of a data from the host.
Set low to acknowledge 1284 support, then set high to indicate that the Xflag
(Select) and data available flags may be read.
Reverse Data Transfer Used in both Nibble and Byte Modes to qualify data being sent to the host.
Phase:
PrtBusy (Busy)
Compatibility Mode:
Driven high to indicate that the printer is not ready to receive data.
Negotiation Phase:
Reflects the present state of the printer’s forward channel.
Reverse Data Transfer Nibble Mode: Data bits 3 then 7, then forward channel busy status
Phase:
Byte Mode: Forward channel busy status.
Reverse Idle phase: Forward channel busy status.
AckDataReq (PError)
Compatibility Mode:
Driven high to indicate that the printer has encountered an error in the paper path.
The printer shall set nFault low whenever it sets PError high.
Negotiation Phase:
Set high to indicate 1284 support, then follows nDataAvail (nFault).
Reverse Data Transfer Nibble Mode: Data bits then 6.
Phase:
Byte Mode: same as nDataAvail (nFault)
Reverse Idle phase:
Set high until host requests data transfer, then follows nDataAvail (nFault).
Xflag (Select)
Compatibility Mode:
Negotiation Phase:

Set high to indicate that the printer in on-line.
The Xflag refers to extendibility flag. Used by the printer to reply to the requested
extendibility byte sent by the host during the negotiation phase. The signal level is
low for Nibble Mode, high for Byte Mode.
Reverse Data Transfer Nibble Mode: Data bits 1 then 5.
Phase:
Byte Mode: Same as negotiation phase.
Reverse Idle phase:
Same as negotiation phase.
Xflag (Select)
Compatibility Mode:
Negotiation Phase:

Set low by host to put the printer into auto-line feed mode.
Set low in conjunction with 1284 Active (NSelectIn) being set high to request a
1284 mode.
Then set high after printer sets PtrClk (nAck) low.

Xflag (Select)
Reverse Data Transfer Nibble Mode: Set low to indicate that host can receive printer-to-host data then set
Phase:
high to acknowledge receipts of that nibble.
Byte Mode: Same as Nibble Mode to request and acknowledge bytes. Following a
reverse channel transfer the interface transitions to idle phase when
HostBusy (nAutoFd) is set low and printer‘s no data available.
Reverse Idle phase:
Set high in response to PtrClk (nAck) low pulse to re-enter reverse data transfer
phase.
Is set high with 1284 Active (nSelectIn) being set low, the 1284 idle phase is being
aborted and the interface returns to Compatibility Mode.
Peripheral Logic High (+ 5V)
Set high to indicate that all other signals sourced by the printer are in valid state. Set low to indicate the
printer is off.

Appendix B‐ Interfaces

366

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

n.a. (nInit)
Compatibility Mode:

Pulsed low in conjunction with 1284 Active low to reset the interface and force to
return to Compatibility Mode idle phase.
Negotiation Phase:
Set HIGH.
Reverse Data Transfer Set HIGH.
Phase:
nDataAvail (NFault)
Compatibility Mode:
Negotiation Phase:

Set low to indicate that an internal printer error has occurred.
Set high to acknowledge 1284 compatibility. In Nibble or Byte Mode it is then set low
to indicate printer-to-host data is available following host setting HostBusy (nAutoFd)
high.
Reverse Data Transfer Nibble Mode: Set low to indicate that printer is ready to send to host. Then used to
Phase:
send data bits 0 then 4.
Byte Mode: Used to indicate that data is available.
Reverse Idle phase:
Used to indicate that data is available.
1284 Active (NSelectIn)
Compatibility Mode:
Set low by host to select printer.
Negotiation Phase:
Set high in conjunction with Host Busy being set low to request a 1284 mode.
Reverse Data Transfer Set high to indicate that bus direction is printer to host. Set low to terminate 1284
Phase:
mode and set bus direction host to printer.
Reverse Idle Phase:
Same as Reverse Data Transfer phase.

Appendix B‐ Interfaces

367

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Interface Timing
Timing and Handshaking depend upon the connection mode.

Figure 145. Mode Centronics

Our Centronics mode supports the BUSY-WHILE-STROBE busy signal timing and ACK-INBUSY as
BUSY-ACK relationship.
Legend
A
B
C
t
a

Time interval
Data Setup Time
Strobe pulse width
Data hold time
Busy while Strobe
Ack in Busy

Appendix B‐ Interfaces

Min.
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.25
0

368

Max.
500
all times in µs
1.0
2.5

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Mode IEEE 1284

Figure 146. Mode IEEE 1284

The Serial Interface
This printer provides the RS-232/C serial interfaces. The interface mode is selected via menu.
● Transmission Type
Data is sent and received in start/stop (asynchronous) transmission.
● Character Format
Each character is transmitted in the following format:
1
START BIT + 8 DATA BITS + 1 PARITY BIT + 1 STOP BIT
The least significant bit of the data bits is sent first after the start bit. The number of data bits is selected
via menu. The parity bit, when present, follows the data bits. The start bit is a logical “0” and the stop bit
is a logical “1”. The start and stop bits are used as character framing bits.
● Printer Connector
Male DB9 or equivalent connector.
● Drive Capability
Max. 50 feet (15 m) for all supported data rates. The RS-422/A interface is effective up to 1200 m.

Appendix B‐ Interfaces

369

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Serial Interface Signals
The following table lists the RS-232/C serial interface signals:

Signal Name
SIGNAL
GROUND
TXD

Pin Number
5

Local
Connect.
Source
–

Printer

RXD
RTS

2
7

Host
Printer

Data Set
Printer

CTS

Data Set

DSR

Data Set

DCD

Data Set

2nd RTS
DTR

9
4

Printer
Printer

Remote
Connect.
Source
–

Printer

Description
Always connected to the 0 Volts of the
Power Supply
Transmitted Data Signal (an output from
printer). A MARK condition is held during
IDLE communication state. An indeterminate
state is present when printer is powered off.
Received data signal (an input to printer).
Request to Send Signal (an output from
printer). Active HIGH level signal. It is HIGH
until the printer is powered off, then an
indeterminate state is present .
Active HIGH level signal indicates that the
host or data set is ready to receive data from
the printer.
Active HIGH level signal. Indicates that the
host or data set is ready to be connected to
the printer and is ready for data transfer.
Active HIGH level signal. Indicates that the
host is transmitting or the data set is r
receiving the Data Carrier signal.
Functionally equivalent to the DTR signal.
Data Terminal Ready. Normally HIGH (ON).
Indicates that the printer is ready to initiate a
connection.

LAN Interface Port
LAN Interface Port
1. Ethernet 10/100BaseT Connector
2. Green 10/100Mbit/sec. Transmission Speed LED
3. Yellow Traffic LED

LED Indicators
The LED indicator modes are described in the following table:
LED
Yellow LED
Green LED

Status
Unlit
Lit
Blinks

Description
Transmission speed at 10Mbit/sec.
Transmission speed at 100Mbit/sec.
Transmitting or receiving packets from the network.

USB Interface Port
USB 2.0 full speed 12/Mbit/sec. interface.

Appendix B‐ Interfaces

370

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Appendix C. Network Interface Technical Reference
Network Configuration Parameters
IP Address Assignment
Fixed: Assigns the static or fixed IP address.
DHCP: Assigns the dynamic IP address (DHCP protocol).
Default value is DHCP.
Fixed and DHCP assignments of IP addresses are supported. On most networks, you will want to assign a
permanent IP address and disable DHCP.
IP Address
These values set the IP Address. The address is represented by a decimal notation where the decimal
values are divided by points in four fields.
Each field ranges between 0 and 255.
Default is 127.000.000.000.
Subnet Mask
These values set the Subnet Mask number. This number is represented by a decimal notation where the
decimal values are divided by points in four fields. Each field ranges between 0 and 255.
Default is 255.255.254.000.
Default Gateway
These values set the Default Gateway address. This address is represented by a decimal notation where the
decimal values are divided by points in four fields. Each field ranges between 0 and 255.
Default is 000.000.000.000.
The gateway address tells the printer which router or gateway to use to access other subnets or hosts.
Simply add your router’s IP address as the default gateway. All packets destined for other subnets will be
forwarded to the default gateway for delivery to the destination host.
Host Name
The host is identified by a name in the NetBIOS protocol over TCP/IP. This function allows creating the name
of the host using a 14-character string.
Default is PTX_xxxxxx where xxxxxx are the last 6-digits of the MAC address...
Workgroup Name
The workgroup is identified by a name in the NetBIOS protocol over TCP/IP in Windows. This function allows
creating the name of the workgroup using a 14-character string.
Default is Workgroup.

Appendix C– Network Interface Reference

371

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

SMTP Service
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) allows a mail server address to be entered into the printer
configuration to send automated e-mail notifications with printer alert conditions.
Disabled: Disables the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) service, that is disables the
reception/transfer/error service of the e-mail.
Enabled: Enables the SMTP service, that is it enables the reception/transfer/error service of the email.
Default is Disabled.
Mail Server Address
These values set the mail server address. This number is represented by a decimal notation where the
decimal values are divided by points in four fields. Each field ranges between 0 and 255.
Default is 000.000.000.000.
Note: Item selection on the printer menu allowed only if the “SMTP Service” function choice is Enabled.
E-mail Address (Receiver)
This function allows writing the e-mail address where you can notify the failures using a 48-character
string. Default is an empty string.
Note: Item selection on the printer menu allowed only if the “SMTP Service” function choice is Enabled.
E-mail Address (Sender)
This function allows to write the sender e-mail address using a 48-character string.
Default is an empty string.
Note: Item selection on the printer menu allowed only if the “SMTP Service” function choice is Enabled.
Location
You can enter the physical location of the printer into this field.
Contact
You can enter a network support contact’s name and phone number into this field.

Appendix C– Network Interface Reference

372

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Managing a Single Printer Configuration Using the Internal Webpage
Configuration Password
The Printronix S828's configuration settings can be protected by a password to keep unauthorized users
from making changes. When you try to submit any Printronix S828 configuration change, you will be asked
for your user name and password. At the prompt, enter the default user name = root and default
password = root, unless you have setup another user name and password with root privileges.

Storing and Saving Settings
When settings are configured on the Printronix S828 and the SUBMIT button on the related page has been
pressed, you will be reminded to Reboot the printer to ensure the latest settings are in use. To reset the
Printronix S828, go to the Home page, enter the Power On Reset page, and Click on the REBOOT
PRINTER button.

Managing Multiple Printers Using the Remote Printer
Management Utility
The Remote Printer Management Utility (RPMU) is a software tool for network administrators that allows
the configuration and control of Printronix S828 printers remotely over a LAN. With this tool the installed
printers can be controlled, configured and organized easily. The main features are:
Device Discovery - Searches for the devices within a range of IP addresses.
Printer Organization - Printers connected to the network can be organized into logical groups in a
hierarchically structured tree.
Printer Status Report - Checks the printer's status and reports alarms.
Printer Configuration - Printers may be configured as needed from the administrators workstation.
Change the configuration of single printers, or simultaneously change the configuration of multiple
printers in your enterprise, anywhere, and anytime.
Firmware Updating - Provides a firmware download function to upgrade the printer's firmware.
Remote Operator Panel Management - Provides a virtual operator panel for the remotely connected
printer at the administrators workstation that allows performing all functions normally achieved pressing
the operator panel keys. The RPMU also provides the basic status management for third-party printers
compliant to the standard MIB objects. Visit our website to download this free software utility program.

Network Interface Summary
Table 12. Network Interface Summary
INSTALLATION INTEGRATION
Network speed / connection
Auto-detection
Manual network speed selection
Parallel interface free
Network configuration through printer operator panel
Web page network setting configuration
Web page login password protection
Web page default user-id and default password
Windows Port Monitor and Drivers
NIC configuration printout

Appendix C– Network Interface Reference

10/100 BASET
10/100 network speed Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Root, Root
Yes, download from www.Printronix.com
Yes

373

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 12. Network Interface Summary (cont.)
DHCP
WINS
DDNS
SYSTEM / OS
IBM System i OS 400
IBM pSeries® AIX
Sun Solaris
Unix
Linux®
Windows 95,98,2000,NT,XP, 2003 Server
Windows VISTA, Win7, Win8, Win10
NETBIOS over TCP
NETBEUI
Novell Netware
OS2
MacIntosh / Apple EtherTalk
PRINTING METHODS
Raw Port 9100
LPD/LPR Port 515
LPR print queue name
IPDS Port 5100
Interleaved multi-protocol communications
Hot Interface switching
Hot Port switching
Multiple internal print server queues
String substitutions
String before/after job
DATASTREAMS
S828 ASCII native
ASCII text and single byte escapes
IBM Proprinter III emulation
IBM Personal Printer 2391 emulation
IBM Proprinter III emulation
IBM Personal Printer 2381 emulation
Epson FX series emulation
Epson - FX emulation
IPDS

PRINTER SERVER FACILITIES SUPPORT
PSF AIX
PSF OS400

Appendix C– Network Interface Reference

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Any name (PR1, d1PRN, etc.) can be used.
Yes (with IPDS option on some models)
Yes
Yes between Parallel and LAN interfaces
Yes between Raw 9100, LPR/LPD 515,
and IPDS 5100 (with IPDS option on some models)
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes (on some models)
Yes (on some models)
Yes (on some models)
Yes (on some models)
Yes (on some models)
Yes (on some models)
Yes (with IPDS option on some models. See
“Intelligent Printer Data Stream,” for
application program compatibility considerations)
Yes
Yes

374

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 12. Network Interface Summary (cont.)
PSF MVS™
Yes
PSF VSE
Yes
PSF VM
Yes
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
S828 Remote Printer Management Utility
Yes, download from www.Printronix.com
IBM NPM
Yes (generic printer)
HP JetAdmin
Yes (generic printer)
E-mail SMTP
Yes
Internal Web page
Yes
PRINTER STATUS AND ERROR REPORTING
Ready
Yes
Not ready
Yes
Paper out
Yes
Paper jam
Yes
Cover open
Yes
Machine check (carriage fault, ribbon blocked...)
Yes
NETWORK CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS (see above)
LINK LAYER
Ethernet II
Yes
802.2
Yes
802.3
Yes
2/SNAP
Yes
Link disconnect (no data timeout)
15 second fixed setting
PROTOCOLS
IP
Yes
TCP
Yes
UDP
Yes
ARP
Yes
RARP
Yes
SMP
Yes
Telnet
Yes
DHCP
Yes
DDNS
Yes
WINS
Yes
BOOTP
Yes
FTP
Yes
TFTP
Yes
ICMP
Yes
LPR/LPD
Yes
DHCP
Yes
SNMP
Yes
SMTP
Yes

Appendix C– Network Interface Reference

375

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 12. Network Interface Summary (cont.)
Direct Socket Printing
HTTP
PING
SNMP
MIB II (RFC 1514)
Host Resource MIB (RFC 1514)
Printer MIB (RFC1759)
S828 Private MIB
Reverse Telnet
PROS
IPP
SLPv2
HARDWARE
RISC processor
Flash memory
RAM
Attachment connector type
Network traffic led
Network speed led
FIRMWARE UPGRADE
Firmware upgrade over network
Firmware upgrade through parallel interface

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (see note)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
4MB
16MB
RJ-45
Yes (green)
Yes (yellow)
Yes
Yes

Note: All relevant parts of MIB-II (RFC1231) required to support HP JetAdmin are implemented.
● The following IP table group OIDs are not implemented: ipForwarding, ipDefaultTTL , ipInReceives
,ipInHdrErrors,ipInAddrErrors, ipForwDatagrams, ipInUnknownProtos, ipInDiscards, ipInDelivers,
ipOutRequests, ipOutDiscards, ipOutNoRoutes, ipReasmTimeout ,ipReasmReqds,
ipReasmOKs,ipReasmFails,ipFragOKs, ipFragFails, ipFragCreates
● The ipRouteTable OIDs are not implemented.
● The ipNetToMediaTable OIDs are not implemented.
● The icmp group OIDs are not implemented.
● The tcp group OIDs are not implemented.
● The udp group OIDs are not implemented.
● The snmp group OIDs are not implemented.

Appendix C– Network Interface Reference

376

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Appendix D. LAN Interface MIB Support
Table 13 List of the MIB of the printer.
Description
prtButton
prtBaseCodeVersion
prtHtmlContact
prtRebootPrinter
prtRestoreToMfg
prtGetPrinterStatus
prtMenuLocked
prtPowerOnCycles
prtPowerOnMinutes
prtBarCodes
prtPageWithGraphics
prtHSDraftCharacters
prtDPCharacters
prtDPTextCharacters
prtNLQCharacters
prtBESTDraftCharacters
prtLQCharacters
prtPrintedPageNumber
prtLPD_Timeout
LPD_Reboot
prtMenuUserMacro
prtMenuUserMacroTable
prtUserMacroEntry
prtUserMacroIndex
prtUserMacroLineSpace
prtUserMacroLineSpaceLock
prtUserMacroLength
prtUserMacroTopOfForm
prtUserMacroSkiPover
prtUserMacroDraftMode
prtUserMacroFont
prtUserMacroPitch
prtUserMacroPitchLock
prtUserMacroLeftMargin
prtUserMacroRightMargin
prtUserMacroSlashZero
prtUserMacroPath
prtUserMacroTear
prtUserMacroImpact
prtUserMacroPerforSave
prtUserMacroGap
prtUserMacroTuningHor
prtUserMacroTuningVer
prtUserMacroIgnoreFF
prtUserMacroQuality
prtUserMacro1524Cpi

Appendix D – Lan Interface MIB Support

MIB
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 5
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 6
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 7
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 8
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 9
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 10
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 11
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 12
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 13
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 14
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 15
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 16
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 17
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 18
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 19
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 20
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 5
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 6
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 7
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 8
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 9
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 10
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 11
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 12
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 13
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 14
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 15
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 16
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 17
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 18
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 19
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 20
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 21
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 22
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 23

377

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 13 List of the MIB of the printer (cont.)
Description
prtUserMacroTearDelay
prtUserMacroQuiet
prtUserMacroDBCS
prtUserMacroDBCS_Cpi
prtUserMacroDBCS_Lpi
prtUserMacroTH_Space
/* IPDS SETTINGS START */
prtUserMacroI_Pitch
prtUserMacroI_LineSpace
prtUserMacroI_RightMargin
prtUserMacroI_FormLength
prtUserMacroI_Font
prtUserMacroI_NLQ_Font
prtUserMacroI_HostFastDraft
prtUserMacroI_Nation
prtUserMacroI_Emulation
prtUserMacroI_MediaSizePriority
prtUserMacroI_BcMode
prtUserMacroI_GraMode
prtUserMacroFontLock
/* IPDS SETTINGS END */
prtMenuConfig
prtMenuConfigTable
prtMenuConfigEntry
prtMenuConfigMacroWork
prtMenuConfigIfType
prtMenuConfigEmulation
prtMenuConfigCharset
prtMenuConfigNation
prtMenuConfigAutoCR
prtMenuConfigAutoLF
prtMenuConfigIBM20CPI
prtMenuConfigBarcode
/* ANSI SETTINGS START */
prtMenuConfigA_CharSet
prtMenuConfigA_CharTable
prtMenuConfigA_Nation
prtMenuConfigA_RIS_Enable
prtMenuConfigA_SI_SO_Control
prtMenuConfigA_AutoCR
prtMenuConfigA_PrimeOnDEL
prtMenuConfigA_ControlInDg
prtMenuConfigA_ExpandUp
prtMenuConfigA_AltGraph
prtMenuConfigA_8BitControl
prtMenuConfigA_ENQ_Code
prtMenuConfigA_SubSuperScript
prtMenuConfigA_ControlInESC
prtMenuConfigA_VT_NotSet

Appendix D – Lan Interface MIB Support

MIB
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 24
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 25
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 26
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 27
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 28
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 29
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 30
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 31
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 32
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 33
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 34
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 35
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 36
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 37
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 38
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 39
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 40
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 41
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 42
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 5
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 6
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 7
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 8
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 9
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 10
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 11
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 12
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 13
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 14
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 15
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 16
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 17
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 18
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 19
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 20
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 21
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 22
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 23
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 24

378

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 13 List of the MIB of the printer (cont.)
Description

MIB

prtMenuConfigA_DoubleLF
prtMenuConfigA_AutoWrap
prtMenuConfigA_ClearMargin
prtMenuConfigA_Backup
prtMenuConfigA_GuardBar
/* ANSI SETTINGS END */
prtMenuConfigParType
prtMenuConfigParSelectIn
prtMenuConfigParDataBits
prtMenuConfigParDedicBuffer
prtMenuConfigSerType
prtMenuConfigSerBaudRate
prtMenuConfigSerDataBits
prtMenuConfigSerParity
prtMenuConfigSerProtocol
prtMenuConfigSerLocRem
prtMenuConfigSerDedicBuffer
prtMenuConfigBuzzer
prtMenuConfigSequence
prtMenuConfigRibbon
prtMenuConfigBarCodeDpi
prtMenuConfigTextDirect
prtMenuConfigGraphDirect
prtMenuConfigBarCodeDirect
prtMenuConfigGraphHighSpeed
prtMenuConfigPowerOnPath
prtMenuConfigMenuLanguage
prtMenuConfigLowerJamSensor
prtMenuConfigUpperJamSensor
prtMenuConfigTearAdjust
prtMenuConfigQuick
prtMenuConfigOverlay
prtMenuConfigA_AutoLF
prtMenuConfigD_G0_CharSet
prtMenuConfigD_UP_CharSet
prtMenuConfigD_AutoCR
prtMenuConfigD_AutoLF
prtMenuConfigD_AutoWrap
prtMenuConfigCondensed
printserver
csystem
csystemVersion
cinetd
cinetdnum
cinetdNumber
cinetdlpd
cinetdDescr1
cinetdType1

1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 25
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 26
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 27
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 28
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 29

Appendix D – Lan Interface MIB Support

1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 30
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 31
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 32
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 33
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 34
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 35
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 36
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 37
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 38
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 39
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 40
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 45
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 46
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 47
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 48
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 49
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 50
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 51
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 52
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 53
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 54
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 55
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 56
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 57
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 58
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 59
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 60
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 61
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 62
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 63
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 64
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 65
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 66
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 1, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 1, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2

379

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 13 List of the MIB of the printer (cont.)
Description

MIB

cinetdUdp1
cinetdWait1
cinetdInstance1
cinetdUserID1
cinetdProgram1
cinetdProgram11
cinetdftp
cinetdDescr2
cinetdType2
cinetdUdp2
cinetdWait2
cinetdInstance2
cinetdUserID2
cinetdProgram2
cinetdProgram12
cinetdtelnet
cinetdDescr3
cinetdType3
cinetdUdp3
cinetdWait3
cinetdInstance3
cinetdUserID3
cinetdProgram3
cinetdProgram13
cinetddipd
cinetdDescr4
cinetdType4
cinetdUdp4
cinetdWait4
cinetdInstance4
cinetdUserID4
cinetdProgram4
cinetdProgram14
cservices
cservnum
cservNumber
cservftp
cservDescr1
cservPort1
cservType1
cservtelnet
cservDescr2
cservPort2
cservType2
cservlpd
cservDescr3
cservPort3
cservType3

1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 5
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 6
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 7
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 8
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 5
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 6
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 7
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 8
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 5
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 6
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 7
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 8
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 5
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 6
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 7
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 8
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 1, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 2, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 2, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 2, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 3, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 3, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 3, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 4, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 4, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 4, 3

Appendix D – Lan Interface MIB Support

380

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 13 List of the MIB of the printer (cont.)
Description

MIB

cservdipd
cservDescr4
cservPort4
cservType4
cqueue
cinit
cintAddr
cdefRout
cnetMask
cinitHost
cinitWorkg
cinitDescr
cinitBoot
cprinter
cconfig
csnmpd
csnmpdEnb
csnmpdReadCommunity
csnmpdSetCommunity
csnmpdSetCommunityCrypt
chttpd
chttpdEnb
csamba
csambaEnb
cnovell
cnovellEnb
cnovellFrmType
cnovellNwServer
cnovellPrtName
cnovellQueueName
csmtp
csmtpEnb
csmtpEmailAddr
csmtpSMTPAddr
csmtpTrap
csmtpEmailMittAddr
csecurity
csecUser
csecPwd
csecPwdCrypt
cipds
cipdsEnb
cipdsPort

1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 5
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 5, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 5, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 5, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 5
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 6
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 7
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 6
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 1, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 1, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 1, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 1, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 2, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 3, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 4, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 4, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 4, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 4, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 4, 5
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 5
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 5, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 5, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 5, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 5, 4
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 5, 6
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 6
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 6, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 6, 2
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 6, 3
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 7
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 7, 1
1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 7, 2

Appendix D – Lan Interface MIB Support

381

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

Appendix D – Lan Interface MIB Support

PTX‐S828

382

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Appendix E. The Remote Printer Management Utility
The Remote Printer Management Utility (RPMU) is a software tool for network administrators that allows the
configuration and control of Printronix Company printers remotely connected to the Ethernet LAN.
With this tool the installed printers may be controlled, configured and organized easily.
The main features are:
Device Discovery

Searches for the devices within a range of IP addresses.

Printer Organization

The printers connected to the network can be organized into logical
groups in a hierarchically structured tree.

Printer Status

Report Checks the printer's status and reports alarms.

Printer Configuration

The remotely connected printers may be configured as needed from
the administrators workstation.

Firmware Updating

Provides a firmware downloading function to upgrade both the base
and the LAN card firmware.

Remote Operator Panel

Provides a virtual operator panel for the remotely connected

Management

printer at the administrators workstation that allows to perform all
functions normally achieved pressing the operator panel keys.

The Remote Printer Management Utility also provides the basic status management for third-party printers
compliant to the standard MIB objects.
Operating System Compatibility
The Remote Printer Management Utility is a Java™ based application and can be run on any platform
supporting the Java Run Time Environment version 1.6 or newer.
Software Installation and Documentation
The Remote Printer Management Utility software and Administrators Manual can be downloaded from our
website at : www.printronix.com

Appendix E – The RPMU

383

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This page is intentionally left blank

Appendix E – The RPMU

384

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Appendix F. Print Driver Support
Microsoft Windows drivers, IBM pSeries AIX color files, and IBM System i workstation customization objects
can be downloaded from our website: www.Printronix.com

Appendix F – Printer Driver Support

385

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

Appendix F – Printer Driver Support

PTX‐S828

386

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Appendix G. Application Paper Source Selection
Application-controlled paper-source selection
This section describes the identifiers to use in selecting the various available paper sources on the S828
printer for key IPDS applications. These selections will cause the appropriate forms path selection
commands to be sent to the printer from the host applications.

PSF usage - z/OS and System i
In the z/OS® PSF's (PSF/MVS, PSF/VSE, and PSF/VM), the desired paper source is identified in the
FORMDEF, using the appropriate Media ID number as defined in the following sections. The FORMDEF
can also be used in System i™ PSF and uses these same Media ID numbers.

Paper source identification (media IDs)
Continuous forms or combination forms feeding: “Continuous Forms Feeding” uses either the front
forms path or the rear forms path. The front path uses the forms that are fed into the front of the printer,
and utilize the forms tractor installed in the standard (default) Front Push configuration when the optional
second tractor is not installed. The standard (default) tractor becomes the rear tractor only when the
optional second tractor is installed. In this condition the optional second tractor becomes the front tractor.
“Combination Forms Feeding” applies to the dual continuous forms (both front push and rear push path in
use) printer configuration.
This is the common usage mode for the S828. These identifiers should be used in all configurations.
In this configuration, the S828 paper sources are identified by the host application as follows:
Front
Rear

Media ID = 1
Media ID = 2

The S828 may be run in native (S828) mode or in an emulation mode (something other than S828).

Creating form definitions (FORMDEFs)
In z/OS and AIX: Page Printer Formatting Aid (PPFA) can be used to create Form Definitions in the z/OS
and AIX® environments.
In System i: System i supports user specification of a Form Definition with the PRTAFPDTA command
and DEVTYPE=*AFPDS. Support for user named Form Definitions in the Printer File is included in System
i V3R2 and V3R7 or later releases.

System i media selection (other than FORMDEF)
In System i, selecting the input media source requires a combination of two Printer File parameters, Form
Feed (FORMFEED) and Source Drawer (DRAWER). The following selection parameters should be used
whether the printer is configured in S828 or emulation (4230/42x4) mode:
Front CF:
FORMFEED (*CONT)
See notes 1 & 2)
Rear CF:
FORMFEED (2)
(See notes 1 & 2)
Note: The combination of settings with Automatic Eject = Enabled and Automatic Restore = Disabled is not
recommended.
Notes:
1. In OS/400® Version 3 Release 2 and Version 3 Release 7, the FORMFEED parameter has been
enhanced to support explicit selection of the rear continuous form input source as follows:

Appendix G‐ Application Paper Source in IPDS

387

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Rear CF:
FORMFEED (*CONT2)
In this case, the AS/400® is aware that the Rear Continuous Forms is in fact a continuous form feed.
Therefore a drawer parameter is not required and the Forms Alignment message can be issued.
2. When you are switching from one continuous forms path to the other, printed output must be manually
torn off and removed from the printer before the first forms path can be parked. For this reason, you
may want to use the FORM keyword in the AS/400 Printer File to alert the operator to remove any
printer output before a job using a different forms path is sent.

Use of 'FORMS' parameters - z/OS and System i
For continuous forms printers with only a single continuous forms paper source, forms were specified
using FORMS parameters in JCL or, for the AS/400, the FORMTYPE parameter. This method can still be
used to have the operator change to the correct forms for the job. But it cannot be used to cause the
printer to switch between the Front and Rear continuous forms sources.

Using S828 with System i Host Print Transform
AS/400 Host Print Transform (HPT) provides two objects that allow you to use the multiple paper sources
available on the S828 printer.
The first is *IBM4247DUAL. This object provides support for the two tractor feeds, with DRAWER (1)
meaning the front tractor feed and DRAWER (2) meaning the rear tractor feed.
Front Continuous Forms:
Rear Continuous Forms:

DRAWER (2)
DRAWER (4)

Support that includes this enhancement to the HPT objects can also be added to V4R1 or V4R2 by
applying a PTF. For information, see the Euro I Info APAR, number II1523.

Appendix G‐ Application Paper Source in IPDS

388

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Appendix H. S828 Bar Code and OCR Printing Options
This appendix contains information about the options that are available for printing bar codes and Optical
Character Recognition (OCR) characters. The bar code charts detail the element (bar/space) width
options, the wide-to-narrow element ratios, the magnification percentages, and the characters printed per
inch plus whether the bar codes can be printed in low-contrast or high-contrast modes. Low-contrast mode
provides the best throughput, while high-contrast mode results in the best bar code printing quality.
The OCR section contains the Optical Character Recognition symbol subsets that can be printed.

Bar Code Printing Options Charts
Keep the following statements in mind when printing bar codes.
● All bar codes printed by the S828 Printer can print in high-contrast mode. Not all of them, however, can
print in low-contrast mode. If you specify low-contrast mode for a bar code that is not supported in that
mode, the printer will not return an error but will default to high-contrast mode instead.
● Vertically-rotated bar codes may not consistently meet bar/space width specifications. Users should test
for application suitability.
● Bar codes printed in low-contrast mode may not consistently meet specifications. Users should test for
application suitability.
Table 14. Bar Code Printing Options for Non-UPC Family Bar Codes

Appendix H

389

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 14. Bar Code Printing Options for Non-UPC Family Bar Codes (continued)

Appendix H

390

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Table 14. Bar Code Printing Options for Non-UPC Family Bar Codes (continued)

Table 15. Bar Code Printing Options for UPC Family Bar Codes

Optical Character Recognition (OCR) Printing
OCR Symbols
The S828 prints a comprehensive set of OCR-A and OCR-B characters derived from standards developed
by the International Standards Organization (ISO) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
All OCR character shapes produced by the S828 Printer are not identical with the shapes defined in these
standards. Users should test OCR printing with their scanning equipment to verify satisfactory
performance.

Appendix H

391

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

OCR Scanning
Printronix Company has tested the following OCR symbol subsets for readability:
Table 16. OCR Symbol Subsets

Appendix H

392

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Appendix I. Configuration Menu Lockout
Configuration Menu Lockout should be used by the application programmer or printer operator to lock the
Configuration Menu when you want to prevent a casual operator from changing parameter values that
have been set for print jobs.
To set Configuration Menu Lockout:
1. Press ON LINES if the READY indicator is on. The printer goes to the NOT READY state.
2. In the NOT READY state, press and hold ALTERNATE + MACRO + ONLINE keys in the same time.
The printer displays MENU LOCKED.
3. To unlock the Configuration Menu repeat the step 1 and 2. The printer display MENU UNLOCKED.

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

393

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

PTX‐S828

394

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Appendix J. Addendum (Bar Codes)
The following chapter integrates the Bar Code information already present in this manual adding the
Intelligent Mail Barcode explanation with examples in different emulations.
Furthermore it describes some features in specific Emulation Commands present in the firmware but not
described in the previous chapters.

Bar Code Mode
The S828 printer has three different Bar Code Modes selectable in the Power-on Configuration Setup.
1) Native selection enables bar code printing using :
● The Native commands as indicated in chapter 2 and also in this chapter as examples
● MTPL commands as indicated later on in this chapter.
2) Alt.1 selection enables bar code printing using :
● EPSON or IBM commands as indicated in chapter 1.
3) Alt.2 selection enables bar code printing using:
● SEIKOSHA commands as indicated later on in this chapter.
The S828 can print Bar Code using also :
● ANSI commands as indicated in chapter 3 (see example in this chapter)
● IPDS (see example in this chapter)

USPS Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state
The S828 can print the USPS Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state in different emulations.
The 4-statebarcode data must contains only ASCII numeric (from 0 to 9) and must be converted into only 0,
1, 2 or 3. Each number represents one of the four possible bars.
The Intelligent Mail barcode is a 65-bar Postal Service™ barcode used to sort and track letters and flats. It
allows mailers to use a single barcode to participate in multiple Postal Service programs simultaneously,
expands mailers’ ability to track individual mail pieces, and provides greater mail stream visibility.
The Intelligent Mail barcode consists of a 20-digit tracking code (Barcode Identifier, Service Type Identifier,
Mailer Identifier, and Serial Number) and a Routing Code (ZIP Code™) field of up to 11 digits.
An encoder converts the digits into a 65-character string representing the bars of the IMb® tracking code,
EXAMPLE:
Service Type ID of 270 (First-Class Mail®, Intelligent Mail Full-Service option, with IMb Tracing® service,
no address correction), Mailer ID 123456, uniquely identified by Serial Number 200800001, going to ZIP
Code 98765-4321(01), is encoded like this:
Digit String:
0027012345620080000198765432101
Intelligent Mail barcode encoder > Encoded string (T=Tracker, F=Full Bar, A=Ascender, D=Descender):
TTFAFDADTFFFADTAFAFTTDATDFAAFTDAFDFDFDATFDFTDDDDFADFFDADDTDDTTDAT

More information on website: https://postalpro.usps.com/mailing/intelligent-mail-barcode

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

395

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state with Native Commands Mode
(Native Bar Code Mode)
DC4 DC4 ESC ! h “ f EM
UPPS Bar Code Selection.
ASCII Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! h “ f F r EM
Hexadecimal Value
X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'21' h X’22’ f F r X’19’
Decimal Value
20 20 27 33 h 34 f F r 25
h = Bar Code Height at n/6”, 1 < h < 30
f = Readable character printing
f = 0 printing disabled
f = 1 printing enabled, characters below barcode, justified position
f = 21 printing enabled, characters above barcode, justified position
f = 81 printing enabled, characters below barcode, middle position
f = A1 printing enabled, characters above barcode, middle position
F = Font selection for the printable characters
0 Selected font by r value
1 Default font for text
1 Special font for OCR-A o OCR-B bar codes according to the t value
3 Special font for OCR-A bar codes
4 Special font for OCR-B bar codes
r = Bar code rotation
r
0
1
2
3
4

Selection
No rotation
Rotation at 0°
Rotation at 90°
Rotation at 180°
Rotation at 270°

EM = Check sequence terminator

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

396

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state with Epson/IBM Emulations Commands
(Alt. 1 Bar Code Mode)
See chapter 1, pages 54, 55 for details of these commands.
Remark: these commands are not handled in DEC emulations.

ESC [ v n m
Sets Barcode parameters. (IBM -Epson)
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ vnm
X'1B' X'5B' X'76' nm
27 91 118 nm

Set barcode parameters according to the table below. Parameter values that are not supported result in
the command being ignored.
n
0
2

Parameter Description
Barcode style IMB 4-state
Human readable line

Rotation and HRC font

HRC font for rotate barcode

m values
X ‘22’, 34 dec
0=disable
1, 21 =enable below barcode
81, A1 =enable above barcode
0.1=no rotation and current font for HRC
2=90 3=180 4=270 and special HRC font
3=OCRA 4=OCRB

Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state with MTPL Commands
(Native Bar Code Mode)
ESC [ 9 SP k CR
Sets bar code parameters (BC).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ 9 SP k CR
X'1B' X'5B' X’39’ X'20' X’6B’ X’0D’
27 91 57 32 109 13

In next pages a specific sub-chapter describes the MTPL (Mannesmann-Tally Printer Language) commands
which can be handled by S828 printer.

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

397

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state with ANSI Emulation Commands
See chapter 3, pages 86 and 87 for details of these commands.

ESC [ p1; ; ; pn }
Sets bar code parameters (BC).
ASCII Code
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

ESC [ p1; pn }
X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'7D'
27 91 p1 59 pn 125

This command allows selection of the bar code characteristics such as style height, symbol rotation and so
on. The command ESC [3 t enables the bar code mode while ESC [0 t disables the mode.
p1:
p1

Bar code style
FUNCTION
X ’33 34’, dec 48 49

IMB 4-state

p3:
p3

Human Readable Input (HRI)
FUNCTION
0
Disables printing of the HRI
1
Enables printing of the HRI

p9:
p9

Rotation
FUNCTION
0
0 degrees using current font
1
0 degrees using special HRI font
2
90 degrees using special HRI font
3
180 degrees using special HRI font
4
270 degrees using special HRI font

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

398

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state with IPDS Emulation Commands
See chapter 5, pages 196 to 208 for details of these commands.
The BCDD (Bar Code Data Descriptor) has only one byte changed:
Decimal
16

Hex
10

Content
22

Description
Bar Code Type
USPS Four.State Bar Code

Figure 147. Hex Dump of Intelligent Mail Bar Code in IPDS Commands Example

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

399

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

USPS Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state Examples
The following are samples for USPS Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state printed with the S828 Printer with
related hex commands:

Figure 148. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in Native Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)

Figure 149. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in Epson/IBM Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

400

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 150. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in ANSI Commands Example

Figure 151. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in MTPL Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

401

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Bar Codes handled in NATIVE Commands
(Native Bar Code Mode)
The S828 integrates in the firmware the handling of the Bar Codes with the NATIVE commands.
The complete and detailed information for these commands can be found on chapter 2 of this Programmer
Manual. Here are reported some examples how these commands work.

Figure 152. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

402

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 153. Hex Dump of example on figure 151

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

403

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 154. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

404

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 155. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

405

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 156. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

406

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 157. Hex Dump of example on figures 154, 155, 156

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

407

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Bar Codes handled in MTPL Commands
(Native Bar Code Mode)
The S828 integrates in the firmware a sub-set handling of the MTPL emulation Bar Codes commands.
The complete and detailed information for these commands can be found on specific MTPL Programmer
Manual available on web.

Bar Code Description
Before the data, which contain the Barcode information, are transmitted to the printer, the Barcode header
must be sent. Otherwise the standard parameter values are used (see section "Header Format"). In the
header, the printing parameters, the Barcode size and the Barcode Type are de-fined. This header only
needs to be transferred once, unless settings are to be changed or the printer has been turned off.
Header Format Format: SUB [F] a [n] [;xyz] [;p] EM
[ ] Specification is optional
x, y unregarded at EAN/UPC-Barcode!
For Code 128 and EAN 128 (Type S+T) only the X parameter is valid. This is automatically used for the Y
parameter. The Z parameter is not evaluated.
Meaning of the characters:
SUB (hex.1A, dec.26) Start header
F
Print feature
SP (hex. 20, dec. 32): HRI OFF, Normal Print, Double Pass, Unidirectional (def.)
! (hex. 22, dec. 34): HRI ON, Normal Print, Double Pass, Unidirectional
a ASCII a = "A"..."S"
Barcode Types (def. “A”, see later on)
n ASCII n = "0"..."90" Barcode height in n/6 inch. At n="0" the Barcode height equals to 1/12 inch. (def. 1)
; ASCII
Separation character
x ASCII x = "0"..."3"
Width of the narrow bar (def.0 )
y ASCII y = "0"..."3"
Width of the narrow space (def.0 )
z ASCII z = "0"..."3"
Ratio of wide to narrow (def.0 )
p ASCII p = "0"…"9"
Barcode orientation (def. 0, horizontal)
EM (hex.19, dec.25)
End of header
Barcode Types
A = 2/5 matrix (default)
D = Code 11
G = Codabar
J = 2/5 matrix (default)
M = MSI/modified Plessey
P = UPC E with HRI
T = EAN 128/GSI-128

B = 2/5 industrial
E = Code BCD matrix
H = EAN 8 with HRI
K = EAN 13 with HRI
N = UPC A with HRI
Q = UPC E without HRI

Post Office Barcode Types
US Postnet Barcode
Planet Barcode
KIX Barcode
Royal Mail Customer Barcode
USPS Intelligent Mail Barcode (IMB)

C = 2/5 interleaved
F = Code 39
I = EAN 8 without HRI
L = EAN 13 without HRI
O = UPC A without HRI
S = Code 128

= ESC [ 1 SP p
= ESC [ 2 SP p EM
= ESC [ 2 SP k
= ESC [ 1 SP k
= ESC [ 9 SP k

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

408

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

MTPL Bar Codes Commands Examples

Figure 158. Bar Code Examples with MTPL Commands (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

409

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 159. Bar Code Examples with MTPL Commands (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

410

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 160. Hex Dump of example on figures 158, 159

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

411

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Bar Codes handled in SEIKOSHA Commands
(Alt. 2 Bar Code Mode)
The S828 partially integrates in the firmware a sub-set handling of the SEIKOSHA BP-9000 Bar Codes
specific commands.
The complete and detailed information for these can be found in specific SEIKOSHA BP-9000 programmer
manual available on web.
#
1.

Function
Bar code type

Bar Code Commands
DC4 DC4 T n

Element width

DC4 DC4 E n1 n2

Bar code height

DC4 DC4 H n

Setting HRI on and off

DC4 DC4 I n

HRI font

DC4 DC4 F n

Check character

DC4 DC4 C n

Starting the bar code data sequence

ESC SI

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

Ending the bar code data seqence
Bar code data sequence
Printing density
Guard bar expansion
Start and stop characters
Bar code rotational angle
Disabling HRI of the start and stop characters
Value input mode
Initializing the bar code mode

ESC SO
DC4 DC4 B n d1 d2 ... dk
DC4 DC4 D n
DC4 DC4 G n
DC4 DC4 N n1 n2
DC4 DC4 R n
DC4 DC4 S n
DC4 DC4 V n
DC4 DC4 @

Bar Code Type (n)
0 Industrial 2 of 5
1 Interleaved 2 of 5
2 Matrix 2 of 5
3 Codabar
4 Code11

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

5
6
7
8
9

Code39
Code93
Code128
EAN-8
EAN-13

412

10
11
12

UPC-A
UPC-E
Postnet

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

SEIKOSHA Commands Bar Codes Examples

Figure 161. Bar Code Examples with SEIKOSHA Commands (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

413

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Figure 162. Hex Dump of example on figure 161

Appendix I Configuration Menu Lockout

414

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Notices
These terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Ricoh Co., Ltd., in the United States, other
countries, or both:
● IBM
● Infoprint Solutions
● Ricoh
● Advanced Function Printing
● AFP
● Intelligent Printer Data Stream
● IPDS
These terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in
the United States, other countries, or both:
● AIX
● AS400
● i5/OS
● IBM
● iSeries
● MVS
● OS/400
● Print Services Facility
● PSF
● System i
● z/OS
● zSeries
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Intel, Intel Inside (logos), MMX, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States,
other countries, or both.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States, other countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

Notices

415

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This page is intentionally left blank.

Notices

416

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This page is intentionally left blank.

Notices

417

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

This page is intentionally left blank.

Notices

418

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Customer Support

Printronix Customer Support Center
IMPORTANT

Please have the following information available prior to calling the Printronix
Customer Support Center:
•
•
•
•

Model number
Serial number (located on the back of the printer)
Installed options (i.e., interface and host type if applicable to the problem)
Configuration printout:
Press the ON LINE key to take the printer OFF LINE
Press the PROGRAM key
Is displayed
PRINT OUT? NO
The PROGRAM SETUP
Press the → key
PRINT OUT? YES
PRINTOUT is printed
Press the ↓ key until
PRINT STATS? NO Is displayed
The USAGE STATISTICS
Press the → key
PRINT OUT? YES
DATA PRINTOUT is printed
Press the ↓ key until
Is displayed
CONFIG MENU NO
Press the → key to display
CONFIG MENU YES
Is displayed
Press the ↓ key
PRINT OUT? NO
The CONFIGURATION
Press the → key
PRINT OUT? YES
SETUP PRINTOUT is printed
Press the PROGRAM key
Press the TEAR key and tear off the printout at the perforation

• Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer?
• Description of the problem (be specific)
• Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem (faxing or emailing these samples
may be required)
Americas
Europe, Middle East, and Africa
Asia Pacific
China

(714) 368-2686
(31) 24 6489 311
(65) 6548 4114
(86) 800-999-6836

http://www.printronix.com/support.aspx

Printronix Supplies Department
Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies.
Americas
Europe, Middle East, and Africa
Asia Pacific
China

(800) 733-1900
(33) 1 46 25 19 07
(65) 6548 4100
(86) 400-886-5598

http://www.printronix.com/supplies-parts.aspx

Customer Support

419

260071‐001A

Programmer Manual

PTX‐S828

Corporate Offices
Printronix, LLC.
6440 Oak Canyon Rd, Suite 200
Irvine, CA 92618
U.S.A.
Phone: (714) 368-2300
Fax: (714) 368-2600
Printronix Inc.
c/o Printronix Nederland BV
Bijsterhuizen 11-38
6546 AS Nijmegen
The Netherlands
Phone: (31) 24 6489489
Fax: (31) 24 6489499
Printronix Schweiz GmbH
3Changi Business Park Vista
#04-05 AkzoNobelHouse
Singapore 486051
Phone: (65) 6548 4100
Fax: (65) 6548 4111
Printronix Commercial (Shanghai) Co. Ltd
Room 903, 9thFloor
No. 199, North Xizang Road
200070 Shanghai P.R. China
Phone: (86) 400 886 5598
Fax: (8621) 61171256
Printronix India PvtLtd
B-808/809, BSEL Tech Park 8thFloor, Sector 30A
VashaiNaviMumbai 400705 India
Toll Free No.: 1800 102 7896 Fax: (9211) 4158 5555
Visit the Printronix web site at www.printronix.com

Customer Support

420

260071‐001A

SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
This manual refers to various company and products by their trade names.
In most of the cases, these designations are claimed as trademarks or
registered tramarkers by their respective companies.
Copyright 2017 PRINTRONIX s.r.l. - Printed in Italy

260071-001A

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : sbassani
Create Date                     : 2017:12:14 14:01:08+01:00
Modify Date                     : 2017:12:14 14:04:19+01:00
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP Core 5.5.0
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.2.0 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Microsoft Word - 260071-001A_PM_S828NEW
Creator                         : sbassani
Document ID                     : uuid:72780c88-6935-4aa5-9d6c-2c1c5c7f4014
Instance ID                     : uuid:055aa340-1a38-4b0d-87ae-76f87edc91f6
Page Count                      : 424

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

260071 001A_PM_S828NEW PTX_PRM_S828_260071 001 PTX PRM S828

PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001 PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001

PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001 PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001

PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001 PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation